BEAM Plus

New Buildings

Version 1.1 (2010.04)

Building Environmental Assessment Method

 DOCUMENT CONTROL

Release Notice

Project: BEAM Plus

Product Identification: BEAM Plus for New Buildings

[Name, Version]
Version: 1.1

Date: 16 April 2010

Amendments

Version Date of Issue Page Number Amendment Details

Number
1.1 16 April 2010 Page 1-17 Section 1.5 Summary of Credits:

MA 8 – Revise the assessment criteria.

MA 11 – Revise the construction waste
recycling quantity from 50% (1 credit) & 75%
(2 credits) to 30% & 60% respectively.
1.1 16 April 2010 Page 3-8 Revise the ‘Requirement’ from
‘Implementation of a waste management
system that…’ to ‘Implementation with proof
of documentation of a waste management
system that…’ .
1.1 16 April 2010 Page 3-12 Take out ‘external elements’, ‘pavement
paving’ and ‘internal fittings’ from the listed
building elements. New item ‘parapet’ added.
1.1 16 April 2010 Page 3-14 The assessment criteria revised from ‘at least
70% of the listed items in checklists…’ to ‘at
least 50% for residential development and
70% for other building types of the listed
items in checklists…’.
1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 3-23 to 3-25 MA 8 – Revise the assessment criteria for
‘Ozone Depleting Substances’.

1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 3-26 to 3-28 MA 9 to 11 – Page numbers shifted.

1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 4-20 to 4-22 EU 10 – Revise the ‘Background’ section by
including all engineering systems.
1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 5-1 to 5-7 WU P1 to P2 – Revise the water use
assessment pre-requisites.
1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 6-44 to 6-45 IEQ 18 – Include the assessment criteria for
indoor games halls & indoor swimming pools
etc.
1.1 16 April 2010 Pages 6-49 to 6-51 IEQ 20 – Define the assessment scope for
de-centralized air-conditioned premises and
include the assessment criteria for indoor
games halls & indoor swimming pools etc.
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS OVERVIEW
VERSION 1.1

OVERVIEW BUILDING ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT METHOD (BEAM)

A STANDARD THAT BEAM provides building users with a single performance label that
DEFINES BUILDING demonstrates the overall qualities of a building, be it a new or refurbished
QUALITY building, or one that is already in use. A BEAM assessed building will be
safer, healthier, more comfortable, more functional and more efficient
that a similar building which has not achieved the prescribed levels of
performance. BEAM is:
• the leading initiative in Hong Kong to assess, improve, certify and
label the performance of buildings;
• a comprehensive standard and supporting process covering all
building types, including mixed use complexes;
• a means by which to benchmark and improve performance;
• a voluntary scheme developed in partnership with, and adopted by
the industry, at a level that makes it one of the leading schemes in
the world; and
• a driver for and means by which to ensure healthier, efficient, and
environmentally sustainable working and living environments.

COMPREHENSIVE BEAM embraces a range of good practices in planning, design,

ASSESSMENT construction, and management, operation and maintenance of buildings,
and is aligned with local regulations, standards and codes of practice.

BEAM
A standard for overall building performance

Exemplary practices in Exemplary practices in

planning and design. construction and
Exemplary practices in commissioning. JPNs,
management, operation and ProPECCs, Guides,
maintenance. Standards, etc.
Energy Labelling, IAQ Best practices over
Certification, etc. legal requirements.

A STANDARD FOR A healthy building is one that adversely affects neither the health of its
HEALTHY BUILDINGS users nor that of the larger environment. BEAM emphasises indoor
environmental quality and amenities as key performance indicators, but
not without proper consideration of the local, regional and global
environmental impacts.

A UNIQUE STANDARD The BEAM scheme is somewhat unique in that it:

• embraces a wide range of sustainability issues;
• covers the whole-life performance of buildings;
• assesses new buildings only upon completion, certifying actual
performance;
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS OVERVIEW
VERSION 1.1

• selects BEAM Assessor randomly for the project certification; and

• embraces management, operation and maintenance practices to
ensure a building performs at the highest level.

PURPOSE BEAM seeks to:

• enhance the quality of buildings in Hong Kong;
• stimulate demand for buildings that are more sustainable, giving
recognition for improved performance and minimizing false claims;
• provide a comprehensive set of performance standards that can be
pursued by developers and owners;
• reduce the environmental impacts of buildings throughout their life
cycle; and
• ensure that environmental considerations are integrated right from
the onset rather than retrospectively.

VOLUNTARY An assessment under BEAM is voluntary, providing an independently

ASSESSMENT certified performance rating for a building in clearly defined terms.
BEAM covers all types of new and existing buildings: residential,
commercial, institutional, and industrial. It embraces and endorses
exemplary practices in the planning, design, construction,
commissioning, management and operation of buildings in the context of
Hong Kong’s densely populated, predominantly high-rise development.
New buildings that are planned, designed, built and commissioned to the
standards set under the BEAM Plus for New Buildings [1] will provide for
safe, healthy, comfortable and efficient buildings that sustain the quality
of life and workplace productivity, whilst minimizing the depletion of
natural resources and reducing their environmental loadings. Existing
buildings managed and operated to the standards set under the BEAM
Plus for Existing Buildings [2] will provide and maintain high levels of
performance over the life of a building.

CLIENTS DECIDE BEAM provides a label for building quality. The label signifies levels of
quality in respect of safety, health and comfort, which are important
considerations for building users (buyers, tenants, occupants), and levels
of performance in respect of environmental and social dimensions, which
are of importance to society as a whole. It is for the Client (developer,
owner) to decide on whether to undertake a BEAM assessment and the
performance standards that are considered appropriate for the building in
the prevailing circumstances. The Client ultimately decides whether
obtaining a BEAM label is a worthwhile endeavour, but completion of a
BEAM assessment provides assurances as to the qualities of a building,
not as a subjective promise, but as a measured reality.

DEVELOPMENT HISTORY The BEAM scheme was established in 1996 with the issue of two
assessment methods, one for ‘new’ [ 3 ] and one for ‘existing’ office
buildings [4] largely based on the UK Building Research Establishment’s
BREEAM. Environmental issues were categorised under ‘global’, ‘local’
and ‘indoor’ impacts, respectively. In 1999 the ‘office’ versions [5,6] were
re-issued with minor revisions and updated references, together with an
entirely new assessment method for high-rise residential buildings [7].

1 BEAM Society. BEAM Plus for New Buildings. 2009

2 BEAM Society. BEAM Plus for Existing Buildings. 2009
3 CET. HK-BEAM 1/96. An Environmental Assessment Method for New Air-conditioned Office Premises. 1996.
4 CET. HK-BEAM 2/96. An Environmental Assessment Method for Existing Air-conditioned Office Premises. 1996.
5 CET. HK-BEAM 1/96R. An Environmental Assessment Method for New Air-conditioned Office Premises. 1999.
6 CET. HK-BEAM 2/96R. An Environmental Assessment Method for Existing Air-conditioned Office Premises.
7 CET. HK-BEAM 3/99. An Environmental Assessment Method for New Residential Buildings.1999.
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS OVERVIEW
VERSION 1.1

Both Version 4/04 ‘New Buildings’ [ 8 ] and Version 5/04 ‘Existing

Buildings’ [ 9 ] represented significant upgrades to the previous BEAM
documents in 2004. These versions have been developed from the pilot
versions 4/03 and 5/03 published in June 2003 following extensive
review by the BEAM Society Technical Review Panels, supported by
further research and development. Besides expanding the range of
building developments that can be assessed these versions of BEAM
widened the coverage to include additional issues that are regarded as
further defining quality and sustainability of buildings.
In 2009, the climate change and global warming became international
issues. Various countries including developed and developing areas
cooperated to help improving the existing situations. In response to the
critical global environmental issues, BEAM Plus has been evolved to
meet the higher expectation from the public and communities.

BEAM SOCIETY BEAM is owned and operated by the BEAM Society [10], an independent
not-for-profit organization whose membership is drawn from the many
professional and interest groups that are part of Hong Kong’s building
construction and real estate sectors. Following initial funding from The
Real Estate Developers Association of Hong Kong (REDA), BEAM
development is funded from assessment fees and the voluntary efforts of
BEAM Society members and associates.

A SUCCESS STORY On a per capita basis BEAM has assessed more buildings and more
square meters of space than any other similar scheme in use worldwide.
The take up of assessments has embraced mainly air-conditioned
commercial buildings and high-rise residential buildings, the leading
users of energy and other natural resources in Hong Kong. In raising
awareness about the environmental impacts of buildings BEAM has
contributed the development of ‘Green and Sustainable buildings’ in the
HKSAR. The new versions of BEAM will continue to contribute to this
development process through more comprehensive coverage and higher
performance expectations.

BEAM ACHIEVEMENTS As of March 2010, BEAM provided recognition for improved building
performance to around 240 landmark properties in Hong Kong, Beijing,
Shanghai and Shenzhen, comprising over 10.5 million m2 of spaces and
56,000 residential units. Comprehensive BEAM standard for New and
Existing Buildings Developments will see this number increase
significantly.

FUTURE DEVELOPMENT To build on this success BEAM is being developed further by providing:
• on-line support to Clients; and
• web-based tools for the purposes of preliminary self assessments.

8 BEAM Society. BEAM 4/04. Building Environmental Assessment Method for New Buildings.
9 BEAM Society. BEAM 5/04. Building Environmental Assessment Method for Existing Buildings.
10 BEAM Society. http://www.hk-beam.org.hk/
(Ref. 1, 2 are available at http://www.hk-beam.org.hk/general/home.php)
(Ref. 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 are available at http://www.bse.polyu.edu.hk/Research_Centre/BEP/hkbeam/main.html)
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS OVERVIEW
VERSION 1.1

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

BEAM The Building Environmental Assessment Method (BEAM) is a

significant private sector initiative in Hong Kong to promote buildings
that are more sustainable, through enhanced design, construction,
commissioning, management, and operation and maintenance
practices. BEAM 2009 has been developed by the BEAM Society. The
scheme is owned by the BEAM Society and is operated under the
guidance of the BEAM Society Executive Committee. Secretarial and
logistics support is provided by the Business Environment Council.

BEAM SOCIETY Mr. Michael Arnold, Chairman

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE Ms. Agnes Ng, Vice Chairlady

Ir Prof. Daniel Chan, Vice Chairman

Mr. Kevin Edmunds, Vice Chairman
Mr. Cary Chan, Mr. C. K. Lau, Dr. Conn Yuen, Mr. Dan Rusu, Mr. David
Yau, Mr. James Pong, Dr. John Burnett, Mr. John Herbert, Mr. John Ng,
Mr. Jon Seller, Mr. Jonathan Lee, Mr. Kendrew Leung, Mr. K. M. So,
Prof. K. S. Wong, Mr. Martin King, Mr. Peter Lee, Mr. Peter Wong, Mr.
Reuben Chu, Mr. Russell Jones, Mr. Toby Bath, Mr. Victor Cheung

BEAM PLUS WORKING Mr. Reuben Chu - Chair, Mr. John Ng (Chair for Site Aspects Sub-
GROUPS group), Prof. C. S. Poon (Chair for Materials Aspects Sub-group), Dr.
Raymond Yau (Chair for Energy Use Sub-group), Mr. William Cheung
(Chair for Water Use Sub-group), Prof. Daniel W. T. Chan (Chair for
IEQ Sub-group), Mr. Peter Young (Chair for O&M Aspects Sub-group).
Working group members include: Mr. Alfred Sit, Mr. Andrew Wong, Dr.
Anne Kerr, Mr. Anthony Fok, Mr. Benny Au, Mr. Billy Li, Mr. Bobby Ng,
Mr. C. C. Ngan, Mr. C. W. Tse, Mr. C. F. Leung, Mr. C. K. Chan, Mr. C.
K. Wong, Mr. C. S. Chin, Mr. C. S. Ho, Dr. Calvin Chiu, Mr. Cary Chan,
Mr. Clarence Fung, Ms. Claudine Lee, Dr. Conn Yuen, Ms. Connie
Yeung, Mr. Edmond Wu, Mr. Edward Chan, Prof. Edward Ng, Ms. Emily
Wong, Ms. Eva Ho, Mr. Fredrick Leong, Ms. Grace Kwok, Mr. H. S.
Lam, Mr. H. Y. Chiu, Mr. Hyvan Wong, Ms. Ivy Lee, Mr. Jacky Lau, Mr.
Jacky Leung, Ms. Janet Ng, Mr. Jeffrey Siu, Ms. Jennifer Chung, Mr.
John Cheng, Mr. John Herbert, Mr. Jon Seller, Mr. Jonathan Yau, Mr.
Julian Bott, Ms. Julie Wong, Mr. K. C. Mak, Mr. K. L. Tam, Mr. K. M. Li,
Mr. K. M. So, Mr. K. S. Tso, Mr. Keith Kan, Mr. Ken Cheung, Mr.
Kenneth Chan, Mr. Kenneth Lam, Mr. Kenneth Li, Mr. Martin Tam, Mr.
Michael Li, Mr. Peter Chan, Ms. Phyllis Li, Ms. Priscilla Lee, Mr. Richard
Cuncliffe, Mr. Robert Allender, Ms. Rosa Ho, Mr. Ryan Lee, Dr. Ryan
Song, Prof. S. C. Kot, Mr. S. K. Ho, Ms. Shani Yip, Mr. Shawn Dolley,
Mr. Stanley Chow, Prof. Stephen Lau, Dr. Tony Lam, Dr. Trevor Ng, Mr.
Vincent Cheng, Mr. W. S. Tsui, Mr. Wallace Leung, Ms. Wei Jiang, Dr.
William Yu, Mr. Wilson Law, Mr. Wolfgang Peck, Mr. Y. T. Tang, Mr. Y.
K. Cheung

DEVELOPMENT TEAM Research and development was undertaken by the Department of

Architecture, The Chinese University of Hong Kong under the direction
of Prof. J. Y. Tsou.
Contributions from Ir Prof. Daniel Chan, Prof. K. S. Wong and Mr.
Nelson Tam are also acknowledged.
1 FRAMEWORK OF BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS 1-1
1.1 SUSTAINABLE BUILDINGS 1-3
1.2 ASSESSMENT FRAMEWORK 1-5
1.3 CREDIT WEIGHTING AND OVERALL GRADE 1-8
1.4 ASSESSMENT PROCESS 1-11
1.5 SUMMARY OF CREDITS 1-13
2 SITE ASPECTS (SA) 2-1
2.P PREREQUISITE SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING AREA 2-3
2.1 SITE LOCATION SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND 2-5
SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT 2-7
SA 3 NEIGHBOURHOOD AMENITIES 2-9
2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL 2-11
SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACTT 2-14
SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE 2-16
SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTERS 2-18
SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS 2-20
SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD DAYLIGHT ACCESS 2-23
SA 10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 2-25
2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 2-26
SA 12 NOISE DURING CONSTRUCTION 2-28
SA 13 WATER POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 2-30
SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING EQUIPMENT 2-32
SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION 2-34
3 MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA) 3-1
3.P PREREQUISITE MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR TEMPORARY WORKS 3-3
MA P2 USE OF NON-CFC BASED REFRIGERANTS 3-5
MA P3 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 3-6
MA P4 WASTE RECYCLE FACILITIES 3-8
3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MA 1 BUILDING REUSE 3-9
MATERIALS MA 2 MODULAR AND STANDARDISED DESIGN 3-10
MA 3 PREFABRICATION 3-12
MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION 3-14
3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS 3-17
MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST PRODUCTS 3-19
MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS 3-21
MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES 3-23
MA 9 REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED MATERIALS 3-26
3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT MA 10 DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION 3-27
MA 11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION 3-28
4 ENERGY USE (EU) 4-1
4.P PREREQUISITE EU P1 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE 4-5
4.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 EMISSIONS 4-6
EU 2 PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND REDUCTION 4-8
4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 4-9
SYSTEMS EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEMS IN CAR PARKS 4-11
EU 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS 4-13
EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 4-14
4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 4-16
EQUIPMENT EU 8 CLOTHES DRYING FACILITIES 4-18
EU 9 ENERGY EFFICIENT APPLIANCES 4-19
4.4 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 4-20
MANAGEMENT EU 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 4-23
EU 12 METERING AND MONITORING 4-25
4.5 BUILDING DESIGN FOR EU 13 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDING LAYOUT 4-27
ENERGY EFFICIENT
5 WATER USE (WU) 5-1
5.P PREREQUISITE WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY 5-3
WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE 5-5
5.1 WATER CONSERVATION WU 1 ANNUAL WATER USE 5-8
 WU 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL 5-9
WU 3 WATER EFFICIENT IRRIGATION 5-10
WU 4 WATER RECYCLING 5-11
WU 5 WATER EFFICIENT APPLIANCES 5-13
5.2 EFFLUENT WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO FOUL SEWERS 5-14
6 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ) 6-1
6.P PREREQUISITE IEQ P1 MINIMUM VENTILATION PERFORMANCE 6-6
6.1 SECURITY IEQ 1 SECURITY 6-7
6.2 HYGIENE IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE 6-9
IEQ 3 BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION 6-12
IEQ 4 WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES 6-13
6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT 6-14
IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION 6-18
IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION 6-20
IEQ 8 IAQ IN CAR PARKS 6-22
6.4 VENTILATION IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION 6-23
IEQ 10 BACKGROUND VENTILATION 6-25
IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION 6-27
IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS 6-30
6.5 THERMAL COMFORT IEQ 13 THERMAL COMFORT IN AIR-CONDITIONED PREMISES 6-33
IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES 6-34
6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING 6-38
IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS 6-40
IEQ 17 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN AREAS NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED 6-43
6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS 6-44
IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION 6-46
IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE 6-49
IEQ 21 INDOOR VIBRATION 6-52
6.8 BUILDING AMENITIES IEQ 22 ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITY 6-53
IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES 6-54
7 INNOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS (IA) 7-1
IA 1 INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES 7-1
IA 2 PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENTS 7-1
IA 3 BEAM PROFESSIONAL 7-2
8 APPENDICES 8-1
8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE 8-2
8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL 8-6
8.3 EQUIVALENT CARBON DIOXIDE EMISSIONS 8-12
8.4 INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONERS 8-13
8.5 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT 8-15
8.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND BASELINES FOR WATER CONSUMPTION 8-22
8.7 SAMPLING PROTOCOL FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENTS 8-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

1 FRAMEWORK OF 1.1 SUSTAINABLE BUILDINGS

BEAM PLUS FOR 1.2 ASSESSMENT FRAMEWORK
NEW BUILDINGS 1.3 CREDIT WEIGHTINGS AND OVERALL GRADE
1.4 ASSESSMENT PROCESS

INTRODUCTION BEAM is intended to provide authoritative guidance to all stakeholders in

the building construction and real estate sectors on practices which
reduce the adverse effects of buildings on the environment, whilst
providing quality built environments. It has been developed to set criteria
for exemplary performance in buildings; performance that is independent
verified and acknowledged through an independently issued certificate.
An assessment under the scheme is voluntary.
BEAM defines performance criteria for a range of sustainability issues
relating to the planning, design, construction, commissioning,
management and operation and maintenance of buildings. ‘Credits’ are
awarded where standards or defined performance criteria are satisfied.
Where these are not satisfied guidance is provided on how performance
can be improved. The credits are combined to determine an overall
performance grade.

This document describes BEAM Plus for New Buildings. This version can
also be used where buildings have undergone a major refurbishment.
Assessment of existing buildings is carried out using BEAM Plus for
Existing Buildings. The two versions of BEAM are designed to dovetail
together to allow coverage of the life cycle performance of buildings.
Assessment under BEAM Plus for New Buildings covers the planning,
design, construction (and demolition) and commissioning of a building
and should be initiated at the early stages of project development. BEAM
Plus for New Buildings aims to reduce the environmental impacts of new
buildings whilst improving quality and user satisfaction, by adoption of
the best techniques available within reasonable cost.

ACKNOWLEDGING Increasingly organisations and companies are demonstrating their

COMMITMENT TO commitment and contribution to sustainable development, through:
SUSTAINABLE
• the maintenance of sustainable levels of economic growth;
DEVELOPMENT
• progress that recognises the needs of the community;
• efficient use of non-renewable natural resources; and
• enhanced protection of the environment.

AIMS BEAM aims to contribute to the development of buildings that are more
sustainable and reduce the long-term impacts that buildings have on the
environment by:
• enhancing safety, improving hygiene and the quality of indoor
environments, and hence the health and well-being of occupants;
• minimizing pollution of external environments;
• promoting and encouraging energy efficient buildings, systems and
equipment, including the use of renewable energy;
• reducing the unsustainable consumption of increasingly scarce
resources such as water and tropical timber; and
• improving waste management and encouraging recycling and reuse
of materials.

Page 1-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

A SPECIFICATION FOR BEAM provides for a comprehensive and fair assessment of the overall
SUSTAINABLE performance of a building in a range of key areas, at either the
BUILDINGS completion stage or during its life. An assessment:
• embraces many areas of sustainability, particularly social and
environmental;
• recognises best practices;
• provides for a comprehensive method of quantifying overall
performance;
• demonstrates performance qualities to end users; and
• provides economic benefits to stakeholders.

MARKET RECOGNITION BEAM:

• sets targets and standards which are independently assessed and
so help to minimise false claims or distortions;
• provide recognition for buildings where the quality has been
enhanced and environmental impacts have been reduced;
• enable developers and building operators to respond to user
demands for better quality buildings that have less impact on the
environment; and
• to help stimulate the market for more sustainable buildings.

Whilst BEAM endeavours to provide for a comprehensive and fair

assessment it recognises that truly scientific assessment criteria and
assessment methods covering sustainable building practices forming the
substance of the BEAM assessment remain under development
(continue to evolve) at the time of going to print.

DYNAMIC SYSTEM Since the collective knowledge as to what constitutes a sustainable

building will continue to develop BEAM will need to respond, requiring a
dynamic system able to incorporate periodic changes and updates. With
wider implementation it is also expected that the scheme will be subject
to further scrutiny by, and feedback from, an increasing number of
stakeholders.

The BEAM documentation shall be reviewed on an annual basis and

revised as frequently as necessary. Where changes in regulations
necessitate changes to the assessment criteria these will be issued to all
parties involved in an assessment and will be announced on the BEAM
Society’s website. An appropriate transitional period shall be allowed for
buildings already under assessment.
The BEAM Society website [1] provides further advice to users in the
form of guidance notes and assessment tools.

1 BEAM Society. http://www.hk-beam.org.hk/

Page 1-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

1.1 SUSTAINABLE Much is said and written about sustainable development and the social,
BUILDINGS economic and environmental aspects, but with many definitions available
it is very much a matter of viewpoint as to what is sustainable. As a
consequence there are few clear definitions as to what constitutes a
sustainable building, although ASTM [ 2 ] defines such as a ‘green
building’ – “a building that provides the specified building performance
requirements while minimizing disturbance to and improving the
functioning of local, regional, and global ecosystems both during and
after its construction and specified service life”. Furthermore “a green
building optimises efficiencies in resource management and operational
performance; and, minimises risks to human health and the
environment”. To this can be added social equity and economic viability.

A WORKING DEFINITION In the context of Hong Kong’s sub-tropical climate and dense high-rise
development BEAM considers a sustainable building as one that is, in
priority order, safe, healthy, comfortable, functional, and efficient.
Recently, climate change and global warming has become the hottest
topics around the world. Because of their importance to the future of all
people, Hong Kong must contribute as part of an international effort.
Construction of new buildings and/or management of existing buildings
should have to adjust to react to such global environmental issues.
Building safety is covered by a myriad of regulations, yet even for new
buildings safety may be compromised through poor implementation or
co-ordination of safety measures. For existing buildings much depends
on the quality of building management and user awareness.
After the outbreak of the epidemic of Severe Acute Respiratory
Syndrome (SARS) in 2003, hygiene became a major issue in both
design and management of buildings. Indoor air quality also relates to
health, but together with thermal aspects, lighting, noise, etc., it is also a
comfort issue. Maintaining good indoor environmental quality (IEQ)
depends on design, operation and user understanding of the many
factors involved. Poor IEQ impacts on the quality of life and productivity
in the workplace. The qualities of services, such as vertical
transportation, also influence user satisfaction and workplace efficiency.
Consequently, the needs of users and the efficiency of buildings needs
to be balanced against the consumption of non-renewable natural
resources and environmental loadings to air, land and waters.

ENVIRONMENTAL An environmental aspect is defined in ISO 14004 [3] as an element of an

ASPECTS organisations activity, products or services than can interact with the
environment. ISO defines ‘environment’ as the surroundings in which an
organisation operates, including air, water, land, natural resources, flora,
fauna, humans, and their interrelation. Surroundings in this context
extend from within an organisation to the global system. An
environmental impact is any change to the environment, whether
adverse or beneficial, wholly or partially resulting from an organisation’s
activities, products or services. A significant environmental aspect is an
environmental aspect that has or can have a significant environmental
impact.
The BEAM scheme addresses items for which there is good evidence of
the environmental problems they cause, and for which reasonably
objective performance criteria can be defined. Certain performance
aspects attributable to buildings and their use have yet to be included,
either because the environmental impacts are not well defined, or

2 ASTM International E 2114–01. Standard Terminology for Sustainability Relative to the Performance of Buildings. 2001.
3 International Organisation for Standardization. ISO14004: Environmental management systems – General guidelines on
principles, systems and supporting techniques.

Page 1-3
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

because performance criteria have not been established. They may be

included in future updates, when information becomes available to permit
reasonably objective assessment.

SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC BEAM recognises the need to include social and economic dimensions
ASPECTS when assessing building performance. Where there is consensus
amongst stakeholders that an issue is important, and where a
reasonably objective assessment can be made, the issue is included.

RAISING STANDARDS
'Sustainable
Building'
Target

'Green
Building'
Incremental steps - Target
difficulty, cost, etc

Baseline/Benchmark

Timeframe >

Responding to environmental priorities and to social and economic

issues, BEAM strives to improve the overall performance of buildings.
BEAM encourages progressively higher standards of performance and
innovations that contribute to such performance. For a voluntary scheme
the extent to which performance can be enhanced is determined by
market acceptance of the assessment criteria, the cost of undertaking
assessments, the relative weighting of the credits counting towards the
overall grade awarded, and the perceived benefits to the Client. The
criteria included in BEAM are considered to be realistic and attainable in
practice.

Page 1-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

1.2 ASSESSMENT According to the emerging international consensus building assessments

FRAMEWORK should be performance based as far as possible. Assessment needs to
take a holistic view of building performance with emphasis on life-cycle
impacts. Assessment purely on the basis of prescriptive features would
preclude buildings without the features from obtaining a good
assessment result regardless of the actual performance. Furthermore,
assessment based on features may encourage feature-based design,
construction and operating practices.
A notable attribute of BEAM Plus for New Buildings, as compared to
most schemes in use elsewhere is that an assessment for new building
is not finalized until a building is completed, ensuring that ‘green’ and
‘sustainable’ design features are actually implemented and construction
practice meets the required performance standards. Besides being in the
interests of the Client in certifying the actual performance of the finished
product, this approach also serves to ‘dovetail’ assessment with that
used for existing buildings. It would be expected that a building graded
under BEAM Plus for New Buildings and suitably operated and
maintained would achieve a similar grade under BEAM Plus for Existing
Buildings some years later.

HOLISTIC ASSESSMENT BEAM integrates the assessment of many key aspects of building
performance, embracing:
• hygiene, health, comfort, and amenity;
• land use, site impacts and transport;
• use of materials, recycling, and waste management;
• water quality, conservation and recycling; and
• energy efficiency, conservation and management.

TRANSPARENCY BEAM recognises that assessment criteria and methods to achieve

compliance need to be transparent, providing details of the benchmarks
(baselines), data, assumptions and issues taken into account in the
assessments and the credit ratings.

ASSESSMENTS OF BEAM Plus for New Buildings attempts to cover all types of buildings,
EXISTING BUILDINGS from small single buildings to large buildings on residential and
commercial estates. The assessment needs to cover the various types of
premises contained within the development, and may involve premises
that are only a ‘shell’ or are fitted-out. Whatever the circumstances,
assessment focuses on what the designer, builder and commissioning
agent achieves. Assessment of some aspects of performance may be
type dependent, or not feasible for various reasons, so the number of
applicable credits and their aggregation will vary. This is taken into
account in determining the performance grade.

ESTATES When a building forms part of an estate then certain features of the
estate design will be included in the assessment. In an estate containing
several buildings of essentially similar design, assessment of Site
Aspects, Materials Aspects and Water Use for one building can apply to
all the buildings, although Energy Use and IEQ assessments will require
further evaluation if all the buildings are to graded under BEAM.

SPECIAL CASES It is possible that some buildings may not be fully embraced by the
criteria currently presented in BEAM Plus for New Buildings, due to their
unusual nature or variety of forms and system designs, etc. This will be
particularly true in respect of assessment of energy use. In such
circumstances certain assessment criteria or the method of
demonstrating compliance may need to be modified. This would require

Page 1-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

agreement between the Client and the BEAM Assessor, and be

endorsed by the BEAM Society Executive Committee.

ABSOLUTE VERSUS Through an opinion survey of BEAM Society members [4] it is clear that
RELATIVE there should be a balance between assessment of ‘absolute’
PERFORMANCE performance, i.e. issues over which the Client may have little or no
control (e.g. car parking provisions), and ‘relative’ performance, i.e.
issues that can be influenced by the Client.
In addition, BEAM takes the position that assessment of some aspects of
building performance should not be penalized because of externalities
that are not under the control of the Client, such as the efficiency of the
utility supplying energy sources to a building. In this case only
consumption is quantified (e.g. kWh) and rated, and not the consequent
environmental loadings (e.g. CO2-kg) unless the mix of energy sources
(gas, oil, electricity) is significant.

ASSESSMENT BEAM is concerned about the interactions between the assessed

BOUNDARIES building, neighbouring properties, and the neighbourhood in general. The
assessment seeks to reduce negative impacts on neighbours and
rewards efforts that are aimed to improve the quality of the immediate
surroundings to the benefit of the neighbourhood, the concept of ‘good
neighbour’ buildings.

REGIONALLY In Hong Kong’s humid sub-tropical climate and dense urban living
RESPONSIVE CRITERIA environment people need to be provided with options to enclosed, air-
conditioned spaces, so that the provisions for natural ventilation and
daylighting figure prominently in the assessment of indoor environments.

PERFORMANCE The benchmark (zero credit level) for particular performance criteria is
BENCHMARKS established by reference to legal requirements, which may be required
as a prerequisite. BEAM uses local performance standards, codes and
guides where these are available (e.g. indoor air quality). Where these
are not available (e.g. impact noise) international or national standards,
codes and guides are referenced. Where there are differences in the
performance criteria set by the various authorities BEAM will generally
avoid specifying the performance criteria (e.g. thermal comfort), allowing
the Client to specify what they consider to be appropriate for their
building. A BEAM assessment seeks to establish that the specified levels
of performance are acceptable and have been achieved. Where
performance standards are not well defined (e.g. energy use) BEAM
establishes its own performance benchmarks based on available data
and stakeholder consensus. Credits are awarded for achieving higher
levels of performance. It is intended that the assessment criteria be
updated periodically as new information becomes available and as legal
requirements evolve.

FLEXIBLE AND BEAM embraces a wide range of buildings, variable in terms of scale,
OBJECTIVE location and mix of uses (types of premises). The assessment criteria
and methods of assessment need to be flexible and allow for alternative
means of compliance, yet be reasonably objective to enable the BEAM
Assessor to arrive at decisions without undue controversy.
Where issues are rather subjective, i.e. performance criteria cannot be
quantified or determined through a compliance specification, BEAM uses
‘check-lists’ to facilitate equitable and consistent assessments.

PERFORMANCE Different assessment methods in use world-wide arrange performance

CATEGORIES aspects under different headings to reflect the preferences of the tool

4 BEAM Society. Report on the Development of BEAM Scheme – Survey I Framework.

Page 1-6
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

developer. In BEAM the various performance aspects covered are

grouped within the following categories:

SITE ASPECTS Generally speaking site issues, as listed in BEAM, will not vary
(SA) significantly with the type of building. However, the scale and location of
the building will determine the extent to which environmental aspects
associated with the site are significant and can be addressed in the
assessment. Site Aspects include:
• location and design of the building;
• emissions from the site; and
• site management.

MATERIALS ASPECTS Similar to site issues, materials use issues included in BEAM will be
(MA) similar for all types of buildings, although the size of the building will have
significance. Materials Aspects include:
• selection of materials;
• efficient use of materials; and
• waste disposal and recycling.

ENERGY USE Assessment of energy use in a building containing a variety of uses,

(EU) energy sources and building services systems and equipment is a
somewhat complex process given the number of influencing variables.
BEAM Plus for New Buildings adopts a computational approach to
determining the dominant energy uses, plus additional features known to
have impact on overall performance. Energy Use includes:
• annual CO2 emissions or energy use;
• energy efficient systems and equipment; and
• energy management;

WATER USE Assessments under Water Use includes quality and features that
(WU) improve utilisation and reduce effluent, i.e.:
• water quality;
• water conservation and
• effluent discharges.

INDOOR Indoor issues included in BEAM are those aspects of building

ENVIRONMENTAL performance that impact on the health, comfort or well-being of the
QUALITY occupants, as well as aspects of performance that improve quality and
(IEQ) functionality. Not included are the technical performance aspects of
specialist premises, such as acoustic qualities of concert venues, stage
lighting, or air quality in clean rooms. Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)
includes:
• safety;
• hygiene;
• indoor air quality and ventilation;
• thermal comfort;
• lighting;
• acoustics and noise; and
• building amenities.

Page 1-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

1.3 CREDIT WEIGHTINGS The weighing system, i.e. the relative number of credits given for
AND OVERALL compliance with a particular aspect, is a critical part of a building
performance assessment method. It is logical that BEAM should seek to
GRADE assign credits or weightings to assessment criteria somewhat in
accordance with the significance of the impact.

CATEGORY WEIGHTING Having reviewed local and international assessment schemes and other
relevant information, a weighting over each environmental performance
category has been assigned to reflect its importance and global trends
as follows:

Category Weighting (%)

Site Aspects (SA) 25

Materials Aspects (MA) 8

Energy Use (EU) 35

Water Use (WU) 12

Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ) 20

100

CREDITS ALLOCATED Credits have been broadly allocated to each assessment criterion by
taking into account the international consensus as given by an analysis
of weightings used in similar assessment methods operating elsewhere,
as well as surveys and informed opinions of those who have contributed
to the development of this BEAM version. The award of fractions of a
credit is possible under BEAM.

EXCLUSIONS Exclusions are included where an issue or part of an assessment is not

applicable to particular circumstances or building type. A spreadsheet is
available on the BEAM website to show as ‘NA’ (not applicable) the
credits affected.

PREREQUISITES For some of the environmental aspects detailed in BEAM compliance

with legal requirements is taken as a prerequisite for the award of
credits. Consequently, when an assessed issue becomes subject to
legislation it will no longer count for the award of credits, and would be
amended or deleted in any future revisions of BEAM.
For each performance category, BEAM prescribes prerequisites which
must be satisfied in order for the credits within the same category to be
counted towards the awards. These prerequisites are clearly listed in the
BEAM version to which they apply.

ASSESSMENTS Many of the assessments verifying compliance with the prescribed

criteria in BEAM will be undertaken by a suitably qualified person acting
on behalf of the Client, who will submit evidence in the form of
documents, data and reports confirming compliance. Others will be
based on evidence collected by the BEAM Assessor.

ALTERNATIVE BEAM does not seek to be overly prescriptive in setting assessment

ASSESSMENT METHODS criteria and in defining methods of compliance, and encourages Client’s
representatives to consider alternative approaches which meet the
objectives of BEAM. Client representatives are invited to submit a
‘method statement’ if a credit is sought using an alternative approach.
The statement shall address the stated objective of BEAM for which the

Page 1-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

credit or credits are sought, the proposed alternative criteria, and the
proposed method for assessment. The proposal should be submitted at
the earliest opportunity in the assessment process. It would then be
considered by the BEAM Assessor and, if necessary, submitted for
technical review to the BEAM Society Executive Committee. A ruling
shall be made to accept, accept with defined modifications, or reject the
‘method statement’, which shall be binding on the assessment.
In the event that an alternative approach is endorsed by the Executive
Committee it shall be incorporated in the guidance notes used by BEAM
Assessors, and in future revisions to the BEAM documentation, as
deemed appropriate by the Committee.

INNOVATIONS AND BEAM Plus for New Buildings does not presume to be comprehensive in
ADDITIONS its coverage of all performance aspects. Under the heading of
‘Innovation’ the Client are encouraged to submit proposals for the award
of credits for aspects not covered elsewhere in BEAM Plus for New
Buildings. In such circumstances the Client shall submit a proposal in
which the performance gains are demonstrated. The BEAM Society
Executive Committee would examine the validity of the proposal and,
weighting the performance gains against others covered by the scheme,
award an appropriate number of credits.
Whilst innovative design solutions are encouraged, they do not
necessarily justify credit. Innovation must demonstrate performance
gains, such as through improved efficiency and/or improvements in the
built environment. Indeed, it is anticipated that significant performance
benefits will be realized from full and proper implementation of sound
design, construction, installation, and operating practices.

BONUS CREDITS These credits would not count towards the total number of credits
available, but would count towards the total of credits qualifying for an
award classification, i.e., innovative credits can be regarded as bonus
credits. Subsequent revisions of BEAM may incorporate such credits as
part of the core assessment, and would then be counted within the total
number of credits available.

1.3.1 DETERMINATION OF The Overall Assessment Grade is determined by the percentage (%) of
OVERALL GRADE the applicable credits gained under each performance category and its
weighting factor. Given the importance of SA, EU and IEQ it is necessary
to obtain a minimum percentage (%) of credits for the three categories in
order to qualify for the overall grade. In addition, a minimum number of
credits shall be earned under the category of Innovation and Additions
(IA). The award classifications are:
Overall SA EU IEQ IA
Platinum 75% 70% 70% 70% 3 credits (Excellent)
Gold 65% 60% 60% 60% 2 credits (Very Good)
Silver 55% 50% 50% 50% 1 credit (Good)
Bronze 40% 40% 40% 40% - (Above Average)

1.3.2 GRADING A BUILDING After allowing for exclusions for particular circumstances it is expected
COMPLEX that applicable credits under Site Aspects, Materials Aspects and Water
Use will not differ significantly for the different buildings that make up a
building complex. However, it is clear that there may be significant
differences in Energy Use and Indoor Environmental Quality aspects
between buildings which differ in operating mode such as; for example,
buildings that are use central air-conditioning, as opposed to buildings
where natural ventilation may be utilised.

Page 1-9
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

Centrally air-conditioned buildings can be expected to consume greater

amounts of energy, so the relative weighting for energy use as compared
to others environmental aspects can be higher than for buildings which
are less energy intensive. In addition, aspects such as thermal comfort
and IAQ are subject to tighter controls. To cater for a mix of building
types in a complex and where an overall assessment for the complex is
required, BEAM weighs the available credits for energy and IEQ
according to the normally occupied floor area of each building type.
BEAM assessment of energy use also allows for situations where
several buildings within a complex are supplied from common central air-
conditioning plant, so that energy use in a particular building in the
complex can be estimated for assessment purposes.

IEQ CREDITS For circumstances where a building complex consists of several different
types of buildings, with each having different numbers of applicable IEQ
credits, the overall number of credits for IEQ Credit shall also be
weighted according to the normally occupied floor area.

Page 1-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

1.4 ASSESSMENT BEAM assessments are currently undertaken by the Business

PROCESS Environment Council (BEC), an independent, non-profit, environmental
information centre, under the guidance of the BEAM Society Executive
Committee. Assessment by other parties, such as licensed BEAM
Assessors, is under consideration for implementation.

ELIGIBILITY All existing buildings are eligible for certification under BEAM Plus for
New Buildings, including, but not limited to offices, retail, catering and
service establishments, libraries, educational establishments, hotels and
residential apartment buildings. Whilst it is not expected that buildings
used for primarily industrial purposes or low-rise residential buildings will
seek certification under this assessment method, the method is
sufficiently flexible to embrace all types of buildings.

INITIATION Buildings can be assessed at any time, but the greatest benefit is derived
if the assessment process begins at an earlier stage, allowing operators
to make changes that will improve the building's overall performance.

GUIDANCE The BEAM Assessor will issue a questionnaire to the Client which details
the information required for assessment. The Assessor will arrange to
meet the design team to discuss the details of the design. The Assessor
will subsequently undertake a provisional assessment based on the
information gathered from the questionnaire and the discussion, and
produce a provisional report. This report will identify which credits have
been achieved, those that are likely to be achieved, and outline changes
necessary to obtain further credits. At this stage the client may wish to
make changes to the design or specification of the building.
Further guidance material is made available on the Society’s website.

CERTIFICATION Given that a significant number of credits under BEAM are based on
actions taken during construction and upon completion, certification can
only be issued upon building completion.
When a building development is registered for assessment the credits
and assessment criteria current at the time of registration will be used in
the assessment, unless the Client wishes to comply with credits and
criteria introduced after registration.

APPEALS PROCESS Any objection to any part or the entire assessment can be submitted
directly to the BEAM Society and will be adjudicated by the Society’s
Executive Committee. The Client is at liberty to submit an appeal to the
Society at any time detailing in writing stating the grounds for the appeal.

DISCLAIMER The BEAM Building Environmental Assessment Method is intended for

use by Clients and project teams engaged in new building design, and
owners and operators of existing facilities as a guide to more
environmentally sustainable building design and operation. The Method
has been prepared with the assistance and participation of many
individuals and representatives from various organisations. The final
outcome represents general consensus, but unanimous support from
each and every organisation and individual consulted is not implied.
This document represents the BEAM Society’s efforts to develop a
standard that improves the performance of buildings using the latest
techniques, practices and standards compatible with prevailing economic
constraints. These are subject to changes, which will be included through
periodic updating.
It should be noted that none of the parties involved in the funding of
BEAM, including the BEAM Society and its members provide any
warranties or assume any liability or responsibility to users of BEAM, or

Page 1-11
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS FRAMEWORK
VERSION 1.1

any third parties for the accuracy, completeness or use of, or reliance on,
any information contained in BEAM, or from any injuries, losses, or
damages arising out of such use or reliance.
As a condition of use, users covenant not to sue, and agree to waive and
release the BEAM Society and its members from any and all claims,
demands and causes of actions for any injuries, losses or damages that
users may now or hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as
a result of the use of, or reliance on BEAM.

FURTHER INFORMATION Further information on how to participate in the scheme is available from
the BEAM Society Web site.
Copyright © BEAM Society. All rights reserved.

Page 1-12
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1.5 SUMMARY OF CREDITS

Section: Credit Requirement: Exclusions Credits Target
2 SITE ASPECTS (SA) 22+3B
Building or sites not for
residential use; or
SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPE Demonstrate appropriate planting on site equivalent to at least 20% of the site
residential sites less Required
AREA area.
than or equal to
1,000m2.
Building developments
on Greenfield sites and
the site contamination/
1 BONUS credit for conducting a site contamination assessment and landfill gas hazard
SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND implementing measures for rehabilitation, and/or proper preparation of sites and assessment and 1B
structures adjacent to landfill sites. mitigation measures
are statutory
requirements of the
project.
1 credit where parking capacity must meet but not exceed minimum requirement
from government and parking shall be provided for carpools or shuttle service
vehicles. 2
SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT 2 credits where no car parking is provided other than provisions intended for use None.
by disabled persons and/or any shuttle service vehicles.
1 credit for availability of convenient pedestrian access to mainstream public
1
transport.

1 credit where at least 10 different basic services are located within 500m from
1
the Site and pedestrian access to the services is available for the Site.
Emergency Service
SA 3 NEIGHBOURHOOD 1 credit where at least 2 different recreational facilities are located within 500m Premises (e.g. fire
1
AMENITIES from the Site and pedestrian access to the facilities is available for the Site. station, power
substation, etc.)
1 credit where at least 2 different recreational facilities or at least 5 different
basic services are located within the Site and will be made available for public 1
use.

Page 1-13
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 credit for a site design appraisal report which demonstrates a proactive

approach to achieve greater integration of site planning and design issues, and
1
at least 50% of relevant sub-items of the Urban Design Guidelines in the Hong
SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL None.
Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines are achieved.

1 BONUS credit for 100% of relevant sub-items of the Urban Design Guidelines
1B
are achieved.
1 BONUS credit for meeting a value less than 30% of score obtained in Habitat
Section of Nature Outlook Assessment and for meeting a value less than 20% of
SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT score obtained in Biodiversity Section of Nature Outlook, or demonstrating that None. 1B
appropriate design measures have been implemented to contribute positively to
the ecological value of the site.
Sites or buildings
1 credit where development does not have a negative impact on sites of cultural
SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE without cultural 1
heritage.
heritage.
1 credit for using pervious materials for a minimum of 50% of hard landscaped
1
areas.
SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND
1 credit for providing appropriate planting on site equivalent to at least 30% of None.
PLANTERS
the site area.
2
2 credits for providing appropriate planting on site equivalent to at least 40% of
the site area.

SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND 1 credit for demonstrating that no pedestrian areas will be subject to excessive
BUILDINGS wind velocities caused by amplification due to the site layout and/or building None. 1
design.

1 credit for providing shade on at least 50% of non-roof impervious surfaces on

the site (parking, walkways, plazas) using light coloured high-albedo materials 1
(reflectance of at least 0.3)

1 credit for providing high emissivity roofing (emissivity of at least 0.9) material
1
or vegetation roof covering at least 50% of the total roof area.

Page 1-14
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 credit for conducting an Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA) by wind tunnel or

CFD according to the methodology introduced by HPLB & ETWB in 2006 and
1
demonstrating the best building design option is adopted in comparing with
different options.
Buildings where
SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD 1 credit for designs for which the access to daylight of neighbouring sensitive daylight is of no value
1
DAYLIGHT ACCESS buildings is maintained to the prescribed level. to neighbouring
properties.
1 credit for demonstrating that an Environmental Management Plan for
SA 10 ENVIRONMENTAL
demolition/construction including Environmental Monitoring and Auditing has None. 1
MANAGEMENT PLAN
been implemented.
1 credit for applying adequate mitigation measures for dust and air emissions
SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING during the construction as the recommended by the Environmental Protection
None. 1
CONSTRUCTION Department; and demonstrating compliance with the air quality management
guidelines as detailed in the Environmental Monitoring and Audit Manual.
SA 12 NOISE DURING 1 credit for providing adequate mitigation measures for construction noise for all
None. 1
CONSTRUCTION Noise Sensitive Receivers.

SA 13 WATER POLLUTION 1 credit for undertaking adequate measures to reduce water pollution during
None. 1
DURING CONSTRUCTION construction.
1 credit for demonstrating that the level of the intruding noise at the facade of the
SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING
potential noise sensitive receivers is in compliance with the criteria None. 1
EQUIPMENT
recommended in the Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines.
1 credit for demonstrating that obtrusive light from exterior lighting meets the
SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION specified performance for the environmental zone in which the building None. 1
development is located.
3 MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA) 22+1B
MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR
Virgin forest products are not used for temporary works during construction. None. Required
TEMPORARY WORKS
MA P2 USE OF NON-CFC BASED
Using no chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in HVAC&R systems. None. Required
REFRIGERANTS

Page 1-15
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

Project where
MA P3 CONSTRUCTION/
Implementation of a waste management system that provides for the sorting, demolition is not
DEMOLITION WASTE Required
recycling and proper disposal of construction/ demolition materials. required or is not under
MANAGEMENT PLAN
the Client’s control.
MA P4 WASTE RECYCLE Provision of facilities for the collection, sorting, storage and disposal of waste
None. Required
FACILITIES and recovered materials.
1 credit for the reuse of 30% or more of existing sub-structure or shell.
2
2 credits for the reuse of 60% or more of existing sub-structure or shell. Buildings on reclaimed
MA 1 BUILDING REUSE
land or Greenfield sites.
1 additional BONUS credit for use of 90% or more of existing sub-structure or
1B
shell.
MA 2 MODULAR AND
1 credit for demonstrating the application of modular and standardized design. None. 1
STANDARDIZED DESIGN
1 credit when the manufacture of 20% of listed prefabricated building elements
has been off-site.
MA 3 PREFABRICATION None. 2
2 credits where the manufacture of 40% of listed prefabricated building elements
has been off-site.
1 credit for designs providing spatial flexibility that can adapt spaces for different
uses, and allows for expansion to permit additional spatial requirements to be 1
accommodated.
MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND 1 credit for flexible design of services that can adapt to changes of layout and
None. 1
DECONSTRUCTION use.
1 credit for designs providing flexibility through the choice of building structural
system that allows for change in future use, and which is coordinated with 1
interior planning modules.

1 credit for demonstrating 2.5% of all building materials/products used in the

MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE project is rapidly renewable materials.
None. 2
MATERIALS 2 credits where 5% of all building materials/products used in the project is
rapidly renewable materials.

MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST 1 credit for demonstrating at least 50% of all timber and composite timber
None. 1
PRODUCTS products used in the project are from sustainable source/recycled timber.

Page 1-16
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 credit for use of recycled materials contributing to at least 10% of all materials
1
used in site exterior surfacing work, structures and features.

MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS 1 credit where at least 10% of all building materials used for facade and None.
1
structural components are recycled materials.
1 credit where at least 10% of all building materials used for interior non-
1
structural components are recycled materials
1 credit for using refrigerants with a value less than or equal to the threshold of
the combined contribution to zone depletion and global warming potentials using 1
MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING
the specified equation. None.
SUBSTANCES
1 credit for the use of products in the building fabric and services that avoids the
1
use of ozone depleting substances in their manufacture, composition or use.
1 credit for use of materials manufactured locally within 800km from the site,
MA 9 REGIONALLY which contribute to at least 10% of all building materials used in the project.
MANUFACTURED 2 credits for use of materials manufactured locally within 800km from the site, None.
2
MATERIALS which contribute to at least 20% of all building materials used in the project.
Projects where
MA 10 DEMOLITION WASTE 1 credit for demonstrating that at least 30% of demolition waste is recycled. demolition is not
2
REDUCTION 2 credits for demonstrating that al least 60% of demolition waste is recycled. required or is not under
the Client’s control.

MA 11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE 1 credit for demonstrating that at least 30% of construction waste is recycled.
None. 2
REDUCTION 2 credits for demonstration that at least 60% of construction waste is recycled.

4 ENERGY USE (EU) 42+2B

EU P1 MINIMUM ENERGY
Demonstrate compliance with the latest edition of Building Energy Codes (BEC). None. Required
PERFORMANCE

Page 1-17
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

For Commercial and Hotel Buildings, 1 to 15 credits for a reduction of CO2

emissions or annual energy consumption by 3%, 5%, 7%, 9%, 11%, 14%, 17%,
20%, 23%, 26%, 29%, 33%, 37%, 41% and 45% respectively.

For Educational Buildings, 1 to 15 credits for reduction of CO2 emissions or

annual energy consumption by 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 9%, 11%, 13%, 15%,
EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 17%, 19%, 21%, 24%, 27% and 30% respectively.
None. 15
EMISSIONS
For Residential Buildings, 1 to 15 credits for reduction of CO2 emissions or
annual energy consumption by 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%,
13%, 14%, 16%, 18% and 20% respectively.

For All Building Types using Performance-based BEC method, 1 to 15 credits

for reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy consumption by 1%, 2%, 3%,
4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 12%, 14%, 16%, 18% and 20% respectively.
For Commercial and Hotel Buildings, 1 to 3 credits for a reduction in the
EU 2 PEAK ELECTRICITY maximum electricity demand by 15%, 23% and 30% respectively.
None. 3
DEMAND REDUCTION
For Educational and Residential Buildings, 1 to 3 credits for a reduction in the
maximum electricity demand by 8%, 12% and 15% respectively.

1 credit for demonstrating the embodied energy in the major elements of the
EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN building structure of the assessed building has been studied through a Life 1
BUILDING STRUCTURAL Cycle Assessment (LCA). None.
ELEMENTS
1 BONUS credit for demonstrating the major materials with low embodied
1B
energy are used in the project utilizing the LCA results.

1 credit for ventilation systems that will consume less electricity than those Buildings without
EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEMS IN
meeting the zero credit requirements (baseline) by 20% or more. carpark or carpark area 2
CAR PARKS
2 credits where the consumption is reduced by 25% or more. less than 10% CFA.

1 credit for using lamps and, where applicable, ballasts that will consume less Buildings without
EU 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM IN CAR
electricity than those meeting the zero-credit requirements by 20% or more. carpark or carpark area 2
PARKS
2 credits where the consumption is reduced by 25% or more. less than 10% CFA.

Page 1-18
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 to 5 credits where 0.5% to 2.5% or more of building energy consumption is

None.
obtained from renewable energy sources.
EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY
Alternatively, 5
SYSTEMS
1 to 5 credits where the minimum percentage of 20% to 100% of the building
footprint is being covered/used by PV panels respectively and/or other
renewable power facility generation equivalent renewable power output.

1 credit for complying with the recommended installation positions for air-
Buildings not using
conditioning units with regard to internal spaces; complying with the minimum
EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS window and/or split- 1
width of any external recess with regard to heat rejection; and complying with
type air-conditioners.
the items listed in the assessment check-list.
EU 8 CLOTHES DRYING 1 credit for providing suitable clothes drying facilities which utilise the natural Buildings other than
1
FACILITIES environment for all residential units. residential buildings.
1 credit when 60% of total rated power of appliances and equipment are certified Buildings where
EU 9 ENERGY EFFICIENT energy efficient products. appliances are not
2
APPLIANCES 2 credits when 80% of total rated power of appliances and equipment are provided by the
certified energy efficient products. developer.
1 credit for provision of appropriate specifications and cost provisions in contract
documents detailing the commissioning requirements for all systems and 1
equipment that impact on energy use and indoor environmental quality.

1 credit for the appointment of a commissioning authority and provision of a

1
detailed commissioning plan that embraces all specified commissioning work.
EU 10 TESTING AND
1 credit for ensuring full and complete commissioning of all systems, equipment None.
COMMISSIONING 1
and components that impact on energy use and indoor environmental quality.
1 credit for providing fully detailed commissioning reports for all systems,
equipment and components that impact on energy use and indoor 1
environmental quality.
1 BOUNS credit for engagement of an independent commissioning authority in
1B
the Testing and Commissioning process.

Page 1-19
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 credit for providing a fully documented operations and maintenance manual to

1
the minimum specified.

EU 11 OPERATION AND 1 credit for providing fully documented instructions that enable systems to
None. 1
MAINTENANCE operate at a high level of energy efficiency.
1 credit for providing training for operations and maintenance staff to the
minimum specified; and demonstrating that adequate maintenance facilities are 1
provided for operations and maintenance work.
1 credit for installation of: metering that allows monitoring of electricity use by the
main chiller plant and auxiliaries; instruments for monitoring building cooling load
EU 12 METERING AND
and operating parameters central chiller plant; metering that allows separate None. 1
MONITORING
monitoring of electricity use by the air side of the HVAC system; and metering
for landlord’s electricity consumption in common space/public areas.
1 credit for demonstrating the fulfillment of at least 3 items out of the following
strategies.
2 credits for demonstrating the fulfillment of all of the following strategies.
(a) Consideration of built form and building orientation to enhance energy
conservation;
EU 13 ENERGY EFFICIENT (b) Consideration of optimum spatial planning to enhance energy conservation;
None. 2
BUILDING LAYOUT (c) Consideration of building permeability provisions of building features to
enhance the use of natural ventilation;
(d) Provision of fixed or movable horizontal/vertical external shading devices;
and
(e) Provision of movable external shading devices for major atrium facade
windows or skylights.
5 WATER USE (WU) 9+1B
Demonstrate that the quality of potable water meets the referenced drinking
WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY None. Required
water quality standards at all points of use.
WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING Demonstrate that the use of water efficient devices leads to an estimated
None. Required
PERFORMANCE aggregate annual saving of 10%.
1 credit for demonstrating that the use of water efficient devices leads to an
estimated aggregate annual saving of 20%.
WU 1 ANNUAL WATER USE None. 3
2 credits for demonstrating an estimated annual saving of 25%.
3 credits for demonstrating an estimated annual saving of 30%.

Page 1-20
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

WU 2 MONITORING AND 1 credit for installation of devices to monitor water leakage within the fresh water
None. 1
CONTROL distribution system.
1 credit for the use of an irrigation system which does not require the use of
municipal fresh water after a period of establishment is complete. Where soft landscaping
Alternatively, and planting coverage
WU 3 WATER EFFICIENT
IRRIGATION 1 credit for demonstrating highly efficient irrigation technology and/or the use of is less than 50% of the 1
harvested rainwater and/or recycled grey water to reduce fresh water area of the building
consumption for irrigation by 50% or more in comparison with conventional footprint.
irrigation of water intensive planting.

1 credit for harvesting of rainwater which will lead to a reduction of 5% or more

1
in the consumption of fresh water.

WU 4 WATER RECYCLING 1 credit where recycled grey water will lead to a reduction of 5% or more in the None.
1
consumption of fresh water.
1 BONUS credit where harvesting and/or recycling leads to a reduction of 10%
1B
or more in the consumption of fresh water.
Buildings in which
WU 5 WATER EFFICIENT 1 credit for installing water efficient appliances that are at least 20% more facilities and/or devices
1
APPLIANCES efficient than otherwise. are not installed by the
developer.
WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO 1 credit for demonstrating an estimated reduction in annual sewage volumes by
None. 1
FOUL SEWERS 20%.
6 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ) 32+3B
Demonstrate that the project is in compliance with the minimum requirements of Residential and similar
IEQ P1 MINIMUM VENTILATION
ASHRAE 62.1-2007 in respect of Outdoor Air Quality and Minimum Ventilation buildings without Required
PERFORMANCE
Rate. central air conditioning.
1 credit for scoring at least 75%of the applicable security measures and facilities
IEQ 1 SECURITY None. 1
for the building.
1 credit for designs that reduce the potential for transmission of harmful bacteria
IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE None. 1
viruses, and odours.
1 credit for complying with the recommendations given in the Code of Practice -
IEQ 3 BIOLOGICAL
Prevention of Legionnaires Disease, in respect of air-conditioning and ventilation Residential buildings. 1
CONTAMINATION
and water systems.

Page 1-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

IEQ 4 WASTE DISPOSAL

1 credit for the provision of a hygienic refuse collection system. None. 1
FACILITIES
1 credit for implementing a Construction IAQ Management Plan. Residential and similar 1
IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ buildings not provided
MANAGEMENT 1 credit for undertaking a building ‘flush-out’ or ‘bake out’ and replacement of all with central air-
conditioning and 1
filters prior to occupancy.
ventilation systems.

1 credit for demonstrating compliance with appropriate criteria for carbon

IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF 1
monoxide, nitrogen dioxide and ozone. None.
AIR POLLUTION
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for RSP. 1
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for VOCs. 1
IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR 1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for
None. 1
POLLUTION formaldehyde.
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for radon. 1

1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the design requirements specified in Buildings with no car
IEQ 8 IAQ IN CAR PARKS 1
ProPECC PN 2/96. park.
Residential and
1 credit for demonstrating an outdoor ventilation rate that exceeds ASHRAE similar buildings
IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION 1
62.1:2007 requirements by at least 30% without central air
conditioning.
Buildings not designed
IEQ 10 BACKGROUND 1 credit where it can be demonstrated that adequate ventilation can be achieved
to utilize natural 1
VENTILATION by natural means.
ventilation.
1 credit for the provision of an adequate ventilation system for rooms/areas nd
2 credit not applicable 1
where significant indoor pollution sources are generated.
IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION to residential and
similar buildings.
1 credit for the provision of a general exhaust system for future tenants. 1

1 credit for demonstrating that all enclosed common areas in a building are Spaces covered under
IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON provided with adequate ventilation. 1
the section on
AREAS
Localized Ventilation.
1 BONUS credit where the provision for ventilation is by natural means. 1B

Page 1-22
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

1 credit for sustaining the air temperature at the design value within ±1℃ when Premises where air-
IEQ 13 THERMAL COMFORT IN 1
AIR-CONDITIONED the air side system is operating at steady state under normal occupied periods. conditioning is provided
by window units or split
PREMISES
1 credit where room air diffusers satisfy the Air Diffusion Performance Index. units. 1

1 credit for demonstrating indoor operative temperatures in occupied/habitable

rooms meet the 80% acceptability limits.

Alternatively, 1
IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN Buildings that are not
1 credit for demonstrating the predicted Mean Vote (PMV) in occupied/habitable
NATURALLY VENTILATED designed to utilize
rooms is between –1 and +1.
PREMISES natural ventilation.
1 credit for sustaining the air temperature at the design value within ±1.5℃ when
the air-conditioning unit is operating at steady state under normal occupied 1
periods.

1 credit where at least 80% of floor area in all normally occupied spaces is
1
adequately lit with an average daylight factor of 2% or more.
IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING None.
1 credit where provision of suitable daylight glare control and maintaining the
1
average daylight factor of 2%.

1 credit where the prescribed lighting performance in each type of premises in

respect of illuminance and lighting quality is achieved.
IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN
It is required to fulfill (i) prescribed lighting performance in respect of maintained Residential buildings, 1
NORMALLY OCCUPIED
illuminance and illumance variation is achieved; and (ii) the limiting unified glare hotels and apartment
AREAS rating is achieved and light sources have an appropriate colour rendering index. buildings.

1 BONUS credit where provision of automatic control of artificial lighting such as

1B
daylight sensors at perimeter zone and/or occupancy sensor.
IEQ 17 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN
1 credit where the prescribed lighting performance in each type of common or
AREAS NOT NORMALLY None. 1
service space in respect of light output and lighting quality is achieved.
OCCUPIED

Page 1-23
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS
VERSION 1.1 FRAMEWORK

Buildings/premises
where speech
1 credit for demonstrating that intruding noise levels are within the prescribed
intelligibility is not
IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS criteria and the mid-frequency reverberation time in applicable rooms meets the 1
important, and rooms of
prescribed criteria for give types of premises.
a special acoustical
nature.
1 credit for demonstrating airborne noise isolation between rooms, spaces and Buildings/premises
1
premises meets the prescribed criteria. which are inherently
IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION
noisy and unaffected by
For residential development only, 1 BONUS credit for demonstrating impact noise.
1B
noise isolation between floors meets the prescribed criteria.
Buildings/premises in
1 credit for demonstrating background noise levels are within the prescribed which speech
IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE 1
criteria. intelligibility is not
important.
1 credit for demonstrating vibration levels shall not exceed the prescribed
IEQ 21 INDOOR VIBRATION None. 1
criteria.
IEQ 22 ACCESS FOR PERSONS
1 credit for providing enhanced provisions for access for disabled persons. None. 1
WITH DISABILITY

1 credit for providing amenity features that enhance the quality and functionality
1
of a building to the benefit of building users.
IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES None.
1 credit for providing amenity features that allow for improved operation and
1
maintenance of the building and its engineering services.
7 INNOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS (IA) 5B+1
IA 1 INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES NA.
IA 2 PERFORMANCE Maximum 5 BONUS credits + 1 credit for BEAM Professional 5B+1
ENHANCEMENTS NA.
IA 3 BEAM PROFESSIONAL

Note: B denotes Bonus Credit.

Page 1-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.P PREREQUISITE

2.1 SITE LOCATION
2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

INTRODUCTION This section focuses on the site upon which the building is to be built; the
land used and its location with respect to local transport and amenities,
planning and design for the site to take account of both beneficial and
negative impacts on neighbours and the development itself, mitigation of
ecological impacts and emissions from the site over the building’s
lifetime, and aspects of site management. Obviously, there will be
significant differences between large scale developments, such as
estates, as compared to single buildings, which needs to be reflected in
the assessment criteria and weighting of credits.

2.P PREREQUISITE SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING AREA

BACKGROUND This part is to set out the minimum requirement for landscaping area for
residential premise site having an area of greater than 1,000 m2.

2.1 SITE LOCATION SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND

SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT T

SA 3 NEIGHBOURHOOD AMENITIES

BACKGROUND Due to the shortage of land on which to build the choices for building
location are limited. From an environmental perspective, credit should be
awarded when contaminated land and land adjacent to landfill sites are
put to use, provided that appropriate steps are taken to reduce
environmental and health hazards to users of the building and to
neighbouring properties. Site location is important in respect of adequacy
of local amenities and public transport provisions, in order to reduce
travel needs and reliance on private vehicles.

2.2 SITE PLANNING AND SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL

DESIGN SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT T

SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE
SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTERS
SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS
SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD DAYLIGHT ACCESS
SA 10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

BACKGROUND The planning and design issues which affect the environmental
performance of a site and master layout planning should include:
• disposition of individual buildings within the site;
• spatial relationship of the building(s) to the immediate built and
natural environment;
• relationship of the building(s) to the site topography and ground
conditions;
• overall massing of the proposed development;
• built form of the buildings;
• orientation of buildings in relationship to view factors and ambient
forces;

Page 2-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1

• balance of built-up and landscaped/open area;

• environmental enhancement to the surroundings of the site; and
• master landscaping strategy.
Greenfield site development should seek to minimise disturbance,
including the ecology of the site and impacts on cultural heritage. The
aim is to ensure that appropriate landscape treatment is provided on site
to ameliorate visual impact, and conserve natural features. For
Brownfield sites the emphasis should be on restoration of the local
ecology and local environment.
Planning and design needs to take into account and allow for the
adverse impacts that inevitably arise during construction, with high
quality construction management the key to minimising the impacts.

2.3 EMISSIONS FROM SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

THE SITE SA 12 NOISE DURING CONSTRUCTION
SA 13 WATER POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING EQUIPMENT
SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION

BACKGROUND The various discharges and emissions from the site should be
considered over a building’s lifetime.
Construction site activities can be a source of significant environmental
degradation, unless appropriate steps are taken to reduce the emissions
to air, land and waters, and to reduce the often considerable annoyance
from construction related noise. It is the responsibility of contractors to do
all in their power to employ appropriate construction methods that reduce
air pollution, noise and water pollution.
It is the responsibility of the project team to consider emissions from the
site, primarily the buildings on the site, as they may affect neighbouring
properties, especially noise sensitive receivers such as hospitals,
schools, residential buildings, etc., which will be affected for the life of the
building development. Of concern is any air pollution, noise pollution and
light pollution arising from the building engineering systems and
equipment, all of which can be alleviated by good design and proper
installation and maintenance.

Page 2-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING AREA

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.P PREREQUISITE

SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING AREA

EXCLUSIONS Buildings or sites not for residential use; or residential sites less than or
equal to 1,000 m2.

OBJECTIVE Encourage building development to preserve or expand urban greenery

to enhance the quality of living environment, reduce surface runoff to
drainage system and minimise impacts on fresh water and ground water
systems during building use.
It is required to demonstrate compliance with appropriate planting on site
REQUIREMENT
equivalent to at least 20% of the site area.
ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
that outlines the Master Landscape Plan for the site and provides a
dialogue that demonstrates how soft landscaping has addressed the
guidelines and recommendations provided in the Hong Kong Planning
Standards and Guidelines Chapter 4 Section 2 Greenery [1], appropriate
to the type and scale of the building development and the immediate
surroundings. The report shall detail the landscape treatment of the
development including the planting and hard finishes of all landscaped
areas, slopes and retaining structures, including but not limited to details
of:
• compliance with existing legislation and administrative measures
relevant to preservation of vegetation, including the felling of trees;
• trees retained, replanted or removed, and work undertaken to protect
existing trees both during construction and permanently;
• site formation with specific details of slope treatment;
• the choice of finishes in qualitative terms for all hardwork elements,
indicating any perceived or quantifiable environmental benefits;
• planting plans with the character and planting densities for all
softworks elements, details of the species used, and assessment of
environmental benefits;
• the adequacy of soil depth and drainage for all planted areas;
• the method of irrigation used and source of water supply; and
• future maintenance provisions.
It is expected that due account shall be taken of the plant type and
planter designs to minimise watering and maintenance requirements.
The species, density, topsoil, fertiliser, pesticide, planting maintenance,
etc. should comply with the General Specification for Building Section 25:
Landscape, or at least equal equivalent.
The Client shall demonstrate compliance through quantification of the
areas of greenery on the site and any building, including sky gardens,
podium areas, roofs and other parts of the building. Water features in
landscape design shall be considered in the calculation of areas of
greenery. Where the target percentage can be achieved the prerequisite
requirement shall be met.

BACKGROUND In addition to mitigating any damage to site ecology, landscaping

Page 2-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA P1 MINIMUM LANDSCAPING AREA

strategies can:
• enhance a site’s microclimate (trees for shade and windbreaks,
ponds and fountains, acoustic barriers, podium with gardens, etc.);
• provide for efficient irrigation (efficient use of direct rainfall, plant
selection, water retention, materials in walkways allowing percolation
to sub-soil, using well water, drip irrigation systems, etc.); and
• control surface run-off (roof ponds, holding tanks, semi-permeable
surfaces on open areas, etc.)
Large expanses of greenery are difficult to secure in densely built city
centres. However, the provision of plants on the outside and on rooftops
contributes to making the city greener. For example, a building rooftop
covered with greenery can significantly reduce surface temperature in
summer, compared with bare asphalt or concrete rooftops. Roof
greenery also can reduce peak roof runoff and alleviate storm drainage
pressure. To protect and improve the built and natural environment the
Government in promoting the construction of green and innovative
buildings has identified communal sky gardens and communal podium
gardens [2,3].
Water pollution in Hong Kong remains a problem. Measures that mitigate
against pollution will help reduce the environmental loading. Criteria for
protection of the aquatic environment against water pollution include
consideration of all the aquatic components: water quality, hydrology,
bottom sediments, and ecology.

1 Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines, Chapter 4 – Recreation, Open Space and Greening.
http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch4/ch4_text.htm
2 Buildings Department et al. Joint Practice Note No. 1. Green and Innovative Buildings. October 2004.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/joint/JPN01.pdf
3 Buildings Department et al. Joint Practice Note No. 2. Second Package of Incentives to Promote Green and Innovative
Buildings. February 2006.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/joint/JPN02.pdf

Page 2-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.1 SITE LOCATION

SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND

EXCLUSIONS Building developments on Greenfield sites and the site contamination/

landfill gas hazard assessment and mitigation measures are statutory
requirements of the project.

OBJECTIVE Ensure proper investigation and remediation of potential contamination

of redevelopment sites, or proper precautions for sites adjacent to landfill
sites.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 BONUS credit for conducting a site contamination assessment and
implementing measures for rehabilitation, and/or proper preparation of
sites and structures adjacent to landfill sites.

ASSESSMENT a) Contaminated sites

The Client shall submit evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person that demonstrates through a site contamination
assessment that the issues and requirements outlined in Guidance Note
for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation [ 1 ] have been
addressed and that the immediate environs are free from any hazardous
contamination. The report shall confirm that the required remedial
measures, other than excavation and transfer to land fill (which is not
regarded as an environmentally sound solution), have been completed to
restore the land to an acceptable condition for use for the building
redevelopment.
b) Sites adjacent to landfill
The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person confirming that the site has been properly
assessed and all issues and requirements outlined in ProPECC PN 3/96
[2] have been adequately addressed. Due consideration to gas hazards
that may arise during the construction phase shall be included.

BACKGROUND Derelict land and sites previously used as factories, shipyards, for
chemical manufacturing or processing, oil deports, car repair workshops,
waste treatment, etc, might be contaminated by hazardous substances
such as oil, heavy metals and organic substances. Most of these sites
are targeted for renewal in the Urban Renewal Strategy Study. Such land
can pose risks to users, the adjacent environment or even the building
materials, possibly undermining the integrity of the building. Special
attention and rehabilitation may be required. Reclaimed land constructed
with soil dredged from seabed or construction and demolition material
can also be contaminated.
Guidance Note for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation
sets out requirements for proper assessment and management of
potentially contaminated sites, and suggests practical remedial
measures that can be adopted for the clean-up of a contaminated site.
Although the requirements set out in the Guidance Note are usually
incorporated through the land use planning process, either as conditions

1 Environmental Protection Department. Guidance Note for Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/envir_standards/non_statutory/files/GN_for_land_contamination_e.pdf
2 Environmental Protection Department. Practice Notes for Professional Persons, ProPECC PN 3/96 Landfill Gas Hazard
Assessment for Developments Adjacent to Landfills.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/textonly/english/resources_pub/publications/files/pn96_3.pdf

Page 2-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 1 CONTAMINATED LAND

to planning permission, or as special conditions in relevant land-title

documents for cases associated with potential land contamination
problems, it is a good practice to carry out an investigation of site
contamination on developed or reclaimed land to eliminate any risk or
hazard arising from potential land contamination. Technical particulars
on how a detailed site assessment should be conducted, and should be
made reference to the “Guidance Manual for Use of Risk-based
Remediation Goals for Contaminated Land Management” [ 3 ] and the
“Guidance Notes for Investigation and Remediation of Contaminated
Sites of Petrol Filling Station, Boatyards and Car Repair/Dismantling
Workshops” [4].
Hong Kong is running out of landfill space due to the continued growth of
waste. Excavating the contaminated soil and disposing it of at landfills is
not considered as an environmentally responsible measure. On-site or
off-site remediation should be employed to restore the site to an
acceptable condition for the proposed use, or to put the treated soil to
good use elsewhere.
It is recognised that building developments on land adjacent to landfill
sites may be affected by migrating landfill gas and/or leachate unless
specific precautions are taken to control the potential hazards. The
Practice Note [2] sets out the conditions when a landfill gas hazard
assessment may be required and provides general guidelines on how
such an assessment should be undertaken. A Guidance Note [ 5 ]
describes in more detail the process which should be followed in
evaluating the risks and designing appropriate protection measures. The
Guidance Note is not intended to provide comprehensive guidance on all
aspects of risk assessment or design of precautionary/protection
measures, but rather to give general guidance on important issues such
as the factors to be considered when assessing the level of risk and the
procedures which should be followed in undertaking the assessment.

3 Environmental Protection Department. Guidance Manual for Use of Risk-based Remediation Goals for Contaminated Land
Management. http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/tc_chi/environmentinhk/waste/guide_ref/files/0056485_GM_6Jul07.pdf
4 Environmental Protection Department. Guidance Notes for Investigation and Remediation of Contaminated Sites of Petrol
Filling Station, Boatyards and Car Repair/Dismantling Workshops.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/waste/guide_ref/guide_contamsite.html
5 Environmental Protection Department. Landfill Gas Hazard Assessment.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/textonly/english/environmentinhk/waste/guide_ref/guide_lgha.html

Page 2-6
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.1 SITE LOCATION

SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Discourage the use of private vehicles and taxis by building users, with
the aim to reduce air pollution, energy use, and noise from traffic.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Car parking provisions

1 credit where parking capacity must meet but not exceed minimum
requirement from government and parking shall be provided for carpools
or shuttle service vehicles.
2 credits where no car parking is provided other than provisions intended
for use by disabled persons and/or any shuttle service vehicles.
b) Public transport
1 credit for availability of convenient pedestrian access to mainstream
public transport.
ASSESSMENT a) Car parking provisions
The Client shall provide details of any car parking facilities and the
means of vehicular access and egress, in terms of drawings and/or
photographs, together with a report confirming access and restrictions on
use, as they affects the occupants. To obtain credit any car park shall
comply with the following conditions:
• be provided with access that ensures simultaneous free flow of
vehicles in and out of the car park; and
• provisions to avoid ground contamination from oil run-off.
b) Public transport
To obtain the credit the mass transit station or other public transport
facilities must be within 0.5 km of the occupied building, and the
scheduled operating frequency between 07.00 to 19.00 hours shall be 10
minutes or less.
The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a survey map of the
occupied building and the public transport facilities in the near vicinity.
The map shall identify the location of the building at or near the centre of
a scale drawing produced on an A3 size sheet with each of the listed
services identified. The unencumbered walking route from the building
main entrance to the main entrance to each public transport stop/station
shall be clearly marked by lines on the drawing and the walking distance
shown alongside. An accompanying legend shall be included on the
drawing identifying the mass transit system, the walking distance, and
the frequency of services during 07.00 to 19.00 hours.
For sites not directly served by mainstream public transport, the
provision of a shuttle service vehicle which links to a main stream mass
transport interchange operating at the stated frequency may be deemed
to satisfy the criteria. The onus is on the Client to demonstrate that the
service is of adequate capacity, the frequency will meet the needs of all
building users, and the shuttle bus is company owned, or there is a
minimum 1 year rolling contract in place with the service provider.

Page 2-7
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 2 LOCAL TRANSPORT

BACKGROUND The increasing number of private vehicles in Hong Kong not only
increases pressure on the highway and urban traffic system, but also
worsens local air pollution. The most urgent problem to be resolved
comes from fossil fuel burning vehicles, often aggravated by the street
canyon effect of high-rise buildings. Exhaust fumes from cars contain
volatile organic compounds: some of these are known carcinogens while
others contribute to photochemical smog by assisting in the rapid
formation of ozone in the atmosphere. The exhaust fumes also contain
CO, CO2, NOx and SO2 which contribute a variety of environmental
problems. Apart from the health effects of traffic fumes, motor vehicles
also generate noise, another environmental nuisance.
Part of the solution to the air pollution problem is to reduce the use of
private vehicles and taxis. Building users should be encouraged to use
public transport to and from the building. Provision of pedestrian links
which allow easy access to major public transport systems and local
amenities can discourage use of private transport, thereby reducing air
and noise pollution.
The adequacy of a shuttle bus service may be demonstrated by data
showing capacity, frequency, service hours, and the percentage of
building users that can be transported during peak periods of commuting.

Page 2-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 3 NEIGHBOURING AMENITIES

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.1 SITE LOCATION

SA 3 NEIGHBOURHOOD AMENITIES

EXCLUSIONS Emergency Service Premises (e.g. fire station, power substation, etc.)

OBJECTIVE Encourage building development that is integrated within, and an asset

to, the immediate neighbourhood.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Provision of basic services

1 credit where at least 10 different basic services are located within
500m from the Site and pedestrian access to the services is available for
the Site.
b) Neighbourhood recreational facilities
1 credit where at least 2 different recreational facilities are located within
500m from the Site and pedestrian access to the facilities is available for
the Site.
c) Provided basic services/recreational facilities
1 credit where at least 2 different recreational facilities or at least 5
different basic services are located within the Site and will be made
available for public use.
ASSESSMENT Assessment is based on the overall provisions for local residents and
building users within the immediate vicinity of the building development,
whether these are provided within the immediate neighbourhood, or are
an additional provision within the development for the benefit of the
neighbourhood.
a) Provision of basic services
The Client shall provide a report based on a survey of the immediate
neighbourhood and details of the development itself to demonstrate
adequate provision of basic services for building users. Basic services
shall include (1) Restaurants; (2) Banks (including Automated Teller
Machine); (3) Medical Facility; (4) Dental Clinic; (5) Pharmacy; (6)
Supermarket; (7) Convenience Stores; (8) School; (9) Kindergarten or
Day Care Centre; (10) Library; (11) Post Box; (12) Laundry or Dry
Cleaner; (13) Hairdresser; (14) Retail shops; (15) Place of Worship; and
(16) Community Centre. The onus is on the Client to demonstrate that
basic services, appropriate to the needs of the intended building users,
exist within the site or within reasonable walking distances.
b) Neighbourhood recreational facilities
The Client shall provide a report based on a survey of the immediate
neighbourhood and details of the development itself to demonstrate
adequate provision of recreational facilities and open space for building
users. Recreational facilities shall include (1) Shaded/covered sitting out
areas/garden/park with seating facilities; (2) Waterfront Promenade; (3)
Public Swimming pool; (4) Public Indoor Sports Hall; (5) Public Outdoor
Sports Facility such as football field, basketball court, tennis court, etc;
(6) Bicycle Tracks. The onus is on the Client to demonstrate that the
facilities, appropriate to the needs of the intended building users, exist
within the site or within reasonable walking distances.
c) Provided basic services/recreational facilities
The Client shall provide evidence that on-site facilities will be made

Page 2-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 3 NEIGHBOURING AMENITIES

available for public use, including details of any restrictions or conditions

of access that will be in place. Credit shall be awarded where the
provision of recreational facilities or open space adds to those available
within the immediate neighbourhood, and provide for reasonable access
by the public. Types of basic services and recreational facilities can be
referred to SA 3a) and SA 3b) respectively. Private clubhouse shall not be
counted in this credit requirement.
Judgment as to the nature of basic services and the provision of
recreational facilities and open space with respect to a particular building
development shall be made with reference to the Hong Kong Planning
and Standards Guidelines [1].

BACKGROUND The provision of basic services such as shops, restaurants, clinics, etc.,
in the immediate vicinity of a building improves efficiency and the quality
of living. Building users can benefit from existing provisions as well as
those provided by the development that adds to the neighbourhood.
Provision of recreational facilities and open space are essential to the
mental and physical well-being of the individual and the community as a
whole [2]. It contributes to the quality of life of building users, and is more
sustainability. Recreational open space is outdoor open-air space used
for active and/or passive recreation use. Active recreation facilities
include core activities such as ball games, swimming pool and sports
facilities, etc, while passive recreational facilities refer to parks, gardens,
sitting-out areas, waterfront promenades, paved areas for informal
games, children's playgrounds, etc. The design and layout of these
facilities should be of a high quality which meets the needs of the users
and are perform to high environmental standards.
To enhance the quality of a neighbourhood a development can bring
additional recreational facilities and open space that is accessible by the
public within reasonable restrictions on time of use, etc.

1 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines. http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/index_e.htm

2 Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines. Chapter 4 : Recreation, Open Space and Greening
http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch4/ch4_text.htm

Page 2-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage a proactive approach in order to achieve greater integration

of site planning issues.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for a site design appraisal report which demonstrates a proactive
approach to achieve greater integration of site planning and design
issues, and at least 50% of relevant sub-items of the Urban Design
Guidelines in the Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines are
achieved.
1 BONUS credit for 100% of relevant sub-items of the Urban Design
Guidelines are achieved.

ASSESSMENT The onus is on the Client to demonstrate that site planning and design
have taken into full account the physical and environmental aspects of
the immediate site surroundings and neighbourhood. A report shall be
submitted that explains and details the design team’s efforts in achieving
integration of the development with the immediate surroundings,
covering as a minimum the negative, neutral or positive impacts
associated with:
• Special Major Urban Design Issues
• Massing and intensity in urban fringe areas and rural areas
• Developing height profile
• Waterfront sites
• Public realm
• Streetscape
• Heritage
• View Corridors
• Stilted Structures

• Special Major Land Uses Issues

For Commercial Zone
• Project a positive recognizable image for district and city
• Create safe, interesting and comfortable circulation route for
pedestrians
• Create an efficient vehicular circulation system to minimise
negative impact of vehicles on pedestrians
• Provide adequate and conveniently accessible parking facilities
• Provide maximum air circulation to improve air quality in
commercial core area and achieve acceptable air quality
• Maintain the vibrant streetscape character
For Residential Zone and Village

Page 2-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL

• Create appropriate size of the development

• Minimise adverse visual impact of development height on
surrounding areas
• Create interesting built form and mass
• Choose a suitable location for blocks/ houses to enhance
privacy of residents and to minimise the negative visual, noise
and air quality impacts
• Create an efficient, comfortable, safe, and convenient
pedestrian circulation system throughout the neighbourhood
• Create an efficient vehicular circulation system with minimal
negative impacts on pedestrian circulation
• Provide adequate and easily accessible parking facilities for
residents’ vehicles
• Provide open space and G/IC facilities which are usable,
accessible and valuable to residents
• Minimise negative impacts on surrounding natural environment
• Create a recognizable identity
• Establish self-contained neighbourhoods and communities to
encourage residents’ civic pride and sense of belonging
• Respect topographical/ landscape setting and the harmony of
the village layout
• Create a focus for village and enhance its individual identity
• Provide efficient pedestrian and vehicular circulation system
suitable for the village setting
• Preserve historical and cultural characteristics of indigenous
villages
For Industrial Zone
• Locate industry to ensure minimal negative impacts on
surroundings
• Create an efficient layout for internal circulation and project a
positive image of the industrial area
• Provide safe and efficient pedestrian networks to and through
the industrial development
• Maximise available and usable open space for workforce

The appraisal shall make reference to the Urban Design Guideline

presented in the Chapter 11 of the Hong Kong Planning Standards and
Guidelines [ 1 ]. Where at least 50% of relevant sub-items of the Urban
Design Guidelines shall be fulfilled the credit shall be awarded. Where
100% of relevant sub-items achieved, one BONUS credit shall be
awarded.

BACKGROUND BEAM seeks to encourage the Client and the design team to adopt a
more integrated and proactive approach to the site planning matters. A
site design appraisal report is to demonstrate how the various aspects of
site and architectural planning issues can collectively contribute to the
enhancement of the site and its surrounding neighbourhood.

1 Planning Department. Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines. Chapter11: Urban Design Guidelines.
http://www.pland.gov.hk/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch11/ch11_text.htm

Page 2-12
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 4 SITE DESIGN APPRAISAL

Investigations should include:

• a detailed assessment of the climatic conditions and
topographic conditions immediate to the site;
• examination of the orientation of the buildings with respect to
environmental conditions, overshadowing and views;
• planning of building form in response to local environmental
conditions, such as variation of heights and distances among
buildings and breaks in and between buildings, to achieve
better natural ventilation and daylighting;
The ratio between the area of a site covered by buildings, and the open
ground area without buildings within the site, affects the resistance that
the wind encounters in the particular site and the access of sun and
daylight in the site and subsequently affects pollutant concentration. Site
layout should seek to minimise any negative aspects relating to
microclimate, solar heat gain, wind, and loss of natural daylight to the
neighbouring buildings and pubic areas, as well as the development
itself.

Page 2-13
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE To conserve and enhance the natural environment by protecting the

ecological value of the site in terms of habitat and biodiversity and using
Brownfield site.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 Bonus

PREREQUISITES For designated project (DP) as specified under the Environmental Impact
Assessment Ordinance (EIAO), Environmental Permit shall be obtained
by following the statutory Environmental Impact Assessment Process,
unless exempted.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 BONUS credit for meeting a value less than 30% of score obtained in
Habitat Section of Nature Outlook Assessment and for meeting a value
less than 20% of score obtained in Biodiversity Section of Nature
Outlook, or demonstrating that appropriate design measures have been
implemented to contribute positively to the ecological value of the site.

ASSESSMENT To obtain a proper balance between building development needs and

unacceptable damage to the natural environment, the ETWB of the
HKSAR Government introduced a draft scoring scheme for assessing
the ecological value of a site, called `Nature Outlook’ in 2003. This is a
relatively objective and systematic method of assessing the ecological
importance and value of individual site by taking into account the value of
the particular habitats and biodiversity.
This indicator is particular applicable for Greenfield site building
development. The assessment scheme facilitates the identification of the
entire site or particular portion of the site that deserve better protection
and their relative priorities for action.
There are 2 portions in the Nature Outlook, which are Habitat and
Biodiversity. Lower percentage obtained in the Habitat section means the
building is designed on a Brownfield site, which has low habitat value.
The major Sub-criteria in this indicator are:
• Naturalness (weighting 15%)
• Habitat diversity (weighting 15%)
• Size (weighting 10%)
• Non-recreatability (weighting 10%)
• Degree of disturbance (weighting 10%)
Lower percentage obtained in the Biodiversity section means the building
is designed on a Brownfield site, which has a low biodiversity value. The
major Sub-criteria in this indicator are:
• Species diversity & Richness (weighting 20%)
• Species rarity / Endemism (weighting 20%)
Survey of the site-wide ecological value is required in order to ensure the
preventive measures and the following detailed design works will take full
consideration of the existing site ecological conditions.
Relevant site survey and assessment report for Habitat and Biodiversity
section as described in the Nature Outlook shall be provided to
demonstrate compliance with the bonus credit requirement.

Page 2-14
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 5 ECOLOGICAL IMPACT

BACKGROUND Habitat conservation is the most effective means to minimise

developmental impacts on the natural environment and endangered
species (if any). The natural environment is a valuable asset belonging to
the people of Hong Kong and our future generations. New developments
may destroy the natural environment of the habitats. The complexity of
the habitat types, the time and effort needed to recreate the ecosystem,
and the degree of uncertainty in recreating the habitats within the site
should be of concern. Hence, the ecological value of the site in terms of
habitat is assessed in this indicator.
Hong Kong contains large areas of natural landscapes, which support a
diverse assemblage of plant and animal species. However, there are
expanding areas of building development, connecting roads and parking
areas, which endanger the wildlife corridors and the survival of species.
Therefore, at the site level, BEAM encourages the creation or retention
of habitats for indigenous species to maintain / increase the local
biodiversity. Biodiversity consideration shall be included in the design or
redevelopment stages to improve / maintain the biodiversity conditions. If
an area of high biodiversity is identified in the site, it is encouraged to
formulate management strategies to protect the habitats and any rare or
endangered species within the land under ownership. Hence, building
development is encouraged at Brownfield locations with a low ecological
value.

Page 2-15
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE

EXCLUSIONS Sites or buildings without cultural heritage.

OBJECTIVE Conserve and protect archaeological remains, historic buildings and

monuments so as to maintain the local and regional cultural heritage.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Antiquities and Monuments Ordinance, and where
applicable to the development, the Environmental Impact Assessment
Ordinance.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit where development does not have a negative impact on sites of
cultural heritage.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall conduct a site survey and desktop study to identify if
there are any sites of cultural heritage on or in the near vicinity of the
development site. The information of the identified sites of cultural
heritage shall be assembled from the Antiquities and Monuments Office
[1], public libraries and archives and tertiary institutions. The guidelines
and criteria for the assessment of sites of cultural interest shall follow
Annex 10 and Annex 19 of Technical Memorandum to the Environmental
Impact Assessment Process [ 2 ]. The guidelines on conservation of
historical buildings contained in the Chapter 10 of Hong Kong Planning
and Standards Guidelines [ 3 ] shall be followed. It is encouraged to
preserve sites or buildings of cultural heritage or enhance the setting of
such neighbouring sites or buildings.
Credit shall be awarded where evidence in the form of report by a
suitably qualified person is provided detailing the findings and confirming
that site preparation (including the process of reclamation), construction
and building commissioning has had no adverse impacts on these sites.

BACKGROUND Hong Kong has a long history which probably dates back to 6,000 years
ago and possesses rich cultural heritage resources. SUSDEV 21 Study
has defined heritage resources as those sites which contain
archaeological, historical and religious value. Cultural heritage provides a
means of knowing and interpreting social, cultural and economic
changes and enhancing our understanding of the past. It also provides a
focus for community identity, from which a sense of belonging to Hong
Kong can be fostered among the community [4].
Preservation of cultural heritage resources is important. Besides the
declared monuments that are protected under the Antiquities and
Monuments Ordinance and the Environmental Impact Assessment
Ordinance there are over 450 historic buildings have been accorded a
grading, but which have no statutory protection. There remain thousands
of historic buildings which are yet to be fully assessed and categorised,
and are outside the protected areas. As such, special attention and
measures must be given taken to ensure that any cultural heritage
features on site and in the vicinity are properly retained and protected to

1 Antiquities and Monuments Office. http://www.lcsd.gov.hk/CE/Museum/Monument/en/index.php

2 Environmental Protection Department. Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact Assessment Process.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/legis/index3.htm
3 Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines. http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/e_index.htm
4 HK2030 Study. Working Paper No. 9. Built Heritage Preservation.
http://www.info.gov.hk/hk2030/hk2030content/wpapers/wpaper_9/e_wpaper_9.htm

Page 2-16
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 6 CULTURAL HERITAGE

maintain our cultural sustainability [5].

The definition of sites of cultural heritage is shown in Schedule 1 of the
Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance. They generally cover
archaeological sites and structures, historical buildings, paleontological
sites and other cultural heritage features in a wide variety of forms (e.g.
old street furniture, lime kilns, graves, trackways, salt-pans, etc.).
Relics fashioned before 1800 (and discovered after 1976) belong to the
Government under the Antiquities and Monuments Ordinance. The
excavation and search for such relics require a license from the
Authority.

5 Environmental Protection Department. Assessment of Impact on Sites of Cultural Heritage in Environmental Impact
Assessment Studies. http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/english/guid/index5.html

Page 2-17
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTERS

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTERS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage building development to preserve or expand urban greenery

to enhance the quality of living environment, reduce surface runoff to
drainage system and minimise impacts on fresh water and ground water
systems during building use.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES For residential premises with site area larger than 1,000 m2, it is required
to demonstrate compliance with appropriate planting on site equivalent to
at least 20% of the site area.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Hard landscaping

1 credit for using pervious materials for a minimum of 50% of hard
landscaped areas.
b) Soft landscaping
1 credit for providing appropriate planting on site equivalent to at least
30% of the site area.
2 credits for providing appropriate planting on site equivalent to at least
40% of the site area.
ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
that outlines the Master Landscape Plan for the site and provides a
dialogue that demonstrates how soft landscaping has addressed the
guidelines and recommendations provided in the Hong Kong Planning
Standards and Guidelines Chapter 4 Section 2 Greenery [1], appropriate
to the type and scale of the building development and the immediate
surroundings. The report shall detail the landscape treatment of the
development including the planting and hard finishes of all landscaped
areas, slopes and retaining structures, including but not limited to details
of:
• compliance with existing legislation and administrative measures
relevant to preservation of vegetation, including the felling of trees;
• trees retained, replanted or removed, and work undertaken to protect
existing trees both during construction and permanently;
• site formation with specific details of slope treatment;
• the choice of finishes in qualitative terms for all hardwork elements,
indicating any perceived or quantifiable environmental benefits;
• planting plans with the character and planting densities for all
softworks elements, details of the species used, and assessment of
environmental benefits;
• the adequacy of soil depth and drainage for all planted areas;
• the method of irrigation used and source of water supply; and
• future maintenance provisions.
a) Hard landscaping

1 Hong Kong Planning Standards and Guidelines, Chapter 4 – Recreation, Open Space and Greening.
http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch4/ch4_text.htm

Page 2-18
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 7 LANDSCAPING AND PLANTERS

Where it can be demonstrated that a minimum 50% of hard landscaped

area (e.g. roadways, surface parking, plazas, pathways, but excluding
Emergency Vehicular Access), are pervious and measures are taken to
restrict the contamination of ground waters by oil and similar
contaminants, the credit shall be awarded.
b) Soft landscaping
It is expected that due account shall be taken of the plant type and
planter designs to minimise watering and maintenance requirements.
The species, density, topsoil, fertiliser, pesticide, planting maintenance,
etc. should comply with the General Specification for Building Section 25:
Landscape, or at least equal equivalent.
The Client shall demonstrate compliance through quantification of the
areas of greenery on the site and any building, including sky gardens,
podium areas, roofs and other parts of the building. Water features in
landscape design shall be considered in the calculation of areas of
greenery. Where the target percentage can be achieved the credit(s)
shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND In addition to mitigating any damage to site ecology, landscaping

strategies can:
• enhance a site’s microclimate (trees for shade and windbreaks,
ponds and fountains, acoustic barriers, podium with gardens, etc.);
• provide for efficient irrigation (efficient use of direct rainfall, plant
selection, water retention, materials in walkways allowing percolation
to sub-soil, using well water, drip irrigation systems, etc.); and
• control surface run-off (roof ponds, holding tanks, semi-permeable
surfaces on open areas, etc.)
Large expanses of greenery are difficult to secure in densely built city
centres. However, the provision of plants on the outside and on rooftops
contributes to making the city greener. For example, a building rooftop
covered with greenery can significantly reduce surface temperature in
summer, compared with bare asphalt or concrete rooftops. Roof
greenery also can reduce peak roof runoff and alleviate storm drainage
pressure. To protect and improve the built and natural environment the
Government in promoting the construction of green and innovative
buildings has identified communal sky gardens and communal podium
gardens [2, 3].
Water pollution in Hong Kong remains a problem. Measures that mitigate
against pollution will help reduce the environmental loading. Criteria for
protection of the aquatic environment against water pollution include
consideration of all the aquatic components: water quality, hydrology,
bottom sediments, and ecology.

2 Buildings Department et al. Joint Practice Note No. 1 Green and Innovative Buildings. October 2004.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/joint/JPN01.pdf
3 Buildings Department et al. Joint Practice Note No. 2 Second Package of Incentives to Promote Green and Innovative
Buildings. February 2006.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/joint/JPN02.pdf

Page 2-19
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure the microclimate around and adjacent to buildings has been
adequately considered, and where appropriate, suitable mitigation
measures are provided.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 4

PREREQUISITES For Air Ventilation Assessment, those project belonging to the categories
requiring AVA as specified in the Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau
Technical Circular No. 1/06 – Air Ventilation Assessment.
http://www.devb-plb.gov.hk/eng/circulars/pdf/hplb-etwb-tc-01-06.pdf

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Wind amplification

1 credit for demonstrating that no pedestrian areas will be subject to
excessive wind velocities caused by amplification due to the site layout
and/or building design.
b) Elevated temperatures
1 credit for providing shade on at least 50% of non-roof impervious
surfaces on the site (parking, walkways, plazas) using light coloured
high-albedo materials (reflectance of at least 0.3).
1 credit for providing high emissivity roofing (emissivity of at least 0.9)
material or vegetation roof covering at least 50% of the total roof area.
c) Air Ventilation Assessment
1 credit for conducting an Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA) by wind
tunnel or CFD according to the methodology introduced by HPLB &
ETWB in 2006 [1] and demonstrating the optimal option is selected in
comparing with different options.
ASSESSMENT The microclimate includes sky and podium gardens, walkways, sitting-
out areas, etc.
a) Wind amplification
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
demonstrating compliance.
Relative wind speeds around buildings shall be assessed by placing a
suitable scale model of the building and surrounding large structures
within 500m radius from the development site in a boundary layer wind
tunnel. Profiles of relative wind flow can be predicted at pedestrian
levels. Measurement may be through multiple point measurement or
through erosion techniques. The wind amplification factor, the developed
site ground wind speed relative to the open ground site wind speed, can
be estimated at pedestrian areas. These include entrances and exits to
buildings, car parks, pedestrian routes, play areas, etc.
Alternatively, wind flow around the estate can be simulated using
computer airflow modelling (CFD), and areas of relative wind speed
predicted. Tests should be carried out for average wind speed for the site
and the main prevailing wind directions. It should be demonstrated that
under prevailing wind conditions
• no pedestrian areas on or immediately adjacent to the site shall have
local wind speeds accelerated by factors greater than 2; and

1 Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau. Technical Circular No. 1/06. http://www.devb-plb.gov.hk/eng/circulars/pdf/hplb-
etwb-tc-01-06.pdf

Page 2-20
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS

• there are no stagnant areas which has a wind speed of less than 1.5
ms-1 and not ‘flushed’ by breezes.
b) Elevated temperatures
The Client shall submit a report detailing strategies and design solutions
to mitigate elevated temperatures in exposed public areas. This should
demonstrate the effectiveness of reducing temperatures:
i) provide shade on at least 50% of non-roof impervious surfaces
on the site (parking, walkways, plazas) using light coloured high-
albedo materials (reflectance of at least 0.3); or
ii) provide high emissivity roofing (emissivity of at least 0.9)
covering at least 50% of the total roof area; or provide vegetation
covering at least 50% of the total roof area.
c) Air ventilation assessment
The House, Planning and Lands Bureau and Environment, Transports
and Works Bureau had formulated the methodology for Air Ventilation
Assessment. The Client shall follow the technical circular [1] as
described and demonstrate the effects and impacts on the pedestrian
wind environment.
The AVA report shall contain the following sections.
i An introductory section of the details of the projects.
ii A section on results of the Expert Evaluation. Concerns and potential
problems should be identified. Focuses and methodologies of further
studies should be defined.
iii A section on the characteristics of the Site Wind Availability to be
used for Initial Studies and Detail Studies. Methodologies used to
obtain the information must be explained in detail.
iv A section on the Methodology of the Initial study. The tool used for
the studies must be explained in detail. It is important for the
assessor to demonstrate and to justify that the tool and work process
used is technically “fit for the purpose”.
v A section on results and key findings of the Initial Study.
vi A section on Methodology of the Detailed Study. The tool used for
the studies must be explained in details. It is important for the
assessor to demonstrate and to justify that the tool and work process
used is technically “fit for the purpose”.
vii A section on results and key findings of the Detailed Study.
viii A section on Evaluation and Assessment. Summarise findings,
highlight problems and outline mitigation measures, if any.

BACKGROUND The microclimate around buildings can suffer as a result of the restricted
natural ventilation from winds and breezes, leading to stagnant areas of
pollution and elevated temperatures. Conversely, the topology can lead
to significant amplification of wind at pedestrian level, leading to
discomfort and fatigue for pedestrians, damage to plant life,
accumulation of debris, and in more extreme cases, danger from
impeded walking and flying objects.
Wind flow around a site can be accelerated or decelerated due to the
building form, typically 2 to 3 times greater than for open ground. Of
particular concern are localised areas of accelerated wind around
corners and between narrow channels.

Page 2-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 8 MICROCLIMATE AROUND BUILDINGS

The following table [2] indicates that mechanical discomfort sets in at

wind speeds of about 5 ms-1, with speeds above 8 ms-1 being very
uncomfortable and speeds above 20 ms-1 being dangerous. Conversely,
some areas may receive relatively low wind flow with free airflow being
obstructed by buildings.

Beaufort Wind Effect

Number speed ms-1
0,1 0-1.5 No noticeable wind
2 1.6-3.3 Wind felt on face
3 3.4-5.4 Hair disturbed, clothing flaps
4 5.5-7.9 Raises dust, dry soil and loose paper, hair blown
5 8.0-10.7 Force felt on body, limit of agreeable wind
6 10.8-13.8 Umbrellas use difficult, difficult to walk steadily
7 13.9-17.1 Inconvenience felt when walking
8 17.2-20.7 Generally impedes progress
9 20.8-24.4 People blown over by gusts
The use of non-reflective external surfaces contributes to localise
elevated temperatures created when solar heat gains are absorbed and
then radiated back to the surroundings. The effect may be local to
pedestrian and recreational areas, and contribute to urban heat islands.
As a result, local ambient and effective temperatures can rise by several
degrees or more when compared to more open and better ventilated
areas. Penalties include local discomfort, detrimental effects on site
vegetation and wildlife, etc. Elevated temperature can be mitigated
through the choice of finishes on buildings and horizontal hard surfaces
that reflect heat, the application of shading or planting vegetation.
Microclimatic conditions of the site should be designed with a thorough
and balanced consideration of the wind, sunlight, temperature, and air
quality.
To promote the awareness of project proponents to ensure that air
ventilation impacts are duly considered as one of the main criteria in the
planning and design process, Housing, Planning and Lands Bureau has
encourage to include Air Ventilation Assessment (AVA) in the planning
and design of the projects. A framework for applying AVA is developed
on the basis of the ‘Feasibility Study on Establishment of Air Ventilation
Assessment’ completed and endorsed by the Committee on Planning
and Land Development in 2005.
AVA targets the projects that may have major impacts on the macro wind
environment. The government will take the lead to apply AVA for all
major government projects including public housing projects and
comprehensive redevelopment areas, while quasi-government
organisations and the private sector are encouraged to apply AVA to
their projects on voluntary and need basis. The framework of AVA would
enable comparison of design options in external air ventilation terms and
identification of potential of potential problems areas for design
improvements.

2 British Building Research Station, Wind Environment Around Tall Buildings. Digest 141, May 1972.

Page 2-22
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD DAYLIGHT ACCESS

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD DAYLIGHT ACCESS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings where daylight is of no value to neighbouring properties.

OBJECTIVE Encourage building development which is sensitive to the needs of

neighbours in respect of preserving daylight and views.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with Building (Planning) Regulation (CAP 123F) Regulation

37.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for designs for which the access to daylight of neighbouring
sensitive buildings is maintained to the prescribed level.

ASSESSMENT Neighbouring buildings, both existing and planned, shall be assessed to

determine the value of daylight (and to some extent sunlight) to sensitive
buildings. Assessment shall be by appropriate computer and/or physical
modelling.
Sensitive building is defined as follow:
(i) residential buildings;
(ii) non-residential buildings
- premises that requires daylight to enhance the lighting
environment for the occupants to perform tasks, such as offices
and schools;
- premises that require daylight for energy saving and an
improved environment for the transient stage of occupation,
such as the circulation area of shopping centers and indoor
games halls; and
- premises that require daylight primarily for view, such as hotels
and hospitals.
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
containing a comprehensive analysis (calculations and drawings) that
qualifies and quantifies the extent to which the building development will
impact on the sensitive neighbouring buildings in respect of access to
daylight.
Change in the access to daylight may be objectively assessed in terms
of the change in Vertical Daylight Factor (VDF) on the façades of
sensitive receivers, or change in viewing angle, whichever is deemed
most appropriate.
Where the VDF on the façade of the lowest floor of the sensitive receiver
most affected is either unchanged or is no less than 12%, or the viewing
angle is reduced by less than 5%, the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Tall buildings can cause substantial overshadowing of neighbouring

developments and amenities, affecting both direct and indirect sunlight
and light from the sky. The profile of a building and its layout with respect
to neighbouring buildings impacts on beneficial views, such as to the
harbour or to mountains and open spaces, as well as affecting natural
breezeways around the development.
The impact of a new building on all existing or planned neighbouring
buildings where daylight and sunlight is of value, such as residential
buildings, hospitals, schools, etc should be assessed. Wherever possible
the access to these beneficial natural elements should be safeguarded.

Page 2-23
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 9 NEIGHBOURHOOD DAYLIGHT ACCESS

This issue reinforces the concept of ‘good neighbour buildings’.

Page 2-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 10 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.2 SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN

SA 10 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage a higher standard of environmental management during

construction.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES A prerequisite for credit is compliance with all relevant environmental

protection and pollution control ordinances. Any evidence of non-
compliance shall nullify the award of any credits. The relevant enacted
ordinances and their regulations are summarised in the Recommended
pollution control clauses for construction contracts by the Environmental
Protection Department.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for an Environmental Management Plan including Environmental

Monitoring and Auditing has been implemented.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide copies of relevant contract documents

highlighting the clauses appropriate to the construction activities for the
building development in accordance with recommendations set out by
the Environmental Protection Department. The Demolition/Construction
Contractor’s Environmental Management Plan should be submitted
which takes into account the Checklist and practical advice given in
PNRC 17 Appendix A [ 1 ]. The Client shall confirm through a report
derived from appropriate site management and monitoring that
environmental management practices on site are such as to comply with
legislative requirements and to minimise nuisance. Appendix A of PNRC
17 should be used as a point of reference in reporting on implementation
of the environmental management on site.
Where it can be demonstrated that contract documents, specifications
and cost provisions provide for an Environmental Management Plan
conforming to the guidelines, and the plan has been properly executed,
the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND The environmental impacts arising during demolition and construction

are often very significant, affecting site ecology, air, noise and water
quality as well as nuisance from waste within and outside the site. The
appointment of contractors who are environmentally aware and who are
able to implement good environmental practices on site should make a
significant contribution to reducing environmental pollution and waste.
Appropriate pollution control clauses should be included in demolition
and construction contracts in accordance with recommendations by the
Environmental Protection Department [ 2 ]. Contractors should take
appropriate steps to minimise the impacts of demolition and construction
activities on the surrounding environment.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Registered Contractors PNRC 17 Control of Environmental Nuisance from
Construction Sites. August 1997. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnrc/Pnrc17.pdf
2 Environmental Protection Department. Recommended Pollution Control Clauses for Construction Contracts.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/eia_planning/guide_ref/rpc.html

Page 2-25
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Minimise air pollution during the construction of buildings and the
infrastructure serving buildings.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Observance and compliance with the Air Pollution Control Ordinance and
its subsidiary regulations, particularly the Air Pollution Control (Open
Burning) Regulation and Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust)
Regulation and Air Pollution Control (Smoke) Regulation.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for applying adequate mitigation measures for dust and air
emissions during the construction as recommended by the
Environmental Protection Department and demonstrating compliance
with the air quality management guidelines as detailed in the
Environmental Monitoring and Audit Manual.

ASSESSMENT Where demolition is included as part of the works it shall be included in

the assessment.
The Client shall submit confirmation in the form of a report from suitably
qualified person that the works have been carried out without violation of
the Air Pollution Control Ordinance and no conviction or complaint about
air pollution from the site has been upheld by the Environmental
Protection Department.
The Client shall present evidence in the form of specifications and
contract documents detailing the requirements to control dust and air
emissions generated by construction activities. The Client’s
representative on site shall be responsible for monitoring and reporting
on the execution of the instructions. The representative shall confirm in
writing to the Assessor that the control of dust on site followed the
requirements as laid down in the specifications and contract documents.
The Client shall also present evidence in the form of a report prepared by
a suitably qualified person that the monitoring and audit of Respirable
Suspended Particulates (RSP) and Total Suspended Particulates (TSP)
has been satisfactory for the scale of the works involved. The
requirement shall make reference to the latest best practice guidelines or
practices (e.g. Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on
Construction Sites, etc.)
For major projects compliance with EPD’s Environmental Monitoring and
Audit Manual [1] is required. For those projects for which this it is not a
requirement the frequency of the monitoring can be reduced, and/or
monitoring undertaken during key phases of construction. For instance,
1-hour TSP monitoring should be undertaken with a sampling frequency
of at least three times in every six days, and when the highest dust
impact occurs.

BACKGROUND The Air Pollution Control Ordinance (APCO) is the main legislative
framework governing the control of air pollution activities. Air pollution
control regulations are enacted under the APCO for specific air pollution
control purposes. Under the APCO, air pollution emissions from
construction activities are subject to control under five regulations:
• Construction Dust Regulation

Page 2-26
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 11 AIR POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

• Specified Processes Regulation

• Smoke Regulation
• Fuel Restriction Regulation
• Open Burning Regulation
Dust generated by various construction site activities can make a
significant contribution to local air pollution. High levels of dust, combined
with other outdoor air pollutants, can cause respiratory problems. Inhaled
particles may aggravate asthma and bronchitis, and very small particles
may cause cancer. Dust also reduces visibility, dirties clothing and
buildings, and increases the rate of corrosion. All these effects decrease
the quality of life and cost money. Good site practices are the major
mitigation measures for prevention or minimisation of air pollution from
construction activities. Practical guidance on the control of air pollution
during construction is available from the Environmental Protection
Department. Measures include:
• effective water spays to be used to water exposed working areas
that can generate dust;
• fine particle materials on site to be enclosed and covered;
• wheel washing facilities shall be installed and used by all vehicles
leaving the site; and
• at the end of the works, all bare surface to be hydroseeded as soon
as possible.
A Guide, published by the Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA)
[2], aims to enhance the environmental awareness of the construction
industry and to provide steps and practical solutions to identify and
mitigate environmental problems which are often encountered on
construction sites.
The Guide can assist project/environmental managers and engineers to
implement environmental protection on construction sites, starting from
the project planning stage (e.g. tender bidding) to implementation, with
detailed descriptions of environmental impacts and mitigation measures.
Particular attention has been focused on environmental issues and
mitigation measures with regard to various construction activities
including piling and civil and building works.

1 Environmental Protection Department, Generic Environmental Monitoring and Audit Manual, Chapter 2, Air Quality.
2 Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA). Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites.
January 2009.

Page 2-27
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 12 NOISE DURING CONSTRUCTION

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

SA 12 NOISE DURING CONSTRUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Minimise nuisance to the immediate neighbourhood caused by noise

during the construction of buildings and the infrastructure serving
buildings.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Observance and compliance with the Noise Control Ordinance.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for providing adequate mitigation measures for construction
noise for all Noise Sensitive Receivers.

ASSESSMENT Where demolition is included as part of the works it shall be included in

the assessment.
The Client shall submit confirmation in the form of a report from suitably
qualified person that the works have been carried out without violation of
the Noise Control Ordinance, and that no complaint about noise from the
site has been upheld by the Authority (Environmental Protection
Department) or the Police leading to the issue of a fine or prosecution.
The Client’s representative on site, who shall be a suitably qualified
person, shall be responsible for monitoring and shall submit monthly
reports confirming that the control of noise on site has met the
requirements with reference to the latest best practice guidelines or
practices (e.g. Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on
Construction Sites, etc.), in respect of all Noise Sensitive Receivers as
defined in Annex 13 of the Technical Memorandum under the
Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance [1].

BACKGROUND Due to the high density of buildings, traffic and people, Hong Kong is
perhaps one of the noisiest cities in the world. The Government's policy
objective for controlling noise pollution is to ensure that a satisfactory
noise environment is maintained to safeguard the quality of life of the
population. Noise caused by construction activity is a major target for
attention. Noise related to construction activities is controlled under the
Noise Control Ordinance (NCO) Chapter 400. Despite the introduction of
controls under the NCO [ 2 ] and general tightening of the controls,
construction noise remains a problem.

Guidance is given practice notes issued by EPD and the Buildings

Department [3,4]. A Guide, published by the Hong Kong Construction
Association (HKCA) [5], aims to enhance the environmental awareness
of the construction industry and to provide steps and practical solutions
to identify and mitigate environmental problems which are often
encountered on construction sites.

1 Environmental Protection Department. EIA Technical Memorandum. Annex 13 Guidelines for Noise Assessment.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/eia/english/legis/memorandum/annex13.html
th
2 A Concise Guide to the Noise Control Ordinance. Environmental Protection Department. 8 Ed. July 2000.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/guide_nco.html
3 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registrated
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. ADV-4 Control of Environmental Nuisance from Construction Sites. August 1997.
http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/pnap/Pnap144.pdf
4 Environmental Protection Department. Environmental Noise.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/noise_education/web/ENG_EPD_HTML/index/index.html
5 Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA). Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites.
January 2009.

Page 2-28
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 12 NOISE DURING CONSTRUCTION

General requirements [ 6 ] and practical guidance [ 7 ] on meeting the

requirements is available from EPD. The police are also authorised to
enforce the sections of product noise and construction noise under the
NCO. Construction activities are grouped into two main categories:
• general works (e.g. excavation and concreting); and
• percussive piling (e.g. piling by means of a hydraulic hammer or a
drop hammer).
A Technical Memorandum [8] details the procedures for determining any
permitted hours of operation for percussive piling. Control of construction
noise for general works can be further categorised into:
• control in the whole territory - the use of all Powered Mechanical
Equipment (PME) requires a Construction Noise Permit (CNP)
during restricted hours; and
• control in Designated Areas - stricter control is imposed on
construction sites within Designated Areas (DA). Most of the built-up
residential areas are within designated areas. The use of Specified
Powered Mechanical Equipment and the carrying out of Prescribed
Construction Work (PCW) during restricted hours requires a CNP.

For construction work other than percussive piling other technical

memoranda [9,10] detail the procedures for determining (on the basis of
equipment used, distance separation, and the calculated noise level)
whether a CNP for general works should be granted. The noise impacts
on nearby Noise Sensitive Receivers (NSRs, e.g. dwellings, school) are
assessed in accordance with the Technical Memoranda. Under the
Noise Control Ordinance, there is no statutory control on the noise from
general works during the unrestricted hours (i.e. 7 am - 7 pm on
weekdays).
Examples of ‘good practices’ in respect of further reducing noise
nuisance from construction activities, erection of barriers and use of
enclosures, and use of appropriate equipment such as:
• hydraulic piling hammers;
• hydraulic crushers instead of conventional excavator mounted
breakers;
• wire saw for concrete cutting rather than excavator mounted
breakers
• acoustic enclosures for hand-held breakers and generators;
• acoustic barriers for large equipment;
• disposal of rubble through plastic chutes; or
• providing temporary solutions to reduce noise at adjacent noise
sensitive receivers, such as the provision of acoustic insulation.

6 Environmental Protection Department. EIA & Planning: guidelines & references, section 3 Noise Control.
7 http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/news_events/current_issue/files/enoise2002.ppt
8 Environmental Protection Department. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Percussive Piling.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/tm_pp.html
9 Environmental Protection Department. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work other than Percussive
Piling. http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/tm_nonpp.html
10 Environmental Protection Department. Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work in Designated Areas.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/tm_des_area.html

Page 2-29
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 13 WATER POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

SA 13 WATER POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure the proper management of construction site discharges.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Observance and compliance with the Water Pollution Control Ordinance
and its subsidiary regulation.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for undertaking adequate measures to reduce water pollution
during construction.

ASSESSMENT Where demolition is included as part of the works it shall be included in

the assessment.
The Client shall submit confirmation in the form of a report from suitably
qualified person that the works have been carried out without violation of
the Water Pollution Control Ordinance and no conviction or complaint
about water pollution from the site has been upheld by the Environmental
Protection Department.
The Client shall present evidence in the form of specifications and
contract documents detailing the requirements to undertake measures to
reduce water pollution during construction, as made reference to the
latest best practice guidelines or practices (e.g. Best Practice Guide for
Environmental Protection on Construction Sites, etc.)
The Client’s representative on site shall be responsible for monitoring
and reporting the execution of the instructions. The Client shall confirm in
writing that the works were conducted in accordance with the
recommendations given in the above guidelines or practices appropriate
to the particular circumstances of the site.

BACKGROUND Construction activity can pose a major pollution threat to the environment
if discharges from construction sites are not properly handled. Such
discharges are subject to control under the Water Pollution Control
Ordinance [1]. The major types of discharges have been identified as
follows:
• muddy underground water and bentonite slurries from excavation
work and/or bore piling activities;
• run-off from site watering and wheel washing effluent as a result of
adopting dust control measures;
• domestic sewage generated from canteen and toilet facilities on site;
and
• contaminated surface run-off during wet weather.
Construction site wastewater contains mainly silt, sand and gravel.
Indiscriminate discharge of untreated or partially treated wastewater will
have a major impact on the receiving water bodies. Common pollution
threats include:
• siltation in drainage pipes which may lead to blockage and eventually
flooding risks;
• visual nuisance and hazard to the aquatic life e.g. fish gills blocked

1 Environmental Protection Department. A Guide to the Water Pollution Control Ordinance. May 2001.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/water/guide_ref/files/guide_wpc_wpco.pdf

Page 2-30
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 13 WATER POLLUTION DURING CONSTRUCTION

up causing suffocation to death; and

• increase in turbidity of the receiving water which may adversely
affect the ecosystem.
Prior to making a discharge, the responsible person for the discharge
should submit an application to EPD for a discharge license. Under the
Water Pollution Control Ordinance, it is an offence to discharge polluting
matter in a water control zone without a valid license, or to discharge
effluent in breach of the terms and conditions specified in the discharge
license granted by the Authority. The contractor has the responsibility to
ensure compliance with all legislative control requirements. Apart from
obtaining a valid discharge license before the commencement of any
discharge, the contractor must take all necessary steps to comply with
the terms and conditions of the license. This requires due consideration
be given at the planning stage of a construction project. Attention should
be paid to the wastewater characteristics, minimize the quantity of
pollution loads (both in terms of flow and concentration), plan and install
proper site drainage to intercept stormwater run-off from outside the side
and collect silt carrying site run-off to silt removal facilities; design and
construct appropriate wastewater treatment facilities, provide the
necessary training to the site personnel as well as constant on-site
supervision and monitoring of the environmental performance. All
wastewater treatment facilities should be well maintained to achieve the
desired performance.

Page 2-31
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING EQUIPMENT

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING EQUIPMENT

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage proactive design techniques intended to reduce the nuisance

caused to neighbours by noise from building services equipment.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Noise Control Ordinance and Subsidiary

Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that the level of the intruding noise at the
façade of the potential noise sensitive receivers is in compliance with the
criteria recommended in the Hong Kong Planning Standards and
Guidelines.

ASSESSMENT On the basis of promoting good environmental design assessment shall

assume that a noise sensitive development already exists or has the
potential to exist and be affected by the building. Ideally, therefore,
assessment should be made at the façade of the potential noise
sensitive receivers.
The noise assessments shall be conducted in accordance with the
Technical Memorandum [1]. This lays down statutory Acceptable Noise
Levels (ANL). However, in order to plan for a better environment, all fixed
noise sources should be so located and designed that when assessed in
accordance with the Technical Memorandum, the level of the intruding
noise at the facade of the nearest sensitive receiver should be at least 5
dB(A) below the appropriate ANL shown in Table 3 of the Technical
Memorandum or, in the case of the background being 5 dB(A) lower than
the ANL, should not be higher than the background, in accordance with
paragraph 4.2.13, Chapter 9 of the Hong Kong Planning and Standards
Guidelines [2].
The Client shall provide evidence in the form of detailed analysis,
appropriate calculations and/or measurements that the building complies
with the assessment criteria.

BACKGROUND Unwanted sound from equipment on and around buildings contributes to

noise pollution with potential impacts on neighbouring properties. Under
the Noise Control Ordinance noise emanating from certain types of
premises is controlled by means of Noise Abatement Notices which may
be served on owners or occupiers of offending premises if the noise
emitted:
• does not comply with the ANLs as set out in a technical
memorandum;
• is a source of annoyance to any person other than persons on the
premises; and
• does not comply with any standard or limit contained in any current
Regulations.
In practice the Authority will respond to complaints and compliance with

1 Environmental Protection Department. Technical Memorandum for the Assessment of Noise from Places Other than
Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/files/tm_nondomestic.pdf
2 Hong Kong Planning and Standards Guidelines, Chapter 9 Environment
http://www.info.gov.hk/planning/tech_doc/hkpsg/english/ch9/ch9_text.htm

Page 2-32
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 14 NOISE FROM BUILDING EQUIPMENT

the ANLs will be required only after a Noise Abatement Notice has been
served. Non-compliance with such a notice will be an offence. The
Technical Memorandum [1] contains the technical procedures that
should be adopted by the Authority when investigating a complaint
regarding noise emanating from such premises to determine whether or
not a noise abatement notice should be issued.
BS 4142 [3] suggests methods for noise prediction and a generalised
description of prediction is given in ISO 9613-2 [4]. Good practices on
building services system noise control is published by the Environmental
Protection Department [5,6].

3 British Standards Institution. Method for rating industrial noise affecting mixed residential and industrial areas. British Standard
BS 4142:1997. London, BSI, 1997.
4 International Standards Organisation. ISO 9613-2. Attenuation of Sound During Propagation Outdoors Part 2. General Method
st
of Calculation 1 Ed. 1996.
5 Environmental Protection Department. Good practices on pumping system noise control. 1999.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/pump_sys.html
6 Environmental Protection Department. Good practices on ventilation system noise control. 1999.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/environmentinhk/noise/guide_ref/vent_sys.html

Page 2-33
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION

2 SITE ASPECTS 2.3 EMISSIONS FROM THE SITE

SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that exterior lighting does not create unwanted and unnecessary
light pollution.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that obtrusive light from exterior lighting meets
the specified performance for the environmental zone in which the
building development is located.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence that the site and building lighting
installations comply with the criteria given in the reference publications
through submission of detailed measurements, calculations and/or
modelling studies carried out by a suitably qualified person.
Compliance is achieved when the designs are within the maximum figure
for each parameter (sky glow, light into windows, source intensity, and
building luminance), taken from Tables 2.1 to 2.6 in CIE 150 [1], Table 1
in CIBSE Factfile7 [2], or Table 1 in ILE Guidance Notes [3].

BACKGROUND Outdoor and public area lighting is necessary for illuminating public
connections between premises, buildings and facilities to ensure the
security and safety of users. Light pollution [4,5] may be regarded as
waste light from lighting schemes that produce glare, obscures the night
sky, adversely effects nocturnal ecosystems, and may intrude on
neighbouring properties. The brightness of advertising signs is also a
concern [6].The following table is taken from CIBSE Factfile 7 [2] :

Obtrusive light limitations for exterior lighting installations

Environmental Sky Glow Light into Windows Source Intensity I Building Luminance
Zone ULR (Max Ev (Lux) (1) (kcd) (2) Before curfew (3)
%)
2
Before After Before After Average L (cd/m )
curfew curfew
curfew curfew

E1 0 2 1(4) 2.5 0.5 (4) 0

E2 2.5 5 1 7.5 0.5 5

E3 5 10 2 10 1 10

E4 15 25 5 25 2.5 25

The definitions of the four zones are:

E1: Intrinsically dark areas National Parks, Areas of Outstanding Natural
Beauty, etc.
E2: Low district brightness areas Rural or small village locations.
E3: Medium district brightness areas Small town centres or urban

1 International Commission on Illumination. Guide on the limitation of the effects of obtrusive light from outdoor lighting
installations. Technical Report CIE 150:2003.
2 Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Environmental Considerations for Exterior Lighting. Factfile No.7,
2003. http://www.cibse.org/pdfs/fact72003.pdf
3 The Institution of Lighting Engineers. Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light .
http://www.britastro.org/dark-skies/pdfs/ile.pdf

Page 2-34
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS SITE ASPECTS (SA)
VERSION 1.1 SA 15 LIGHT POLLUTION

locations.
E4: High district brightness areas Town/city centres with high levels of
night-time activity.

ULR = Upward Light Ratio of the Installation and is the maximum

permitted percentage of
luminaire flux for the total installation that goes directly into the sky.
Ev = Vertical Illuminance in Lux normal to window glazing
I = Light Intensity in Kilo-Candelas
L = Luminance in Candelas per Square Metre
Notes:
(1) These values are suggested maximums for any window. So any new
lighting will have to produce less than this value if there is any existing
light trespass at a specific window.
(2) This is the intensity going beyond the area being lit from any single
source in the potentially obtrusive direction. The figures given are for
general guidance only and for some large sports lighting applications
with limited mounting heights, may be difficult to achieve.
(3) This should be limited to avoid over lighting, and relates to the
general district brightness. In this reference building luminance is
applicable to buildings directly illuminated as a night-time feature as
against the illumination of a building caused by spill light from adjacent
floodlights or floodlights fixed to the building but used to light an adjacent
area although this should be kept to a minimum.
(4) Acceptable from public road lighting and other safety lighting
installations only, zero for all other lighting types.

4 International Dark-sky Association. Information Resource Library. http://www.darksky.org/resources/library.html

5 International Commission on Illumination. Guidelines for Minimising Sky Glow. Technical Report CIE 126: 1997.
6 The Institution of Lighting Engineers. Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements. Technical Report No.5, 2001.

Page 2-35
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1

3 MATERIALS 3.P PREREQUISITE

ASPECTS 3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MATERIALS
3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS
3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

INTRODUCTION The amount and range of materials used in the construction, operation
and maintenance and fitting-out of buildings represents a significant use
of natural resources, in terms of extracted raw materials, emissions, and
embodied energy. There are opportunities to reduce environmental
impacts through improved design, choice of materials, and installation
methods. Of concern are:
• pollutants arising from manufacturing and transportation; and
• waste generated and recycled.
There are opportunities to reduce material use through modular designs
allowing off-site prefabrication, lean construction methods, etc. Improved
materials management and on-site sorting can achieve significant
reductions in waste generation and reduce construction costs.

3.P PREREQUISITE MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

MA P2 USE OF NON-CFC BASED REFRIGERANTS
MA P3 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
MA P4 WASTE RECYCLE FACILITIES

BACKGROUND This part is to set out the minimum requirement for materials aspects in
terms of non-virgin timber used for temporary works, use of non-CFC
based refrigerants, implementation of construction/demolition waste
management and provision of waste recycling facilities.

3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MA 1 BUILDING REUSE

MATERIALS MA 2 MODULAR AND STANDARDISED DESIGN
MA 3 PREFABRICATION
MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION

BACKGROUND Efficiency in the use of materials can be significantly improved through

reuse of building elements, such as foundations, main structures,
facades, etc. Flexibility in design allows for change in use and layout of
the premises within a building development. High standards of design
detailing permits off-site fabrication of major building components, allows
for deconstruction, and improves durability and longevity of buildings.

3.2 SELECTION OF MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS

MATERIALS MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST PRODUCTS
MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS
MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES
MA 9 REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED MATERIALS

BACKGROUND The selection of materials that can be planted and harvested within a
relatively short time, that are otherwise sustainable, have significant
recycled content, or otherwise have relatively low environmental impacts
should be considered at the earliest stages of planning and design of
building developments, and carried over to fit-out and subsequent
redecoration.

Page 3-1
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1

3.3 WASTE MA 10 DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION

MANAGEMENT MA 11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION

BACKGROUND Construction waste includes waste arising from such activities as

construction, renovation, demolition, land excavation and road works.
Ideally, the waste is separated and inert material is used as fill in
reclamation sites, when available. However, a significant portion of the
waste still goes to landfills. The continued growth in waste loads means
Hong Kong is running out of landfill spaces far earlier than expected, and
the existing landfills will be filled up, one by one, in early to mid 2010, if
waste levels continued to increase at current levels. Unless solutions are
identified immediately, we could face a crisis in the next decade of
having nowhere to put the thousands of tonnes of waste thrown away
every day.

Page 3-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.P PREREQUISITE

MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the well-managed use of timber.

REQUIREMENT Virgin forest products are not used for temporary works during
construction.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
demonstrating that no virgin forest products were used for temporary
works, unless exceptional circumstances required such use. The report
should highlight how contract documents and specifications precluded
such use in form work, hoardings, walkways, etc., together with evidence
such as site photos and records to demonstrate that no new timber or
timber products were used. Wood products from well-managed or
sustainable sources are acceptable for this credit requirement.
The Client’s representative on site shall be responsible for monitoring
and reporting on construction activities, and shall confirm in writing that
the works were conducted in accordance with the specifications and
contract documents, and that all details regarding the use of timber
contained in the report are correct.
The Assessor may carry out site inspections during construction.
Where it can be demonstrated that all practical steps have been taken to
avoid the use of virgin forest products the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Timber is the most ecologically benign of construction materials.

However, there are hardwoods which are being extracted from virgin
forests in an unsustainable manner, destroying valuable forests and
ecosystems. Similarly, some softwoods, such as redwood and cedar are
being depleted. Where forests are being harvested in an unsustainable
manner, the result is the extinction of indigenous species and the
clearance of vegetation that would otherwise help regulate the amount of
CO2 in the atmosphere. Improved forestry practices can be encouraged
by seeking timber from sources where the forests are well managed.
Hong Kong uses only imported timber, and is one of the largest
importers of tropical hardwoods. The construction sector in Hong Kong is
a major consumer of hardwoods from tropical rainforests, with a large
proportion used wastefully, and ending up at landfill sites. Timber should
originate only from well-managed sources and should be reused
whenever possible. Guidelines, templates and implementation measures
to help organisations develop purchasing policies and practices that help
conserve forest resources are available [ 1 , 2 ]. PNAP 153 [ 3 ] gives
guidance for alternatives to the use of hardwoods in order to reduce the
amount of tropical hardwood timber used in the building projects.
A Works Bureau Technical Circular (WBTC) [4] establishes the revised
policy requiring the use of metallic site hoardings and signboards, in
order to reduce the amount of timber used on construction sites. This
Circular supersedes WBTC 19/99 and shall be read in conjunction with

1 Certified Forest Products Council. Project Toolkit. Succeeding with Certified Wood.
http://www.certifiedwood.org/documents/Certified_Wood_Project_Kit_C.PDF
2 World Wildlife Fund. http://www.ecowoodasia.org/en/pdf/GFTN%20RPG%20Feb04.pdf
3 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers PNAP 153, Tropical
Hardwood Timber. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/pnap/Pnap153.pdf
4 Works Bureau. Technical Circular No. 19/2001. Metallic Site Hoardings and Signboards.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/1992/wb3292.doc

Page 3-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P1 TIMBER USED FOR TEMPORARY WORKS

WBTC 32/92 [ 5 ], the purpose of which is to reduce the amount of

hardwood timber used on construction sites.
Certified Wood may be defined a wood-based materials originally
sourced from forestlands participating in an acceptable system or
program which certifies sustainable forest management. Acceptable
systems or programs must include adherence to management practices
which conserve biological diversity and maintain productive capacity of
forest ecosystems, and be independently audited and monitored.

5 Works Bureau. Technical Circular No. 32/92. The Use of Tropical Hardwood on Construction Sites.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/2001/wb1901.doc

Page 3-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P2 USE OF NON-CFC BASED REFRIGERANTS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.P PREREQUISITE

MA P2 USE OF NON-CFC BASED REFRIGERANTS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the release of chlorofluorocarbon into the atmosphere.

Using no chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants in HVAC&R
REQUIREMENT
systems.
ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report by a suitably qualified person giving
details of the HVAC&R system installed and demonstrating no
chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants used in HVAC&R
systems.

BACKGROUND Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) are the major contributory substances of

the serious ozone depletion. The reaction between a CFC and an
ozone molecule in the earth’s stratosphere contributes a catalytic
destruction of ozone. Due to ozone depletion, increased UV exposure
leads to increase in skin cancer (e.g. Malignant Melanoma and Cortical
Cataracts), damage to plants, and reduction of plankton population in
the ocean’s photic zone.
In 1985, the Antarctic ozone hole was discovered, causing worldwide
concern. In 1987, representatives from 43 nations signed the Montreal
Protocol to limit CFC usage. At Montreal, the participants agreed to
freeze production and phase-out use of CFCs. Since the adoption and
strengthening of the Montreal Protocol has led to reductions in the
usage and emissions of CFCs.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has developed and
implemented regulations for management of ozone depletion
substances (ODSs) in the United States. The regulations include
programs that ended the production of ODSs and require the
manufacturers to label products either containing or made with
chemicals that have significant ODSs.
In Hong Kong, Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance (Cap. 403) 1989
gives effect to Hong Kong’s international obligations to control the
manufacture, import and export of ozone depleting substances [ 1 ].
Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation 1994
requires the conservation of controlled refrigerants used in large scale
installations and motor vehicles [2]. Ozone Layer Protection (Products
Containing Scheduled Substances) (Import Banning) Regulation 1993
prohibits the import of portable fire extinguishers containing halons and
other controlled products from a country or place not a party to the
Montreal Protocol unless the Authority considers that it complies with
the requirements of the Protocol.
Banning the usage of CFCs in refrigerants slow the ozone depletion
and global climate change. Non-CFC building equipment has standard
specification. New non-CFC HVAC&R equipment is cost and energy
effective. Selecting non-CFC HVAC&R equipment may increase
energy saving and equipment efficiencies.

1 Environmental Protection Department. A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_guides/files/cgto_olpo_eng.pdf
2 Environmental Protection Department. A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants)
Regulation. http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_guides/files/cgt_olp_cr_eng.pdf

Page 3-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P3 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.P PREREQUISITE

MA P3 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

EXCLUSIONS It is not necessary to submit the Demolition Waste Management Plan

where demolition is not required or is not under the Client’s control.

OBJECTIVE Encourage best practices in the management of construction and

demolition wastes, including sorting, recycling and disposal of
construction waste.

REQUIREMENT Implementation with proof of documentation of a waste management

system that provides for the sorting, recycling and proper disposal of
construction/demolition materials.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall present evidence in the form a report by a suitably
qualified person that the carrying out of the construction/demolition works
complied with all the requirements specified.
a) Waste Management
The Client shall submit tender documents, contract conditions and
specifications to demonstrate that the contractor was required and able
to prepare and implement a waste management system essentially in
accordance with the guidelines provided in Environment, Transport and
Works Bureau (ETWB) Technical Circular 19/2005 [1].
It shall be demonstrated that the waste management system covered the
items listed in the Buildings Department’s PNAP 243 [ 2 ] and that all
materials arising from or in connection with the works were separated
into inert and non-inert materials, and disposed of in accordance with the
WBTC No. 21/2002 [3], as they apply to the nature of the development
work.
b) Sorting and recycling of waste
The following shall guide the assessment:
• how metals, including reinforcement bars, mechanical and
electrical fittings, other building services fittings/materials are
recovered for collection by recycling contractors; and
• how waste from construction/demolition works is sorted to
recover broken concrete and other inert non-metallic materials.
It shall be demonstrated through appropriate record keeping that sorting
for the items of construction waste items specified in WTBC TWC
15.2003 has been carried out.

BACKGROUND To ensure public safety, the control of demolition works has been
strengthened with the enactment of the Buildings (Amendment)
Ordinance 1996, Building (Administration) (Amendment) (No.4)
Regulation 1997 and Building (Demolition Works) (Amendment)
Regulation 1997, which impose new requirements for:
• application for approval of plans for demolition works;
• application for consent to commence the works;
• site safety supervision;

1 Environment, Transport and Works Bureau Technical Circular (Works) No. 19/2005, Environmental Management on
Construction Sites. http://www.devb-wb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/C-2005-19-0-1.pdf
2 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers 243. Construction and
Demolition Waste. June 2000. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/pnap/Pnap243.pdf
3 Works Bureau Technical Circular 21/2002. Trip-ticket System for Disposal of Construction and Demolition Material. June
2002. http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/2002/wb2102.doc

Page 3-6
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P3 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

• appointment of Technically Competent Person to supervise

demolition works and operator of powered mechanical plant or
equipment; and
• certification of completion of works.
PNAP 71 [ 4 ] sets out the procedures to be followed by Authorized
Persons (AP) and Registered Structural Engineers (RSE) in meeting
these requirements. Some points for practical application are also
clarified.

Chemical wastes are liquid, semi-solid and solid wastes which are
hazardous in nature or constitute a risk of pollution to the environment.
Chemical waste is defined by reference to a list of chemicals which forms
Schedule 1 of the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General)
Regulation. The Regulation provides for the definition of chemical waste,
the registration of persons producing chemical waste and the control of
the possession, storage, collection, transport and disposal of chemical
waste.
In 2006, the Government introduced the construction waste disposal
charging scheme and the quantity of construction waste disposed of at
landfills decreased from 6,560 tonnes per day in 2005 to 2,910 tonnes
per day in 2007. This figure fluctuates depending on the economics
situation and the number of construction projects underway.
In May 2003 ETWB issued technical circular No.15/2003 requiring
contractor to prepare and implement the Waste Management Plan
(WMP) for all capital works projects tendered on or after 1 July 2003.
Dedicated payment is allocated under the contract for preparation and
implementation. This sets out the procedures for preparation and
implementation of an enhanced WMP to encourage on-site sorting of
Construction and Demolition (C&D) materials and to minimize their
generation during the course of construction. The requirements apply to
capital works contracts, including electrical and mechanical (E&M)
contracts and Design and Build (D&B) contracts but excluding term
contracts. C&D material means both inert and non-inert C&D materials.
Inert construction waste means waste that does not undergo any
significant physical, chemical or biological transformations. It will not
dissolve burn or otherwise physically or chemically react, biodegrade or
adversely affect other matter with which it comes into contact in a way
likely to give rise to environmental pollution or harm human health. The
total leachability and pollutant content of the waste and the ecotoxicity of
the leachate must be insignificant, and in particular not endanger the
quality of surface water and/or groundwater. Soil, sand/aggregates,
bricks, concrete, cement and plaster are regarded as inert, whereas
general debris, plastics, paper, Styrofoam, timber, etc., are not.
On-site sorting of surplus construction and demolition (C&D) material is
desirable so that inert material can be disposed of at public filling areas,
and the remainder at landfills. Dumping Licenses require that material to
be disposed of at public filling areas must comprise only earth, building
debris, broken rock and concrete. Such materials shall be free from
marine mud, household refuse, plastic, metal, industrial and chemical
waste, animal and vegetable matter etc. The materials considered
unsuitable for disposal at public filling areas should go to a landfill.

4 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-21 Demolition Works Measures for Public Safety.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP021.pdf

Page 3-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA P4 WASTE RECYCLING FACILITIES

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.P PREREQUISITE

MA P4 WASTE RECYCLING FACILITIES

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce pressure on landfill sites and help to preserve non-renewable

resources by promoting recycling of waster materials.

REQUIREMENT Provision of facilities for the collection, sorting, storage and disposal of
waste and recovered materials.

ASSESSMENT The assessment seeks to establish the extent to which facilities are
provided to allow for the recycling of waste. The means to facilitate waste
recycling is not prescribed as much depends on the design and type of
building, and the activities carried out within.
The Client shall submit details of expected waste steams and estimated
quantities for the building (organic, recyclable and non-recyclable), and
demonstrate the adequacy of the waste storage, sorting and recycling
facilities, appropriate to the type and size of the development, that will
encourage and facilitate waste recycling. Separate storage of recycled
materials such as metal, plastics, paper, cardboard and glass bottles
should be provided.
The assessment shall take into account how a system of waste
collection, storage sorting, recycling and disposal can be managed for
the buildings, with consideration given to the adequacy of space
provisions on individual floors, within the building as a whole, and at
local/estate level. Opportunity should exist to manage different waste
types, such as organic, non-recyclable and recyclable waste. There
should be easy access to facilities for cleaning staff/contractors and/or
building users, and for waste recycling and collection companies. The
storage area shall be adequately sized to allow for recycling of, as a
minimum, paper, glass, plastics, metals and organic materials.
The BEAM Assessor may scrutinize designs and specifications for the
waste management facilities and may carry out inspections to check
compliance.

BACKGROUND Well managed facilities for the recycling of solid waste encourage
recycling and results in reductions in the disposal at landfill sites.
Buildings should be designed with the provision of facilities for waste
separation and sorting, and short term storage at appropriate locations.
PNAP 98 [1] provides details of the basic refuse storage and recovery
chambers expected in new buildings.
As an indication the space requirements for offices and similar buildings
are 2 m2 per 1,000 m2 of floor area.
Reference should be made to Section 6 with regard to the hygiene
aspects of waste disposal.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineer. PNAP No. APP-35 Refuse Storage and Collection Building (Refuse Storage and Material
Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP035.pdf

Page 3-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 1 BUILDING REUSE

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MATERIALS

MA 1 BUILDING REUSE

EXCLUSIONS Buildings on reclaimed land or Greenfield sites.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the reuse of major elements of existing buildings, to reduce

demolition waste, conserve resources and reduce environmental impacts
during construction.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES The reuse of major elements from existing building structure or shell
shall comply with Building (Construction) Regulations Chapter 123B
Regulation 90 Fire resisting construction and other relevant Building
regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for the reuse of 30% or more of existing sub-structure or shell.
2 credits for the reuse of 60% or more of existing sub-structure or shell.
1 additional BONUS credit for use of 90% or more of existing sub-
structure or shell.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
outlining the extent to which major building elements from an existing
building were used in the building. The report shall include pre-
construction and post-construction details highlighting and quantifying
the reused elements, be it foundations, structural elements or facades,
but windows, doors and similar assemblies may be excluded.
The percentage of building elements shall be calculated as the amount
(volume or weight) of building elements reused as a percentage of the
total amount (volume or weight) of that building elements in the new
development.
When it can be demonstrated that the target percentage of original
building elements are reused the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND With greater flexibility in planning approvals opportunities exist to

rehabilitate existing buildings. The rehabilitation of old industrial buildings
is as an example of successful commercial redevelopment in many cities
around the world. There is a potential to lower building costs and provide
a mix of desirable building characteristics. However, the reuse of existing
structural elements depends on many factors, not least fire safety,
energy efficiency, and regulatory requirements, all of which need to be
critically reviewed to determine the advantages and feasibility of reuse as
opposed to demolition.

Page 3-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 2 MODULAR AND STANDARDISED DESIGN

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MATERIALS

MA 2 MODULAR AND STANDARDISED DESIGN

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage increased use of modular and standardised components in

building design in order to enhance buildability and reduce waste.

PREREQUISITES Full compliance with the Building (Construction) Regulations.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating the application of modular and standardised
design.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report that includes detailed drawings and
specifications that demonstrates and highlights the extent of application
of modular design of building systems and components. Where it can be
demonstrated that the building development incorporates modular and
standardised layouts and components for over 50% of the major
elements and modules the credit shall be awarded.
For the purposes of assessment the extent of modular and standardised
design shall make reference to the check-list provided herein. Additional
or alternative examples may be submitted at the discretion of the Client.

CHECK-LIST Structural elements Structural beams system

Concrete slab

Concrete flooring

Façade elements External wall

Bay-window unit

Cladding unit

Utility platform

Architectural/Internal building Internal partition/wall panels

elements

Door sets

Staircases

Building services elements Fire services

Sanitary fittings

Luminaires

Air-Conditioning components

BACKGROUND This refers to use of standardised grid systems of design allowing

standard size factory built and assembled components to be used.
Standardisation of details goes hand in hand with optimisation of material
quantity. It also generally has benefits for both quality and environmental
cost. It simplifies the design and site operations. Building components
produced in standard ranges of sizes can also be interchanged.
Materials should be dimensioned carefully to use standard-sized

Page 3-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 2 MODULAR AND STANDARDISED DESIGN

modules to the greatest extent to minimise construction off-cutting waste.

International standards [1,2] recommend that modular components shall
be designed to have size of a multiple or subdivision of the basic module
of 100mm. BS 6750 [3] provides background on the requirements for
modular coordination.
Environment, Transport, and Works Bureau publishes a one-stop service
to help you access and locate those standardised components and
modular components that have been successfully used in construction,
and find out the standardised practices, including standard designs,
construction methods, and techniques adopted in the construction
industry [ 4 ]. This contains a standardisation database of hyperlinks
which promotes the wider use of standardised and modular components
in local construction, with the public sector taking the lead.

1 International Standard Organization. ISO 1006 Building construction – Modular coordination – Basic module. 1983.
2 International Standard Organization. ISO 2848 Building Construction – Modular coordination – Principles and rules. 1984.
3 British Standards Institution. British Standard BS 6750. Specification for Modular coordination in building. 1986.
4 Environment, Transport, and Works Bureau. Standardised Components and Practices.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/press_releases_and_publications/publications/standardised/index.aspx?langno=1&nodeid=1232

Page 3-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 3 PREFABRICATION

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MATERIALS

MA 3 PREFABRICATION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage prefabrication building elements in order to reduce wastage

of materials and quantities of on-site waste.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITE None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit when the manufacture of 20% of listed prefabricated building
elements has been off-site.
2 credits where the manufacture of 40% of listed prefabricated building
elements has been off-site.

ASSESSMENT The listed building elements (pre-cast concrete) includes:

• facades;
• staircases;
• slabs;
• balcony/utility platform;
• parapet;
• partition walls;
• bridge-decks; and
• footbridges.
Additional or alternative elements may be included, which the Client
believes to demonstrate a significant contribution to the assessment
criteria. However, the curtain wall/windows shall be excluded from the
assessment.
In order to avoid long-distant transportation, the manufacturing factory
shall be located within 800 km from the site. The Client shall
demonstrate through the submission of contract specifications, drawings
and other supporting documents the quantities (by weight or volume) of
those building elements fabricated off-site in accordance with the Code
of Practice for Pre-cast Construction 2003. The assessment shall take
into account the number and quantities of building elements in the
building development that can be fabricated off-site and award credits
where the assessment criteria have been met.

BACKGROUND Prefabrication is the manufacture of sections of a building at the factory

so they can be easily and rapidly assembled at the building site,
improving the buildability of the building. Since the factory fabrication of
building elements are produced under controlled conditions, it allows for
more efficient disposal of debris and waste. Noise, dust, site traffic and
other environmental nuisances can also be reduced. Interior millwork
and custom metalwork should be detailed to be shop-finished and
installed to the highest degree to limit the need for on-site painting and
finishing work.
The Hong Kong construction industry is under continual stringent
pressure to raise productivity, reduce costs and improve the quality
levels of constructed facilities. All these requirements are the key drivers

Page 3-12
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 3 PREFABRICATION

for change in the industry [1]. A new research agenda has therefore
been embarked by the Construction Industry Institute, Hong Kong (CII-
HK) to explore the existing state of implementation of prefabrication and
preassembly, and how they could be successfully applied to construction
services. This paper provides a succinct review of the application of
prefabrication and preassembly in the local public housing construction
industry, followed by the significant ingredients of the captioned research
agenda. A wider use of prefabrication would help overcome many of the
hurdles inherent in traditional in-situ construction, and engender more
technically feasible and cost-effective installations.
Prefabricated components are widely used in the construction of public
housing blocks [ 2 ] for better workmanship and quality control and to
maximise construction efficiency. Please click on the links below to view
the application of prefabrication in a New Harmony 1 block, the latest
standard block of today's public rental housing. The Code of Practice [3]
provides guidance on the design, construction and quality control of
precast structural and non-structural elements.

1 Yeung N S Y, Chan A P C, Chan D W M. Application of Prefabrication in Construction – A New Research Agenda for
Reform by CII-HK. http://www.ciihk.org.hk/sheet/26112002_apc.pdf
2 Housing Department. Prefabrication in Housing Blocks.
http://www.housingauthority.gov.hk/en/businesspartners/prefabrication/0%2C%2C%2C00.html
3 Buildings Department. Code of Practice for Pre-cast Concrete Construction.
http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/code/cppcc2003.pdf

Page 3-13
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.1 EFFICIENT USE OF MATERIALS

MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the design of building interior elements and building services
components that allow modifications to space layout, and to reduce
waste during churning, refurbishment and deconstruction.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Spatial adaptability

1 credit for designs providing spatial flexibility that can adapt spaces for
different uses, and allows for expansion to permit additional spatial
requirements to be accommodated.
b) Flexible engineering services
1 credit for flexible design of services that can adapt to changes of layout
and use.
c) Structural adaptability
1 credit for designs providing flexibility through the choice of building
structural system that allows for change in future use, and which is
coordinated with interior planning modules.
ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
presenting evidence as to how and the extent to which building
adaptability and deconstruction is provided. The report shall include
drawings and documents including building plans and detail
specifications together with elaboration and justification of specific design
strategies that provide for the intended outcome.
Assessment shall be guided by the check-lists included herein. Additions
to list may be proposed at the discretion of the Client.
Where it can be demonstrated that applicable good practices in respect
of structural and/or spatial flexibility, and/or flexibility in servicing have
been adopted whenever feasible and at least 50% for residential
development and 70% for other building types of the listed items in the
relevant BEAM checklists could be achieved, the credit(s) shall be
awarded.

SPATIAL ADAPTABILITY ASTM provides guidance for various types of buildings and uses [e.g.1,
CHECK-LIST 2,3].
• use of adaptable floor plans, including large grids that can be
subdivided, etc.
• spaces designed for a loose fit rather than tight fit;
• inclusion of multifunctional spaces;
• design that allows interior fitting-out to use modular and pre-
fabricated components;
• spaces designed such that minimum disruption will be caused to

1 ASTM International. Designation E1692-95a Standard Classification for Serviceability of an Office for Change and Churn
by Occupants.
2 ASTM International. Designation E1679-95 Standard Practice for Setting the Requirements for the Serviceability of a
Building or Building-Related Facility
3 ASTM International. Designation E1334-95 Standard Practice for Rating the Serviceability of a Building or Building-
Related Facility

Page 3-14
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION

occupants due to physical change;

• easy relocation of partition walls that causes minimum damage to
flooring or ceiling systems;
• partition walls are fully salvageable;
• separating long-lived components from short-lived components to
reduce the complexity of deconstruction and churning so as to
facilitate the collection process for recycling; and
• use of interior partitions that are demountable, reusable and
recyclable, etc.

FLEXIBLE ENGINEERING • design that allows interior fitting-out to use modular and pre-
SERVICES CHECKLIST fabricated components;
• using hybrid HVAC systems, with a balance between centralised
components and distributed components;
• luminaires are easily relocated within ceiling grid or uplighters are
used;
• air diffusers on flexible ducts can be relocated at minimum cost
with minimum disruption to occupants;
• exhaust air ducts for special exhausts are easy to install, and
space and capacity are available in ceiling and duct shafts;
• sprinkler heads are easily relocated within ceiling grid;
• pre-wired horizontal distribution systems in ceilings or floors, with
spare capacity and easy access to accommodate change of
workplace layouts; and
• reducing the use of embedded infrastructure for power, data and
HVAC systems, etc.

STRUCTURAL Reference may be made to various publications [e.g. 4 ]. Key points

ADAPTABILITY CHECK- include:
LIST
• foundations allow for potential vertical expansion of the building;
• installation of isolation joints or other features avoid the potential
for differential settlements and for progressive collapse due to
accidental loading;
• reliance on a central core for lateral load resistance that allows for
local modifications to the structure while maintaining complete
structural integrity;
• wide structural grids;
• lower floors allow for heavier live load;
• sufficient height to lower floors to enable a range of uses;
• building envelope is independent of the structure (i.e., functionally
discrete systems, with the interfaces designed for separation);
• versatile envelope capable of accommodating changes to the
interior space plan;
• means for access to the exterior wall system from inside the
building and from outside;
• structural floor system that accommodates a number of
mechanical and electrical service distribution schemes based on

4 Assessing the Adaptability of Buildings. International Energy Agency. Annex 31. Energy-Related Environmental Impact of
Buildings. November 2001.
http://annex31.wiwi.uni-karlsruhe.de/Annex%2031%20Assessing%20the%20Adaptability%20of%20Buildings.doc

Page 3-15
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 4 ADAPTABILITY AND DECONSTRUCTION

different occupancies; and

• provision of more than the minimum spatial areas and floor
heights, etc.

BACKGROUND Change of ownership, changing use of premises, changing demography

of family units, future growth and expansion etc., require modifications to
the layout of most types of premises. Large amounts of solid waste can
be generated during the remodelling of premises, such as demolition of
walls and partitions. Designs that allow users flexibility in the layout of
premises and designs that allow for dismantling during deconstruction
can significantly reduce consumption of resources and generation of
waste.
Adaptability refers to the capacity of buildings to accommodate
substantial changes. The concept of adaptability can be broken down
into a number of simple strategies that are familiar to most designers:
• flexibility, or enabling minor shifts in space planning;
• convertibility, or allowing for changes in use within the building;
and
• facilitating additions to the quantity of space in a building.
Designs for adaptability can also increase the longevity of buildings,
improve operating performance, and allow more efficient use of space
yielding economic benefits. The key design principles include
independence of systems within a building, upgradeability of systems
and components, and lifetime compatibility of building components.
Examples include:
• foundations that allow for potential vertical expansion of the
building;
• superstructures that rely on a central core for lateral load
resistance to allows local modifications to the structure without
affecting the building’s structural integrity;
• reducing the use of embedded infrastructure for power, data and
HVAC systems;
• the use of building systems that isolate structural and building
enclosure systems used for housing building services
components;
• the provision of lightweight partitions that can be moved to change
layout;
• design that allows interior fitting-out to use modular and pre-
fabricated components; and
• separating long-lived components from short-lived components to
reduce the complexity of deconstruction and churning so as to
facilitate the collection process for recycling; etc.
Deconstruction is the process of selectively and systematically
disassembling buildings that would otherwise be demolished to generate
a supply of materials suitable for reuse in the construction or
rehabilitation of other structures. Designing for deconstruction facilitates
the salvage of recyclable materials during disassembly. The benefits
include the reduction of pollution impacts, saving landfill space, and
increase in resource and economic efficiency.

Page 3-16
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS

MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the wider use of rapidly renewable materials in appropriate

applications.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building (Construction) Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating 2.5% of all building materials/products used in
the project is rapidly renewable materials.
2 credits where 5% of all building materials/products used in the project
is rapidly renewable materials.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
listing applications where rapidly renewable materials have been
employed, and quantifying the amount of materials employed, as a
percentage of all building materials. The unit shall be mass/volume/dollar
value but shall be consistent throughout the assessment of this credit.
The report shall include supporting documentation from suppliers listing
the rapidly renewable materials and quantities contained in the products
used.
Provide calculations demonstrating that target percentage of all building
materials/products used is rapidly renewable the credit(s) shall be
awarded.
For the purposes of assessment reference shall be made to the check-
list given below.

CHECK-LIST No material specified shall present a fire hazard when installed.

FLOORING
Bamboo
Natural Linoleum
Cork
Other rapidly renewable materials
PANELS/PARTITIONS
Sunflower Seed
Bamboo
Wheatboard
Other rapidly renewable materials
CABINETRY/FITTINGS
Wheatboard
Strawboard
Soy bean composite
Bamboo
Other rapidly renewable materials
INSULATION
Cotton
Strawbale
Soy-based foam
Other rapidly renewable materials
OTHER APPLICATIONS (MATERIAL)

Page 3-17
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 5 RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIALS

BACKGROUND Most building materials necessitate the consumption of large amounts of

natural resources. Rapidly renewable materials are materials that
substantially themselves faster than traditional extraction demand (i.e.,
planted and harvested in less than a 10 year cycle) and do not result in
significant biodiversity loss, increased erosion, or air quality impacts.
Rapidly renewable materials include, but are not limited to, bamboo,
linoleum, cork, fast-growing poplar, pine and products such as wheat
straw cabinetry. Materials such a bamboo, wool, natural linoleum, etc.
require fewer inputs, have reduced environmental impacts, and can
provide economic benefits.
Designers should establish objectives for the use of rapidly renewable
materials and identify where such materials can be applied as substitutes
for more commonly used resource intensive materials. The use of
materials such as bamboo flooring, strawboard, cotton insulation, natural
linoleum flooring, etc. should be considered as a minimum.

Page 3-18
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST PRODUCTS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS

MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST PRODUCTS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the use of timber from well-managed forests.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating at least 50% of all timber and composite
timber products used in the project are from sustainable
source/recycled timber.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified

person qualifying the amount of forest product used that are from
sustainable source/recycled timber, as a percentage of all timber
product used. The unit shall be mass/volume/dollar value but shall be
consistent throughout the assessment of this credit.
The timber should conform to the requirement of sustainable forestry
practice guidelines and accredited by recognised organisations, such
as the non-profit Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) [ 1 ] or the
American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) [2]. The Client shall
also demonstrate the compliance with the specification for the
recommended sustainable source (e.g. FSC or AFPA)

BACKGROUND Timber is the most ecologically benign construction materials.

However, there are hardwoods which are being extracted from virgin
forests in an unsustainable manner, destroying valuable forests and
ecosystems. Similarly, some softwoods, such as redwood and cedar
are being depleted. Where forests are being harvested in an
unsustainable manner, the result is the extinction of indigenous
species and the clearance of vegetation that would otherwise help
regulate the amount of CO2 in the atmosphere. Improved forestry
practices can be encouraged by seeking timber from sources where
the forests are well managed.
Hong Kong uses only imported timber, and is one of the largest
importers of tropical hardwoods. The construction sector in Hong Kong
is a major consumer of hardwoods from tropical rainforests, with a
large proportion used wastefully, and ending up at landfill sites. Timber
should originate only from well-managed sources and should be
reused whenever possible. Guidelines, templates and implementation
measures to help organisations develop purchasing policies and
practices that help conserve forest resources are available [ 3 , 4 ].
PNAP No. ADV-5 [ 5 ] gives guidance for alternatives to the use of
hardwoods in order to reduce the amount of tropical hardwood timber
used in the building projects.

1 Forest Stewardship Council. http://www.fsc.org/

2 American Forest and Paper Association. http;//www.afandpa.org/
3 Certified Forest Products Council. Project Toolkit. Succeeding with Certified Wood.
http://www.certifiedwood.org/documents/Certified_Wood_Project_Kit_C.PDF
4 World Wildlife Fund. http://www.ecowoodasia.org/en/pdf/GFTN%20RPG%20Feb04.pdf
5 Buildings Department, Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers PNAP No. ADV-5 153, Tropical Hardwood Timber.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV005.pdf

Page 3-19
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 6 SUSTAINABLE FOREST PRODUCTS

A Works Bureau Technical Circular (WBTC) [ 6 ] establishes the

revised policy requiring the use of metallic site hoardings and
signboards, in order to reduce the amount of timber used on
construction sites. This Circular supersedes WBTC 19/99 and shall be
read in conjunction with WBTC 32/92 [7], the purpose of which is to
reduce the amount of hardwood timber used on construction sites.
Certified Wood may be defined a wood-based materials originally
sourced from forestlands participating in an acceptable system or
program which certifies sustainable forest management. Acceptable
systems or programs must include adherence to management
practices which conserve biological diversity and maintain productive
capacity of forest ecosystems, and be independently audited and
monitored.

Forest Stewardship Council [1] is an independent, non-profit

organisation established to promote the responsible management of
the world’s forest. FSC is a certification system that provides
internationally recognised standard-setting, trademark assurance and
accreditation services to companies, organisations, and communities
interested in responsible forestry.
American Forest and Paper Association [2] believe that competition
among forest certification systems drives continuous improvement in
the systems and reduce costs for users. It supports forest certification
as a means of assuring that wood used in products comes from
sustainably managed forest and that economic, environmental, and
social performance factors haven been considered.

6 Works Bureau. Technical Circular No. 19/2001. Metallic Site Hoardings and Signboards.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/1992/wb3292.doc
7 Works Bureau. Technical Circular No. 32/92. The Use of Tropical Hardwood on Construction Sites.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/2001/wb1901.doc

Page 3-20
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS

MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Promote use of recycled materials in order to reduce the consumption of

virgin resources.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building (Construction) Regulations, Chapter 123B

Regulation 3.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Outside surface works and structures

1 credit for use of recycled materials contributing to at least 10% of all
materials used in site exterior surfacing work, structures and features.
b) Building structure
1 credit where at least 10% of all building materials used for facade and
structural components are recycled materials.
c) Interior Components
1 credit where at least 10% of all building materials used for interior non-
structural components are recycled materials.
ASSESSMENT a) Surface work and structures
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the recycled materials used (minerals, plastics, etc), their
quantities as compared to all materials used in exterior surfacing works
and structures (structures and features, which include paths, surfaces for
recreational areas, structures such as seating, playground features, etc),
and technical and/or economic reasons for not using elements made
from recycled materials. The unit shall be mass/volume/dollar value but
shall be consistent throughout the assessment of this credit. Credit will
be awarded where at least 10% of all materials used in site exterior
surfacing work, structures and features are recycled materials.
b) Building structure
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the recycled materials used and their quantities as compared to
all materials used for facade and structural components. The unit shall
be mass/volume/dollar value but shall be consistent throughout the
assessment of this credit. Where the target percentage of all building
materials used for the purpose uses in the requirements is recycled
materials the credit(s) shall be awarded.
c) Interior Components
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the recycled materials used and their quantities as compared to
all materials used for interior non-structural components. The unit shall
be mass/volume/dollar value but shall be consistent throughout the
assessment of this credit. Where the target percentage of all building
materials used for the purpose uses in the requirements is recycled
materials the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Waste materials and industrial by-products can be used in building

construction in an unprocessed form, e.g. as fill material, or processed to
a limited degree for use as aggregates in concrete, or used as raw
material for manufacturing building products. This reduces the extraction
of virgin materials. The basic properties required for technical

Page 3-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 7 RECYCLED MATERIALS

acceptance are that they can perform their intended functions throughout
the design life without being deleterious on the environment or
associated constructional features.
There are many opportunities for using recycled materials in structural
and non-structural elements of a building and the surrounding site works.
For large sections, high strengths, where shrinkage and cracking are
critical, where resistance to sulphate attack is required, and where
surface finish is particularly important, PFA concrete should be specified.
Crushed concrete aggregate complying with the quality and grading
requirements of British Standard BS 882 [1] or similar for use in concrete
for foundations. The fills in foundations and for over-site use of recycled
materials should comply with the requirements of BS 6543 [2] or similar
specification.
A list of Recycled Construction Products is available from the
Environmental Protection Department [ 3 ]. Works Branch Technical
Circular 14/90 [4] and 2/97 [5] discusses the quantities of PFA that can
be used. PNAP No. APP-33 [6] sets out the conditions in which the use
of PFA as a partial cement replacement in concrete is permitted. PNAP
No. APP-129 [ 7 ] sets out the technical guidelines for using recycled
aggregates in prescribed mix concrete of specified grade strength of 20P
and designed mix concrete of specified grade strengths of 25D to 35D.

1 British Standards Institution. Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete. British Standard BS 882:1992.
2 British Standards Institution. Guide to use of industrial by-products and waste materials in building and civil engineering.
British Standard BS 6543: 1985.
3 Environmental Protection Department. http://sc.info.gov.hk/gb/www.epd.gov.hk/epd/misc/cdm/en_products_list.html
4 Works Branch Technical Circular No. 14/90. The Use of PFA in Structural Concrete.
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/90/wb1490.doc, http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/90/wb14901.doc
5 Works Branch Technical Circular No. 2/97. The Use of PFA in Concrete Pile Caps and Substructures
http://www.etwb.gov.hk/UtilManager/tc/97/wb0297.doc
6 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineer, PNAP No. APP-33 Pulverized Fuel Ash in Concrete.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/signed/APP033se.pdf
7 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineer, PNAP No. APP-129 Use of Recycled Aggregates in Concrete.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/signed/APP129se.pdf

Page 3-22
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS

MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the release of chlorofluorocarbons and hydrochlorofluorocarbons

into the atmosphere.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance Chapter 403

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Refrigerants

1 credit for using refrigerants with a value less than or equal to the
threshold of the combined contribution to ozone depletion and global
warming potentials using the specified equation.
b) Ozone depleting materials
1 credit for the use of products in the building fabric and services that
avoids the use of ozone depleting substances in their manufacture,
composition or use.
ASSESSMENT a) Refrigerants
The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipments shall fulfill the following
equation, which determines a maximum threshold for the combined
contributions to ozone depletion and global warming potentials:

LCGWP + LCODP × 105 ≤ 775

LCGWP = [GWPr × (Lr ×Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life

LCODP = [ODPr × (Lr ×Life + Mr) × Rc] / Life
LCGWP = Lifecycle Global Warming Potential (kg CO2 /kw -Yr)
LCODP = Lifecycle Ozone Depletion Potential (kg CFC 11/kw-Yr)
GWPr = Global Warming Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 12,000 kg CO2
/kg r )
ODPr = Ozone Depletion Potential of Refrigerant (0 to 0.2 kg CFC 11
/kg r )
Lr = Refrigerant Leakage Rate (0.5% to 2.0%; default of 2% unless
otherwise demonstrated)
Mr = End-of-life Refrigerant Loss (2% to 10%; default of 10% unless
otherwise demonstrated)
Rc = Refrigerant Charge (0.2 to 2.3 kg of refrigerant per kW of gross
ARI rated cooling capacity)
Life = Equipment Life (10 years; default based on equipment type,
unless otherwise demonstrated)

For systems with different types of equipment, a weighted average of all

air-conditioning and refrigeration equipments shall be calculated using
the following equation:

[ ∑ (LCGWP + LCODP × 105) ×Qunit ] / Qtotal ≤ 775

Qunit = Gross ARI rated cooling capacity of an individual air-

conditioning or refrigeration unit (kW)
Qtotal = Total gross ARI rate cooling capacity of all air-conditioning or
refrigeration (kW)

Page 3-23
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

Small air-conditioning units, defined as containing less than 0.23 kg of

refrigerant, and other equipment, such as standard refrigerators, small
water coolers and any other cooling equipment that contains less than
0.23 kg of refrigerant, can be excluded from this assessment.
The Client shall submit a report by a suitably qualified person giving
details of the air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment installed; and
demonstrates that the global warming potential and ozone depletion
potential of the refrigerants used in equipment meets the specified
requirement. Reference shall be made to refrigerant supplies and/or
equipment manufacturer’s data together with guidance provided by
recognised authorities such as ASHRAE, CIBSE, etc.
b) Ozone depleting materials
The Client shall provide a full description and specifications of all major
thermal insulation and fire retardant materials specified in roof
constructions, walls, chilled water pipes, refrigerant pipes, ductwork, etc.,
advising the presence or otherwise of ozone depleting agents. Where
there is any doubt as to the ozone depletion potential of a material or
product, the Client shall ascertain details from the supplier. Credit shall
be awarded where it can be demonstrated that reasonable effort has
been made to avoid the use of products that have significant ozone
depletion potential.

BACKGROUND The Montreal Protocol required scheduled phase out of controlled

substances, including chemicals containing chlorine and bromine used
as refrigerants, solvents, foam blowing agents, aerosol propellants, fire
suppressants, and for other purposes. Ozone Layer Protection
Ordinance (Cap. 403) 1989 gives effect to Hong Kong’s international
obligations to control the manufacture, import and export of ozone
depleting substances [ 1 ]. Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled
Refrigerants) Regulation 1994 requires the conservation of controlled
refrigerants used in large scale installations and motor vehicles [ 2 ].
Ozone Layer Protection (Products Containing Scheduled Substances)
(Import Banning) Regulation 1993 prohibits the import of portable fire
extinguishers containing halons and other controlled products from a
country or place not a party to the Montreal Protocol unless the Authority
considers that it complies with the requirements of the Protocol.
Scheduled substances under the Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance are
listed by the Environmental Protection Department [3].
In addition to having suitable thermodynamic properties, the ideal
refrigerant would be nontoxic, non-inflammable, completely staple,
environmentally benign, readily available, self-lubricating, compatible
with materials used in equipment, easy to handle and detect. No current
refrigerants are ideal. Compounds that contain no chlorine or bromine
have ozone depletion potential (ODP) nearly zero. Increasing the amount
of fluorine generally raises the global warming potential (GWP).
Hydrogen content tends to shorten the atmospheric lifetime [4].
Climate change is much more complex than ozone depletion, yet there is
wide agreement that warming is occurring. While refrigerants contribute
to the global environmental concerns, the impact is comparatively small
[4]. The problem is not with refrigerants inside air-conditioning systems,
but with their release. Given that ODP is largely addressed by legislation
BEAM basis assessment of refrigerants based on GWP.

1 Environmental Protection Department. A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance.
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_guides/files/cgto_olpo_eng.pdf
2 Environmental Protection Department. A Concise Guide to the Ozone Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants)
Regulation. http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/laws_regulations/comp_guides/files/cgt_olp_cr_eng.pdf
3 EPD. http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/application_for_licences/guidance/wn6_licen1_1.html
4 Calm S M. Option and outlook for chiller refrigerants. International Journal of Refrigeration. Vol. 25, 2002, pp 705-715.

Page 3-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 8 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES

CFCs generally have high ODP and GWP. HCFCs generally have much
lower ODP and GWP. HFCs offer near-zero ODP, but some have
comparatively high GWPs.
Refrigerant ODP[1] GWP[1]
Hydrofluorocarbons
HFC-23 ~0 12240
HFC-32 ~0 650
HFC-134a ~0 1320
HFC-152a ~0 140
HFC-402A ~0 1680
HFC-404A ~0 3900
HFC-407C ~0 1700
HFC-410A ~0 1890
HFC-413A ~0 1774
HFC-507A ~0 3900
Hydrochlorofluorocarbons
HCFC-22 0.04 1780
HCFC-123 0.02 76
Chlorofluorocarbons
CFC-11 1.0 4680
CFC-12 1.0 10720
CFC-114 0.94 9800
CFC-500 0.605 7900
CFC-502 0.221 4600
[1] – Sources:
i: IPCC Second Assessment Report;
ii: “World Resources Institute (2005), World Business Council for
Sustainable Development”;
iii: US Environmental Protection Agency.

The US Environmental Protection Agency provides information on

suitable substitutes for ozone depleting substances [ 5 ], including
refrigerants for various types of air-conditioning and refrigeration
equipment, fire suppression [6], blowing agents [7], solvents, etc. CIBSE
GN01 [ 8 ] outlines the hazards of the use of these refrigerants and
provides design guidance for refrigeration systems, thermal insulation
and fire protection systems. An ASHRAE guideline [ 9 ] recommends
practices and procedures that will reduce inadvertent release of
halogenated refrigerants. The practices and procedures in this guideline
cover emission reduction of halogenated hydrocarbon and halogenated
ether refrigerants:
• from stationary refrigeration, air-conditioning, and heat pump
equipment and systems; and
• during manufacture, installation, testing, operation, maintenance,
and disposal of equipment and systems.

5 US Environmental Protection Agency. http://www.epa.gov/docs/ozone/snap/lists/index.html#refac

6 US Environmental Protection Agency. http://www.epa.gov/docs/ozone/snap/fire/halo.pdf
7 US Environmental Protection Agency. http://www.epa.gov/docs/ozone/snap/foams/lists/index.html
8 Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. CFC’s, HCFC’s, HFC’s and halons. 2000. ISBN 0900953993.
9 ASHRAE Guideline 3-1996. Reducing Emission of Halogenated Refrigerants in Refrigeration and AS

Page 3-25
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 9 REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED MATERIALS

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.2 SELECTION OF MATERIALS

MA 9 REGIONALLY MANUFACTURED MATERIALS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage the use of materials manufactured locally so as to reduce the

environmental impacts arising from transportation.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for use of materials manufactured locally within 800 km from the
site, which contribute to at least 10% of all building materials used in the
project.
2 credits for use of materials manufactured locally within 800 km from the
site, which contribute to at least 20% of all building materials used in the
project.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
listing the materials that satisfy the requirements, and quantifying the
value of materials manufactured locally, as percentage of the total value
of the materials used. The unit shall be mass/volume/dollar value but
shall be consistent throughout the assessment of this credit. The report
shall include supporting documentation from the suppliers listing the
name of the manufacturer and the distance between the project site and
the manufacturer.
Mechanical and electrical systems components shall not be included in
the calculation. Plumbing products however may be included at the
discretion of the project team. Reused and salvaged material such as
furniture may also be included. The location from which they were
salvaged may be used as the point of manufacture.
When it can be demonstrated that the target percentage of all building
materials used in the project are manufactured locally within 800km from
the site, the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND By using locally manufactured materials, environmental impacts and

material costs are reduced, and the local economy is supported.
Pollution associated with transportation, including air and noise, has
become a serious obstruction to the quality of life, and even the health of
citizen. Further, energy consumption by transportation, as well as the
demand of petroleum, has dramatically increased. The use of locally
manufactured materials reduces the transportation activities and the
accompanying pollution associated. It can relieve air pollution generated
by trucks, trains and other vehicle deplete non-renewable fossil fuels in
the long transportation. By purchasing the locally manufactured
materials, transportation problems are further reduced.
Due to the reduced transportation costs, the locally manufactured
materials are more cost effective. Also, the support of local
manufacturers and labor forces contributes to a more stable tax base
and a healthier local economy.

Page 3-26
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 10 DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

MA 10 DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION

EXCLUSIONS Projects where demolition is not required or is not under the Client’s
control.

OBJECTIVE Encourage best practices in the management of waste, including

sorting, recycling and disposal of demolition waste.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General)

Regulation.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that at least 30% of demolition waste is
recycled.
2 credits for demonstrating that at least 60% of demolition waste is
recycled.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall present evidence in the form of a report by a suitably
qualified person quantifying amount of demolition waste recycled as a
percentage of total demolition waste. The disposal of inert waste to
public fill will not be considered as an acceptable strategy for fulfilling
this requirement.
Where at least 30% (by weight or by volume) of all waste generated
on site can be shown to have been recycled the credit shall be
awarded. Where the percentage is 60% the second credit shall be
awarded.
The Client’s representative on site shall be responsible for monitoring
and reporting on the execution of the instructions and shall confirm
through monthly reports the extent to which recycling and sorting has
been achieved. WTBC TWC 19/2005 should be used as a guide to the
nature of reporting and recording keeping. The Client shall
demonstrate that all waste and disposal are conducted in an
environmentally friendly manner.
The BEAM Assessor may undertake site inspections during
demolition.

Page 3-27
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS MATERIALS ASPECTS (MA)
VERSION 1.1 MA 11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION

3 MATERIALS ASPECTS 3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

MA 11 CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage best practices in the management of waste, including

sorting, recycling and disposal of construction waste.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General)

Regulation.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that at least 30% of construction waste is
recycled.
2 credits for demonstration that at least 60% of construction waste is
recycled.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall present evidence in the form of a report by a suitably
qualified person quantifying amount of construction waste recycled as
a percentage of total construction waste. The excavated waste will not
be considered as part of the construction waste. The disposal of inert
waste to public fill will not be considered as an acceptable strategy for
fulfilling this requirement.
Where at least 30% (by weight or by volume) of all waste generated
on site can be shown to have been recycled the credit shall be
awarded. Where the percentage is 60% the second credits shall be
awarded.
The Client’s representative on site shall be responsible for monitoring
and reporting on the execution of the instructions and shall confirm
through monthly reports the extent to which recycling and sorting has
been achieved. WTBC TWC 19/2005 should be used as a guide to the
nature of reporting and recording keeping. The Client shall
demonstrate that all waste and disposal are conducted in an
environmentally friendly manner.
The BEAM Assessor may undertake site inspections during
construction.

Page 3-28
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1

4 ENERGY USE 4.P PREREQUISITE

4.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE
4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS
4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT
4.4 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT
4.5 BUILDING DESIGN FOR ENERGY EFFICIENCY

INTRODUCTION BEAM encourages detailed design of buildings and systems, and

provisions that enhance energy efficiency and energy conservation.
Credits are awarded on the basis of enhanced energy performance, the
provision of energy efficient systems and equipment, and the provisions
for energy management.

CLASSIFICATION OF To deal with the wide range of building that may be encountered,
BUILDINGS buildings/premises are categorised according to the provisions for air-
conditioning and ventilation. This is necessary as the operational needs
of buildings together with the different air-conditioning and ventilation
systems that serve their needs results in large variations in energy use
between buildings.

AIR-CONDITIONED This refers to buildings and premises that are air-conditioned, either by a
BUILDINGS central plant serving the entire building or unitary equipment for
individual spaces, and where the air-conditioning system operates
almost throughout the year. When a significant portion of such buildings
are mechanically or naturally ventilated additional assessments shall be
included.

NATURALLY This refers to buildings that are designed to use natural ventilation, but
VENTILATED/AIR- may be air-conditioned when natural ventilation fails to provide adequate
CONDITIONED BUILDINGS indoor comfort conditions. When a significant portion of such buildings
are mechanically ventilated additional assessments shall be included.

MECHANICALLY This refers to buildings such as car parks, factories, godowns, etc.,
VENTILATED BUILDINGS where the major areas rely solely on mechanical ventilation for indoor
thermal environment and/or control of air quality. When a significant
portion of such buildings are air-conditioned or naturally ventilated
additional assessments shall be included.

OTHER BUILDINGS This embraces buildings/premises that cannot be categorised as one of

the above and comprise an unusual mix of premises or premises with
special uses. Such buildings would be assessed based on either the
generic framework for assessment of energy performance, with the
required parameters and benchmarks determined as the first stage of the
assessment, and/or feature specific assessments.

ASSESSMENTS The Energy Use assessments take account of the specific characteristics
of the building development, such as the type and usage of premises it
houses and the range and operational characteristics of the systems and
equipment required to meet the needs of users, and comprise three
parts:
• estimated Annual Energy Use (and where appropriate, Maximum
Electricity Demand) for air-conditioning the building, and for lighting
and equipment in air-conditioned areas;
• features and performance of specific systems and equipment; and
• testing and commissioning of systems and provisions that facilitate
energy efficient management, operation and maintenance.

Page 4-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1

ANNUAL ENERGY USE AND SYSTEMS+EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS FOR

MAX ELECTRICITY DEMAND PERFORMANCE ENERGY MANAGEMENT

ENERGY USED FOR AIR-CONDITIONING THE BUILDING/PREMISES

+
ENERGY USED FOR LIGHTING AND EQUIPMENT IN AIR-CONDITIONED AREAS

BACKGROUND Electricity generation accounts for around 60% of the total CO2
emissions from energy use in Hong Kong and buildings, particularly air-
conditioned buildings, account for more than half of the electricity
consumed each year. Ensuring buildings are designed for good energy
performance is the key to the conservation of resources and reductions
in environmental loadings.
Power stations operate under licenses issued by the Director of
Environmental Protection, requiring operators to employ Best Practicable
Means to control emissions to acceptable levels. However, a growth in
demand is resulting in the construction of further generation,
transmission and distribution capacity. Mainly because of air-
conditioning, buildings are responsible for much of the peak load that
occurs around midday during summer months. Demand side
management can reduce the rate of expansion of supply-side capacity
and emissions to the atmosphere.

4.P PREREQUISITE EU P1 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

BACKGROUND BEAM provides incentives to achieve energy performance better than

the minimum compliance with the local energy codes. Consequently,
compliance with the Building Energy Codes (BEC), a government
initiative currently under review for mandatory implementation, is taken
as the energy performance prerequisite for BEAM certifications, unless
otherwise agreed by the BEAM Society.
BEC refers also to other 4 other Codes of Practice for Energy Efficiency,
namely Air-conditioning Code [1], Lighting Code [2], Electrical Code [3],
Lift & Escalator Code [4].
Performance-based Building Energy Code (PBEC) [ 5 ] uses computer
simulation model to assess energy performance. Compliance with the
PBEC automatically satisfies the energy performance prerequisite,
irrespective of the simulation software and default values.

4.1 ANNUAL ENERGY EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 EMISSIONS

USE EU 2 PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND REDUCTION

4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

SYSTEMS EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEMS IN MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SPACES
EU 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM IN MECHANICALLY VENTILATED SPACES

1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations
(2007 Edition) and the subsequent amendment. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/accop_2007.pdf
2 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lighting Installations (2007
Edition) and the subsequent amendment. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/lightingcop_2007.pdf
3 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical Installations (2007
Edition) and the subsequent amendment. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/eleccop_2007.pdf
4 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lift and Escalator Installations
(2007 Edition) and the subsequent amendment. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/lift_esccop_2007.pdf
5 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Performance-based Building Energy Code.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/pb-bec_2007.pdf

Page 4-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1

EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

BACKGROUND Whilst the estimation of annual energy use and maximum electricity
demand takes into account design improvements to the building envelop
and the efficiency of air-conditioning and lighting systems and equipment
it does not embrace all aspects of energy use in buildings. Therefore,
BEAM credits additional measures that can improve the energy
performance of buildings.

4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

EQUIPMENT EU 8 CLOTHES DRYING FACILITIES
EU 9 ENERGY EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

BACKGROUND As for the case of energy performance of systems, BEAM gives credit for
the inclusion of particular equipment that provides for improved energy
performance but account for which is not included in the estimation of
annual energy use. The use of robust automatic controls has sown to
provide for energy conservation through ‘switching-off’ or ‘turn down’.

4.4 PROVISIONS FOR EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

ENERGY EU 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANAGEMENT EU 12 METERING AND MONITORING

BACKGROUND One of the major reasons why buildings fail to meet performance
expectations is the lack of adequate commissioning of systems and
equipment, and the inadequacy of operations and maintenance manuals,
commissioning data, and as-installed equipment data, as-fitted drawings,
and operator training.
The installations considered in this section include the systems,
equipment and components of the electrical and mechanical plant in the
building development that have significant influence on energy
consumption, electricity maximum demand and, to a lesser extent indoor
environmental conditions. Indoor environmental conditions are verified in
a series of tests which may be regarded as ‘enhanced commissioning’
and which are detailed in the section covering indoor environmental
quality.
The Client should implement and execute a commissioning process that
starts with performance requirements and ends with commissioning
records for all energy related systems and equipment. The details of all
systems, equipment and components, operating instructions, set points
and results of all testing and commissioning should be provided to the
building operator in a comprehensive and well organised operation and
maintenance manual.

4.5 BUILDING DESIGN EU 13 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDING LAYOUT

FOR ENERGY
EFFICIENCY
BACKGROUND Through planning and architectural design, it is possible to improve the
building energy efficiency. This section is to address various strategies in
terms of building orientation, layout plan, external shading devices, such
that the building energy consumption would be reduced.

REFERENCES Energy Efficiency and Conservation for Buildings [6].

Guidelines on Energy Audit. April 2004 [7].

6 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/emsd100dpi.pdf
7 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/eng/pee/em_pub.shtml

Page 4-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1

Guidelines on T5 Fluorescent Lamps [8].

Application Guide to Electronic Ballasts [9].
Application Guide to Variable Speed Drives (VSD) [10].
Application Guide to Central Control and Monitoring Systems (CCMS)
[11].

8 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/t5guide.pdf
9 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/eng/pee/em_pub_1.shtml
10 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/eng/pee/em_pub_2.shtml
11 http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/ccms17.pdf

Page 4-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU P1 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

4 ENERGY USE 4.P PREREQUISITE

EU P1 MINIMUM ENERGY PERFORMANCE

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Establish the minimum level of energy performance for the systems
serving project spaces.

REQUIREMENT Demonstrate compliance with the latest edition of Building Energy Codes
(BEC).

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit documents required to demonstrate compliance

with the pertinent sections of the latest BEC that include, but not limited
to:
a) plans and specifications showing details of scope of work, all
pertinent data, features, equipment and systems of the project area
including complete descriptions of materials, engineering data, test
data, manufacturer’s data, and all other data necessary to allow
proper identification of components that affect the project area’s
energy use; and
b) an energy analysis report prepared and certified by a qualified
professional person. The energy analysis report shall include a
formal certifying statement informing the scope of compliance and
confirming the compliance with the BEC either by Prescriptive or
Performance Option. The statement shall be accompanied by a set
of documents, including as-fitted/installation drawings, design
calculations and standard forms as required in the BEC. On the use
of performance approach to demonstrate compliance, the
statement shall include a report describing the simulation software,
the simulation results, and the modeling assumptions shall also be
submitted.
Documents issued by the certifying body of the BEC confirming
compliance are recognised as an acceptable alternative to the
submission of documents a) and b) above.

BACKGROUND The compliance with the Building Energy Codes can reduce the energy
consumption and the operating cost. The power plants in Hong Kong
mainly use coal and natural gas as fuel to generate electricity. The
reduction of energy leads to the saving of fossil fuels associated, and
less generation of carbon dioxide which contributes to global climate
change.

Page 4-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 EMISSIONS

4 ENERGY USE 4.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 EMISSIONS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Reduce the consumption of non-renewable energy resources and the

consequent harmful emissions of Carbon Dioxide (CO2) to the
atmosphere.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 15

PREREQUISITES Eu P1 Minimum Energy Performance.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT (a) Commercial and Hotel Buildings,

1 to 15 credits for a reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy
consumption by:
3%, 5%, 7%, 9%, 11%, 14%, 17%, 20%, 23%, 26%, 29%, 33%, 37%,
41% and 45% respectively.
(b) Educational Buildings,
1 to 15 credits for reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy
consumption by:
3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 9%, 11%, 13%, 15%, 17%, 19%, 21%, 24%, 27%
and 30% respectively.
(c) Residential Buildings,
1 to 15 credits for reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy
consumption by:
3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 16%, 18%
and 20% respectively.
(d) For All Building Types using Performance-based BEC method,
1 to 15 credits for reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy
consumption by:
1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 12%, 14%, 16%, 18% and
20% respectively.

ASSESSMENT The number of credits to be awarded will be determined with reference to

the percentage reduction of CO2 emissions or annual energy
consumption of the assessed building relative to the respective
benchmark (zero-credit) criteria evaluated from the Baseline Building
model.
The calculation shall be done in terms of units of either CO2 – kg or kWh
per year. A simple conversion factor shall be adopted with reference to
the Carbon Audit Guideline or default assumptions in Appendix 8.3. Full
building energy simulation including energy used for heating, cooling,
lighting, small power, etc shall be considered.
The methodology of the energy simulation shall make reference to
Performance-based Building Energy Code (PBEC) or Appendix G of
ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or equivalent. (Note: For interim measure before
Hong Kong equivalent of Appendix G of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 is available,
lighting power density (LPD) in ASHRAE calculation shall use those
parameters in Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lighting
Installations (2007 Edition). Appendix 8.2 includes the default values or
assumptions for design parameters for Performance-based approach for
reference.

Page 4-6
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 1 REDUCTION OF CO2 EMISSIONS

The energy analysis and supporting documentation shall be prepared by

a qualified person. The submission for compliance and the computer
software to be used shall make reference to the Performance-based
BEC 2007 or ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2007.

Page 4-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 2 PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND REDUCTION

4 ENERGY USE 4.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

EU 2 PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND REDUCTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Encourage energy conservation and methods to reduce peak electricity

demand

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT (a) Commercial and Hotel Buildings,

1 to 3 credits for a reduction in the maximum electricity demand by 15%,
23% and 30% respectively.
(b) Educational and Residential Buildings,
1 to 3 credits for a reduction in the maximum electricity demand by 8%,
12% and 15% respectively.

ASSESSMENT The number of credits to be awarded will be determined with reference to

the percentage reduction of maximum electricity demand of the
assessed building relative to the respective benchmark (zero-credit)
criteria evaluated from the Baseline Building model.
The assessment shall be included within the assessment of annual
energy use for the project building.

Page 4-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

4 ENERGY USE 4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS

EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Encourage the design of structural elements and choice of materials that
results in lower embodied energy.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating the embodied energy in the major elements of
the building structure of the assessed building has been studied through
a Life Cycle Assessment (LCA).
1 BONUS credit for demonstrating the major materials with low
embodied energy are used in the project utilizing the LCA results.

ASSESSMENT The assessment covers only the elements and materials used in the
building foundations, building core, walls, etc, i.e., major elements of
building structure include building façade and primary and secondary
structures, but do not include building services system at the calculation.
The Client shall provide a report detailing where changes in the design of
the main structural elements, for example the use of less materials or
alternative constructions, etc., that provide for a reduction in embodied
energy beyond that which would result if the enhancements were not
included.
The method to estimate reduction in embodied energy should follow a
well-established Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) approach. It is
encouraged to use EMSD’s tool or other equivalent tools to conduct a
Life Cycle Assessment.
Where the Client can demonstrate through appropriate analysis the
study of the embodied energy in main elements of building structure of
the assessment building, the credits shall be awarded. Where the major
materials with low embodied energy are used the bonus credit shall be
awarded.

BACKGROUND The energy used in the extraction, processing and transportation of

materials used in building construction can be a significant part of the
total energy used over the life cycle of a building, particularly buildings
that utilise natural ventilation where operating energy for cooling and
ventilation are significantly less than for air-conditioned buildings.
Estimations for Hong Kong residential buildings suggest that embodied
energy amounts to 20-40% of total energy used over a 40-60 year
lifetime [1,2,3].
Heightened awareness of the importance of environmental protection,
and the possible impacts associated with products manufactured and
consumed, has increased the interest in the development of methods to
better comprehend and reduce these impacts. One of the techniques
being developed for this purpose is Life Cycle Assessment (LCA). ISO

1 Cole R J, Wong K S. Minimising environmental impact of high-rise residential buildings. Proc. Housing for millions: The
challenge ahead. Hong Kong: Housing Authority, 1996, pp 262–5.
2 Humphrey S, Amato A, Frewer R. Whole Life Comparison of High Rise Residential Blocks in Hong Kong. International
Housing Conference - Housing in the 21st Century: Challenges and Commitments. 2-4 February 2004.
3 Chen T Y, Burnett J, Chau C K. Analysis of embodied energy use in residential building of Hong Kong. Energy 26, 2001.
pp 323-340.

Page 4-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 3 EMBODIED ENERGY IN BUILDING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

14040 [ 4] describes the principles and framework for conducting and

reporting LCA studies, and includes certain minimal requirements. LCA
is a technique for assessing the environmental aspects and potential
impacts associated with a product, by:
• compiling an inventory of relevant inputs and outputs of a product
system;
• evaluating the potential environmental impacts associated with those
inputs and outputs; and
• interpreting the results of the inventory analysis and impact
assessment phases in relation to the objectives of the study.
ASTM E 1991 [5] is a general guide for the application of environmental
Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) as a tool for evaluating the environmental
aspects of materials/products, processes, and services produced and
used in buildings and the built environment.
With the availability of more reliable and relevant data for use in Life
Cycle Assessment (LCA) methods designers are better able to quantify
embodied energy in buildings elements and structures.

4 International Organization for Standardization. EN ISO 14040:1997. Environmental management – Life cycle
assessment – Principles and framework.
5 American Society for Testing and Materials. ASTM E 1991-98. Standard Guide for Environmental Life Cycle Assessment
of Building Materials/Products.

Page 4-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS

4 ENERGY USE 4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS

EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings without carpark or carpark area less than 10% CFA.

OBJECTIVES Encourage energy efficient design and control of ventilation systems in

large mechanically ventilated car parks.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building (Ventilating Systems) Regulations, Chapter

123J Regulation 4.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for ventilation systems that will consume less electricity than
those meeting the zero credit requirements (baseline) by 20% or more.
2 credits where the consumption is reduced by 25% or more.

ASSESSMENT The baseline (zero credit) performance criteria for mechanical ventilation
systems shall be determined based on the following:
• a mechanical ventilation system that consumes a fan power of 2 W
per l/s of the total ventilation flow rate maintained in the ventilated
spaces in the building; and
• where a space is served by both a supply and an extraction system,
the system fan power shall be the sum of the fan power of the supply
and the extraction system whilst the ventilation flow rate shall either
be the total supply or the total extraction flow rate, whichever is the
larger.
Besides reduction, it is required to demonstrate that the control systems
for regulating the operation of the ventilation systems(s) shall be
provided to reduce energy use whenever conditions permit.
Examples of control systems referred to in the credit requirements
include variable fan speed control, duty cycling of multiple ventilation
fans according to the CO concentration in car parks, etc.
The Client shall submit the following information to demonstrate that the
installations meet the basic requirements and the requirements for
credits:
• the criteria adopted in the design of the ventilation systems;
• the calculated ventilation rates;
• the design performance and operating patterns of the ventilation
equipment;
• the energy use predictions for the zero-credit case and the as
designed case for the ventilation system installation;
• reports of air leakage tests on selected ducting systems (to be
confirmed subsequently if the assessment is conducted prior to on-
site testing and commissioning of the ventilation systems); and
• the specified performance of any air-conditioning equipment for the
building.
The air leakage limit on ductwork shall conform to the criteria given in the
Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations

Page 4-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 4 VENTILATION SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS

[1], and the test method shall be based on DW143 [2], SMACNA [3] or
equal equivalent method.
Where there is a need to take into account trade-off of performance
between the mechanical ventilation and the lighting installations, the
submitted calculations shall show that the extra energy used due to non-
fulfillment of one criterion has been more than compensated by the extra
energy saving due to a better performance over and above the other
criterion.

1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations
(2007 Edition) and the subsequent amendment. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/accop_2007.pdf
2 Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association, UK. DW143 A Practical Guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing. 2000.
3 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under
Construction. http://www.smacna.org/

Page 4-12
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS

4 ENERGY USE 4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS

EU 5 LIGHTING SYSTEM IN CAR PARKS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings without carpark or carpark area less than 10% CFA.

OBJECTIVES Encourage the adoption of lighting equipment and controls that will
provide for energy conservation.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for using lamps and, where applicable, ballasts that will consume
less electricity than those meeting the zero-credit requirements by 20%
or more.
2 credits where the consumption is reduced by 25% or more.

ASSESSMENT The zero credit performance criteria for the interior lighting installations
(not including that in public areas in and adjacent to the assessed
building) shall be determined based on the following:
• The use of 40W fluorescent tubes, each with a 10W control gear and
will produce 2,400 lm; and
• The use of the minimum number of lighting fittings with lamps of
performance as given above that will allow the required illumination
levels in various premises in the building to be achieved
The illumination levels required in various types of premises in the
assessed building shall follow guidance given in relevant lighting design
guides, such as the CIBSE Code for interior lighting [1]. Determination of
the minimum number of lighting fittings required shall be based on the
Lumen formula, based on a utilisation factor (UF) of 0.45 and a light loss
factor (LLF) of 0.8.
The Client shall submit the following information to demonstrate that the
installations will meet the basic requirements and the individual
requirements above for the related credits:
• the criteria adopted in the design of the lighting systems;
• the quantity of lighting fittings designed for various premises, the
wattage of each fitting and the operation patterns of the lighting
systems; and
• the energy use predictions for the zero-credit case and the as
designed case for the lighting installations.
In addition to the above requirement, it is also required to demonstrate
that the control systems and devices shall be provided to switch off or
dim the output of lighting installations when and where illumination is not
required.
Where there is a need to take into account trade-off of performance
between the mechanical ventilation and the lighting installations, the
submitted calculations shall show that the extra energy used due to non-
fulfillment of one criterion has been more than compensated by the extra
energy saving due to a better performance over and above the other
criterion.

1 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Code for interior lighting.

Page 4-13
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

4 ENERGY USE 4.2 ENERGY EFFICIENT SYSTEMS

EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Encourage the wider application of renewable energy sources in

buildings.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 5

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 to 5 credits where 0.5% to 2.5% or more of building energy

consumption is obtained from renewable energy sources respectively.
Alternatively,
1 to 5 credits where the minimum percentage of 20% to 100% of the
building footprint is being covered/used by PV panels respectively and/or
other renewable power facility generation equivalent renewable power
output.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report providing details of the installations, and
calculations showing the estimated energy use provided from renewable
energy sources.
In the case of systems that generate electricity from renewable sources
(e.g. photovoltaic panels), the estimated amount of electricity that will be
generated by the system for use by equipment in the building, either
instantaneously or from an associated storage system.
In the case of using systems that produce services direct from renewable
sources, which will otherwise require the use of fuel or electricity to
produce those services (e.g. hot water supply from solar panels or chilled
water supply from absorption chillers powered by solar heat), the
equivalent amount of electricity use that will be avoided.
The calculation shall take due account of the diurnal and seasonal
variations in the external environmental conditions (e.g. solar intensity
and wind speed and direction) and in the demand for the electricity
and/or services generated by the systems. Any energy use and losses
by the systems shall be discounted from their output. The total energy
consumption shall be referenced to the design value calculated in the
Credit EU 1 Reduction of CO2 Emission. The tenant’s electrical loads
shall be excluded from the calculation.
Alternatively, the credits may be awarded where the Client demonstrate
that percentage of the building footprint is being covered/used by PV
panels and/or other renewable power facility generation equivalent
renewable power output. The number of credit awarded will be
determined with reference to the percentage achieved.

BACKGROUND If energy consumption continues to increase at existing levels, projected

carbon dioxide emissions generated for the year 2010 are expected to
grow by 39% from the 2000 level. The effective use of renewable energy
resources will help to reduce Hong Kong's reliance on fossil fuels and
also to reduce greenhouse gas emissions arising from the use of fossil
fuels. EMSD’s information pamphlet [ 1 ] explains the meaning of
renewable energy, the benefits of using renewable energy, and the
current status of application of renewable energy in Hong Kong.
Although large scale application of renewable energy in buildings does

1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/sgi/re_pamphlet.pdf

Page 4-14
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 6 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

not yet exist in Hong Kong, its use should be promoted in the interest of
sustainable development. To ensure credits will only be awarded to
meaningful installations, the criteria of assessment have been set with
reference to the percentage of the energy use in the assessed building
that will be replaced by renewable sources. Furthermore, no distinction
will be made of the means chosen for substituting electricity or fuel by
renewable energy. Hence, different or a combination of systems and
equipment may be incorporated into a building, such as solar hot water
systems, building integrated photovoltaic panels, wind turbines, etc.
Recognizing the fact that the application of renewable energy in densely
populated urban centres is more difficult than in less densely populated
settings, the performance criteria are relaxed for building developments
in urban centres.

Page 4-15
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

4 ENERGY USE 4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT

EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings not using window and/or split-type air-conditioners.

OBJECTIVES Ensure the installation of air-conditioning units provides for near optimum
performance.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Proper disposal system for the drainage of the condensation shall be
provided in accordance with Buildings Department requirements [1].

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for complying with the recommended installation positions for air-
conditioning units with regard to internal spaces; complying with the
minimum width of any external recess with regard to heat rejection; and
complying with the items listed in the assessment check-lists.

ASSESSMENT i) Window type air-conditioning units

The Client shall provide relevant drawings and specifications
demonstrating that the air-conditioning units installed comply with the
installation requirements given in Tables 8.7 and 8.8 in Section 8.4.
ii) Split-type air-conditioning units
The Client shall provide relevant drawings and specifications
demonstrating that the air-conditioning units installed comply with the
relevant dimensions given in Table 8.7 in respect of internal unit, and
with the relevant dimensions given in Table 8.8 in respect of the external
unit.
Compliance with the requirements shall be demonstrated for each type
of domestic unit in a block, or each type of space or room in other types
of premises, unless the Client can demonstrate either that circumstances
mitigate against compliance in not more than 10% of installations, or that
non-compliance will not affect the performance of air-conditioning units in
respect of room cooling, or heat rejection.
The Client shall confirm that the installation conforms with any four of the
following items that are relevant to the type of air-conditioning units used:
• to reduce penetration of noise units shall be located on walls which
do not face major noise sources (road traffic, major pedestrian
walkways, playgrounds, etc);
• to reduce intake of polluted air units shall be located in walls such
that air is not drawn in from pollution sources such as roads,
commercial activities, etc;
• for improved acoustics properties and better circulation, the internal
discharge shall be close to the centre of the wall in which it is
located;
• for the purpose of reducing noise from rain, and to reduce the
potential for water dripping on to lower units, slabs shall be provided
to as support and as cover;
• to encourage proper maintenance, the installation of units shall be
such to allow for safe and convenient removal;
• where air-conditioning units are provided by the developer, the units

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-112 Disposal of Condensation from Air-Conditioning Units.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP112.pdf

Page 4-16
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 7 AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

selected shall be labelled as Grade 1 or 2 under the Government’s

energy efficiency labelling scheme for room coolers [2].

BACKGROUND Due to the hot and humid weather, the majority of residential units in
Hong Kong are equipped with window-type air-conditioners. However,
the provisions made in the building envelope design for their installation
are often inadequate, particularly in the clearances for intake and
disposal of outdoor air for condenser cooling. Consequently, the air-
conditioners would consume an unnecessarily high amount of electricity
and at the same time output less cooling [3].
Proper location of air-conditioning units will improve internal operating
efficiency and comfort, and the efficiency of external heat rejection. Good
design of openings can improve the quality of air intake, reduce intrusion
of external noise, reduce nuisance to neighbours and provide for better
operation and maintenance.
For air-conditioning for residential buildings, wall boxes or platforms in
reinforced concrete or other suitable material may be constructed as a
permanent feature, even over streets, and as such may be excluded
from site coverage considerations [4].

2 Electrical & Mechanical Services Department, the Government of the Hong Kong SAR. The Hong Kong Voluntary Energy
Efficiency Labelling Scheme for Room Coolers.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/eels_room_cooler_(jan_2003).pdf
3 Bojic M, Lee M, Yik F, Burnett J. Influence of clearances on the energy performance of window-type air-conditioners at the
same level outside residential buildings. Building and Environment 37 (2002) 713 – 726
4 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-42 Amenity Features.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP042.pdf

Page 4-17
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 8 CLOTHES DRYING FACILITIES

4 ENERGY USE 4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT

EU 8 CLOTHES DRYING FACILITIES

EXCLUSIONS Buildings other than residential buildings.

OBJECTIVES Encourage greater use of natural resources in place of gas or electrical

energy for clothes drying purposes.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for providing suitable clothes drying facilities which utilise the
natural environment for all residential units.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall demonstrate the adequacy of the clothes drying facilities
for efficient drying by sun and breeze, which is adequately protected
from water droplets and debris falling from higher levels, and not
adversely affected by smoke, fumes and pollutants emitted from water
heaters, cooking exhausts, discharges from air-conditioning units, etc.

BACKGROUND Provisions of clothes drying facilities in many existing residential

buildings are inadequate such that people tend not to use them and
resort to gas or electric drying machines, increasing energy
consumption.

Page 4-18
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 9 ENERGY EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

4 ENERGY USE 4.3 ENERGY EFFICIENT EQUIPMENT

EU 9 ENERGY EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

EXCLUSIONS Buildings where appliances are not provided by the developer.

OBJECTIVES Encourage the wider use of energy efficient appliances.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit when 60% of total rated power of appliances and equipment are
certified energy efficient products.
2 credits when 80% of total rated power of appliances and equipment are
certified energy efficient products.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide details of all the appliances installed in the
building and evidence as to the efficiency ratings of each type and size of
the appliances; and quantify the rated power of certified energy products
as the percentage of total rated power of appliances and equipment. The
eligible appliances and equipment include the products with efficiency
Grade 1 or 2 under the Energy Efficiency Labelling [ 1 , 2 ] or USEPA
Energy Star Rated [3] or certified under equivalent labeling scheme.
Where the target percent of total power of appliances and equipment are
certified efficient product, the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND To make it easier for the public to choose energy efficient products,
EMSD operates Mandatory and Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling
Schemes for appliances and equipment used both in the home and
office. The scheme aims to save energy by informing potential customers
of the product's level of energy consumption and efficiency rating, so that
buyers can take these factors into consideration when making their
purchasing decision.
The scheme now covers eighteen types of household appliances and
office equipment. Ten types of which are electrical appliances including
refrigerators (Voluntary Scheme), washing machines, non-integrated
type compact fluorescent lamps, dehumidifiers, electric clothes dryers,
room coolers (Voluntary Scheme), electric storage water heaters,
television sets, electric rice-cookers and electronic ballasts. The seven
types of office equipment include photocopiers, fax machines,
multifunction devices, laser printers, LCD monitors, computers and hot /
cold bottled water dispensers. There is also one type of gas appliance for
domestic gas instantaneous water heaters.
Products in more than 40 categories are eligible for the Energy Star.
They use less energy, save money, and help protect the environment.

1 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/eng/pee/eels_pub.shtml
2 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Mandatory Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/eng/pee/eels_mpub.shtml
3 US Environmental Protection Agency. Energy Star Qualified Products.
http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product.

Page 4-19
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

4 ENERGY USE 4.4 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Ensure that commissioning of electrical and mechanical systems that

impact on energy use is adequate, that systems perform as specified,
and can be operated as intended.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 4 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Commissioning specifications

1 credit for provision of appropriate specifications and cost provisions in
contract documents detailing the commissioning requirements for all
systems and equipment that impact on energy use and indoor
environmental quality.
b) Commissioning plan
1 credit for the appointment of a commissioning authority and provision
of a detailed commissioning plan that embraces all specified
commissioning work.
c) Commissioning
1 credit for ensuring full and complete commissioning of all systems,
equipment and components that impact on energy use and indoor
environmental quality.
d) Commissioning report
1 credit for providing fully detailed commissioning reports for all systems,
equipment and components that impact on energy use and indoor
environmental quality.
e) Independent Commissioning Authority
1 BONUS credit for engagement of an independent commissioning
authority in the Testing and Commissioning process.

ASSESSMENT a) Commissioning specifications

The Client shall submit copies of specifications detailing the
commissioning requirements for each system and equipment, and details
of the cost provisions for the commissioning work.
Where it can be shown that the specifications meet the requirements
given in Section 8.5.1 as a minimum, and cost provisions are sufficient to
carry out the intended work the credit shall be awarded.
b) Commissioning plan
There shall be appropriate cost provisions for the appointment of a
commissioning authority and for the commissioning processes. The
commissioning authority shall be a Registered Professional Engineer
with adequate expertise in the commissioning or electrical and
mechanical systems, equipment and components. A suitably qualified
member of the organization that performed the design may act as the
commissioning authority. Reporting of all conditions and findings must be
immediate and direct from the commissioning authority to the Client. The
commissioning authority shall be responsible for:
• review and approval of commissioning specifications;
• the development of a commissioning plan; and

Page 4-20
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

• determining and documenting whether systems, equipment and

components are functioning in accordance with the design intent and
in accordance with the construction documents.
Where the Client can provide evidence that the commissioning plan
meets the requirements detailed in Section 8.5.2 as a minimum the credit
shall be awarded.
c) Commissioning
Where the Client appoints a commissioning agent to be responsible for
performing the functional testing of systems and equipment, as
documented by the commissioning authority, using forms approved by
the commissioning authority, and all of which meet the requirements of
Section 8.5.3 as a minimum, the credit shall be awarded.
d) Commissioning report
Where the Client demonstrates that after all commissioning tasks, except
seasonally deferred testing have been completed, and a commissioning
report is provided covering as a minimum the items given in Section
8.5.4, the credit shall be awarded.
e) Independent Commissioning Authority
Where the Client demonstrates that the commissioning authority shall
fulfill the following requirements:
• the commissioning agent must have relevant experience at least 2
building projects;
• the individual must not be responsible for any aspect of the project
design or construction management or supervision for the subject
building;
• the individual must not be an employee of the design firm;
• the individual must not be an employee of, or contracted through, a
contractor or construction manager dealing with construction
contracts; and
• the individual may be a qualified employee or consultant of the
owner.

BACKGROUND Commissioning is a quality assurance process for buildings from pre-

design through design, construction, and operations. It involves
achieving, verifying, and documenting the performance of each system
to meet the building’s operational needs within the capabilities of the
documented design and equipment capacities, according to the owner’s
functional criteria. Commissioning includes preparing project operational
and maintenance documentation and training operation and
maintenance personnel. The result should be fully functional systems
that can be properly operated and maintained throughout the life of the
building.
CIBSE [e.g. 1,2,3], BSRIA [e.g. 4] and ASHRAE [e.g. 5] publications
provide guidance on commissioning requirements and procedures, such
as management, design for commissioning, access, testing,
measurements and tolerances, installed transducers, specification for
portable measuring equipment, etc. Locally Architectural Services

1 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Air distribution systems. CIBSE. Commissioning Code A.
http://www.cibse.org/index.cfm
2 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Water distribution systems. CIBSE Commissioning Code W.
3 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Automatic controls. CIBSE Commissioning Code C.
4 Building Services Research and Information Association. Commissioning air systems. Application procedures for buildings.
http://www.bsria.co.uk/
5 ASHRAE. New Building Commissioning. http://www.ashrae.org/

Page 4-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Department publishes commissioning procedures for Government

buildings [e.g. 6].
Effective commissioning and proper instructions on operations and
maintenance procedures have been shown to improve the operating
efficiency and environmental performance of a building over its life cycle.
The T&C requirements should cover all renewable systems, water
conservation systems, building services systems (particularly the energy
system) related to the BEAM Plus including the BMS/BAS system and all
hydraulic systems. Examples on HVAC systems include, but not limited
to:

• chillers;
• cooling towers;
• controls for central plant and for HVAC, including, if present, the
energy management system or building automation system (BAS);
• unitary and split-air conditioners;
• fans;
• pumps;
• heat exchangers;
• boilers;
• domestic hot water and hot water heaters;
• ducts and associated dampers;
• piping and associated valves; and
• waste heat recovery, thermal storage, etc.
The Commissioning Agent need to prepare a Commissioning plan with
details of how the review and testing should be carried out. His work
should compliment and not cross over the responsibility of the building
services/BMS designers who also have commissioning responsibility.

6 Architectural Services Department, Building Services Branch. Testing and Commissioning Procedure No. 1 for Air-
conditioning, Refrigeration, Ventilation and Control System in Government Buildings.
http://www.archsd.gov.hk/english/publications/publication_pdf/e70.pdf

Page 4-22
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

4 ENERGY USE 4.4 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

EU 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Enable building operators to implement the design intent, be able to

monitor the performance of the building, and maintain the performance.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Operations and maintenance manual

1 credit for providing a fully documented operations and maintenance
manual to the minimum specified.
b) Energy management manual
1 credit for providing fully documented instructions that enables systems
to operate at a high level of energy efficiency.
c) Operator training and operation and maintenance facilities
1 credit for providing training for operations and maintenance staff to the
minimum specified; and demonstrating that adequate maintenance
facilities are provided for operations and maintenance work.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit details of the provisions for operation and
maintenance as outlined below.
a) Operations and maintenance manual
The design intent and basis of design shall be included as a defining part
of the operations and maintenance manual and the energy management
manual. The manual shall include the details given in Section 8.5.6 as a
minimum.
Where an adequate contract sum was provided for the preparation of
comprehensive operations and maintenance manual, and the manual
covers adequately the major energy consuming building services
systems and equipment the credit shall be awarded.
b) Energy management
Where the operations and maintenance manual, or a dedicated energy
management manual is provided, and meets the requirements of Section
8.5.7 as a minimum, the credit shall be awarded.
c) Operator training and operation and maintenance facilities
The training program shall cover as a minimum the items listed in
Section 8.5.8. Details of the facilities for operation and maintenance,
such as the workshop(s), office accommodation, computing facilities etc.,
shall be provided, and the case made to demonstrate the adequacy of
the facilities in relation to the size and complexity of the building served.
Where the Client can verify that training of the building’s operations and
maintenance staff was undertaken for all commissioned systems and
major equipment, using the operations and maintenance manual, and
the energy management manual as the basis for the training, and
demonstrate that the provided operation and maintenance facilities are
adequate, the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Facilities to carry out basic maintenance and equipment for monitoring
consumption can help improve operating efficiency and environmental

Page 4-23
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

performance of a building. ASHRAE [1] and BSRIA [2] provide advice

on the preparations for operation and maintenance to ensure the safe
and efficient operation of each system and major item of plant, including
a description of the operating modes, a recommended strategy for
operation and control, control data and set points, interlocks between
plant items, etc.

1 American Society of Heating, Air-conditioning, and Refrigerating Engineers. Preparation of Operating and Maintenance
Documentation for Building Systems. ASHRAE Guideline 4. Atlanta.
2 J H Armstrong. Building Services Research and Information Association. Operating and Maintenance Manuals for Building
Services Installations. Application Guide 1/87. Dec. 1990.

Page 4-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 12 METERING AND MONITORING

4 ENERGY USE 4.4 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

EU 12 METERING AND MONITORING

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES Enable building operators to measure, monitor and develop measures to

improve the performance of the building’s engineering systems,
particularly concerning energy use.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES As a prerequisite metering provisions shall meet the requirements of the

Government’s energy codes.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for installation of:

metering that allows monitoring of electricity use by the main chiller plant
and auxiliaries;
instruments for monitoring building cooling load and operating
parameters central chiller plant;
metering that allows separate monitoring of electricity use by the air side
of the HVAC system; and
metering for landlord’s electricity consumption in common space/public
areas.

ASSESSMENT The Owner/Operator shall provide details of the measuring and

monitoring equipment installed and commissioning records of
consumption and chiller plant performance, to demonstrate that
electricity use and performance can be monitored as stipulated.
Monitoring of central chiller plant will be assessed on the basis of BSRIA
Technical Note TN 7/94 [ 1 ] or similar specification published by an
appropriate authority. The monitoring system shall allow the overall
performance of the plant and individual chillers to be determined for all
operating modes and range of operating conditions.
Electricity metering (for input power, energy and maximum demand),
together with associated measuring transducers/transformers for
indicating power and energy, shall comply with an appropriate standard
such as BS EN [ 2 ] and to at least accuracy class 1. Sensors for
temperature, flow rate and pressure measurements shall meet the
minimum accuracy requirements in ASHRAE Standard 114 [3] or similar
equivalent.
Metering provision shall identify electricity use patterns for major air
handling equipment, such as centralised air handling units for
floors/zones, large designated areas, etc.
Metering provision shall identify the electricity use pattern for each major
system fed from the Owner/Operator’s main switchboard(s), i.e.,
landlords lighting and small power, transportation, plumbing & drainage
systems, major air handling equipment, such as centralised air handling
units for floors/zones, large designated areas, etc.

1 K Calder. The Building Services Research and Information Association. Practical Chiller System Monitoring. Technical
Note TN 7/94. 1994.
2 British Standard BS EN 60521:1995. Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating-current watthour meters.
3 ASHRAE. Standard 114-1986: Energy Management Control Systems Instrumentation, American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc., USA. 1987.

Page 4-25
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 12 METERING AND MONITORING

BACKGROUND Surveys of a large number of buildings in Hong Kong [4] revealed that
buildings are in general insufficiently equipped with measuring and
monitoring devices for measurement of energy performance. This makes
it particularly difficult when attempting to improve the energy efficiency of
buildings and major plant, such as central chiller plant.
Opportunities for reducing energy consumption can be identified only if it
is possible to monitor performance of the systems. Good monitoring
systems can allow better control of part load performance, not only
improving efficiency, but also improving the control of the building’s
thermal comfort conditions. Plant control can be altered and the results
monitored to show how energy consumption changes. Unseen plant
faults, which are not evident during routine maintenance, but which can
be identified from analysis of performance trend data. Control problems
can be detected and control strategies improved to match the building
demand.
The cost of instrumentation is not significant when compared to
installation costs and the accuracy should be such as to provide
meaningful readings. The payback on improved performance can be
very high taking into account the reduction in electricity consumption and
demand charges resulting from more efficient plant operation.

4 Yik F W H, Chiu T W. Measuring instruments in chiller plants and uncertainties in performance evaluation, Transactions,
The Hong Kong Institution of Engineers, 5(3) 95-99.

Page 4-26
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS ENERGY USE (EU)
VERSION 1.1 EU 13 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDING LAYOUT

4 ENERGY USE 4.5 BUILDING DESIGN FOR ENERGY EFFICIENCY

EU 13 ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDING LAYOUT

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVES To enhance the building energy efficiency through environmentally

considered planning and architectural design.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating the fulfillment of at least 3 items out of the
following strategies.
2 credits for demonstrating the fulfillment of all of the following strategies.
a) Consideration of built form and building orientation to enhance
energy conservation;
b) Consideration of optimum spatial planning to enhance energy
conservation;
c) Consideration of building permeability provisions of building
features to enhance the use of natural ventilation;
d) Provision of fixed or movable horizontal/vertical external shading
devices; and
e) Provision of movable external shading devices for major atrium
facade windows or skylights

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit documentation to demonstrate the compliance

with the strategy indicators:
• Clear definition of the objectives of each energy efficient building
design, features, evaluated options, applications and verification of
the design strategies.
• Annual energy saving estimation.
• Other relevant supporting documentation for improved and
innovative ideas.
• Relevant information to demonstrate sufficient effort has been
made on the required provisions and considerations, as well as
the final design solution that addressed the commitments.
Where at least 3 items are achieved the credit shall be awarded. The
second credit shall be awarded for all strategies achieved.

Page 4-27
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1

5 WATER USE 5.P PREREQUISITE

5.1 WATER CONSERVATION
5.2 EFFLUENT

INTRODUCTION Water is known to be in scarce supply in many parts of the world, even
though it is also in surplus elsewhere. Globally, water conservation is
already a major issue [1]. Hong Kong has long enjoyed a reliable and
economic supply of most of its fresh water needs from the Mainland.
However, with increased industrialisation of Guangdong Province there
is likely to be greater competition for water supply, meaning that water
conservation may become a significant issue for Hong Kong in the
future.
Hong Kong should look to means to improve the utilisation and
conservation of water resources.

5.P PREREQUISITE WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY

WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE

BACKGROUND In Hong Kong, the WSD controls water quality, such as taste, odour,
hardness, sediment, pH, the quantity of dissolve iron, etc., in order to
provide water that meets the Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality
recommended by the World Health Organization (WHO). Samples are
taken at treatment works, service reservoirs, consumer taps and
analysed at site and at WSD’s laboratories. Nevertheless, the
unsatisfactory quality of potable water delivered at taps may be due to
the corrosion of water pipes or the cleanliness of water tanks. As a
consequence the use of bottled water is not common, but is not
considered to be an environmentally preferred solution on account of the
production and transport requirements. To ensure the health of
consumers’ buildings need to ensure optimal potable water quality at the
tap - potable water that is both safe and acceptable in terms of taste,
colour and odour.
It is also necessary to reduce the potable water consumption. This can
be achieved through the application of water saving fixtures and the use
of non-potable water (e.g. harvested rainwater and recycled grey water)

5.1 WATER WU 1 ANNUAL WATER USE

CONSERVATION WU 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL
WU 3 WATER EFFICIENT IRRIGATION
WU 4 WATER RECYCLING
WU 5 WATER EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

WATER SUPPLY Except for a small number of villages scattered in the remotest areas,
over 99.9 per cent of Hong Kong’s population receives piped fresh water
supply. Sea water is supplied to about 80 per cent of the population for
toilet flushing, though mains fresh water is supplied to areas that are not
close to the seafront, or where the population is scattered and sparse.
Effort will be made to bring sea water to more places, including the Peak,
part of Southern District, Sai Kung, the outlying islands, Tin Shui Wai and
Yuen Long [ 2 ]. Raw water from the Dongjiang River in Guangdong
continues to be Hong Kong’s main source of supply and makes up about
70-80 per cent of Hong Kong’s needs.
In 2007 the average daily consumption of fresh water was 2.61 million

1 OECD. Environmental Performance Reviews - Water. Performance and Challenges in OECD Countries. 2003.
http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/12/38/2498050.pdf
2 Water Supplies Department. Annual Report. http://www.info.gov.hk/wsd/en/html/pdf/rpt0203/pdf/09_water_supply.pdf

Page 5-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1

cubic metres while the average daily use of sea water for flushing stood
at 0.74 million cubic metres [3]. Total freshwater consumption was 951
million cubic metres, with domestic consumption accounting for over
50%, and around 25% consumed by the service trade. Despite the
continued decline in industrial consumption there is an annual trend of
rising consumption due to an increase in domestic consumption. Based
on projected population growth for the period, the domestic and service
uses, being the key components of our fresh water consumption, are
expected to increase. Industrial use, for the same period, is expected to
drop because of further decline in water intensive industries. Wider use
of fresh water in water-cooled air-conditioning systems (WACS) will
contribute to consumption by the non-domestic sector.

CONSERVATION Although the demand growth has slowed in recent years, additional
water resources are still required to secure a full supply. The lack of
reservoir sites and high development costs limit the development of
further areas as water-gathering grounds. Other than expanding the use
of sea water for flushing and adopting water conservation measures,
Hong Kong has few options to reduce dependency on the Mainland.
There is opportunity to reduce potable water use through better design,
management and user awareness. There are also opportunities to
recycle used water and rain water in order to reduce the use of potable
water. Additional benefit of potable water conservation is reduced energy
use for transport and the cost of treatment of raw water.

BENCHMARKS Given the paucity of available data for Hong Kong and variability of
circumstances for different buildings and uses, BEAM provide default
assumptions for the calculation of the reduction in water consumption of
the project building when compared with an equivalent baseline spaces.
The default assumption including the flow rate and operating time of the
water device are given in Appendix 8.6. An information paper is also
available that explain the basis and origins of the default assumption.
Consequently, it is feasible to provide exact target for reducing
consumption with the base line.

5.2 EFFLUENT WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO FOUL SEWERS

BACKGROUND Whilst some 80% of users in Hong Kong are supplied with seawater for
flushing purposes there are environmental impacts associated with the
treatment and delivery of seawater, and the load imposed on municipal
sewage treatment plants. Measures taken to reduce volumes of effluent
flows have significant environmental benefits.

3 Water Supplies Department. Annual Report.

http://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/share/annual_reports/rpt0708/index.htm

Page 5-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY

5 WATER USE 5.P PREREQUISITE

WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that the quality of potable water delivered to building users is
satisfactory.

REQUIREMENT Demonstrating that the quality of potable water meets the referenced
drinking water quality standards at all points of use.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide details of the analysis of samples taken from a
selection of potable water outlets used to supply human consumption.
Sampling should be systematic, such as described in ISO 5667 [1], but
as a minimum samples shall be taken at all the farthest point(s) of use in
the distribution system from the storage tank, and shall include sampling
for each water supply tank used in the building. If water quality at all
sample points meets with the Water Supplies Department (WSD)
Guidelines the requirement shall be fulfilled.

BACKGROUND According to the agreement between Guangdong and Hong Kong, "all
water supplies to Hong Kong will meet the water quality standard of
Guangdong Province currently in force and will not be inferior to the
Class II water quality standard stipulated in the Environmental Quality
Standard for Surface Water GB 3838-83 published by the People’s
Republic of China in 1983" [2].

QUALITY OF WATER It is closely monitored by WSD on entering Hong Kong at reception

SUPPLIED FROM THE points at Muk Wu Pumping Stations at the border and again at all
MAINLAND treatment works receiving the raw water. Laboratory tests are performed
daily on various parameters such as ammonia and manganese for
monitoring because their levels in the raw water are useful reference for
dosing of treatment chemicals. The sampling and testing frequencies of
individual parameters vary from 4-monthly to three times per day, and if
necessary as frequently as hourly. All raw water is delivered to water
treatment works where it is treated to comply chemically and
bacteriologically with the WHO Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality
(2006) before being supplied to consumers.

SUPPLY QUALITY According to WSD [3] Hong Kong’s water is of the safest quality and
among the best in the world. However, it is affected in some instances by
the inadequate maintenance of internal plumbing systems before it
reaches customers’ taps and this can cause discolouration of the water.
To encourage the building owners to maintain their plumbing systems
properly and with the endorsement of the Advisory Committee on the
Quality of Water Supplies (ACQWS), the Water Supplies Department
launched the Fresh Water Plumbing Quality Maintenance Recognition
Scheme [ 4 ] in 2002. Since 1 January 2008, the Scheme has been
renamed as Quality Water Recognition Scheme for Buildings. The
successful applicants will be awarded a Certificate to recognise proper
maintenance of the plumbing systems inside a building for keeping the
good quality of government supplied water throughout the inside service
up to the consumers’ taps.

1 ISO 5667-5: 1991. Water quality — Part 6: Sampling — Section 6.5 Guidance on sampling of drinking water and water
used for food and beverage processing.
2 Water Supplies Department. ACQWS Paper No. 5. Raw Water Quality Monitoring in Hong Kong.
3 Water Supplies Department. Annual Report. http://www.info.gov.hk/wsd/en/html/pdf/rpt0203/pdf/08_water_quality.pdf
4 Water Supplies Department. Fresh Water Plumbing Maintenance Guide.
http://www.wsd.gov.hk/filemanager/en/share/pdf/FWPMGe.pdf

Page 5-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU P1 WATER QUALITY SURVEY

PLUMBING Section 14(3) of the Waterworks Ordinance (Chapter 102) empowers the
INSTALLATIONS Water Authority to prescribe the manner of construction or installation
and the nature, size and quality of the pipes and fittings of an inside
service or fire service for water supplies. All plumbing proposals for
inside service and fire service are therefore subject to the approval of the
Water Authority [5]. The Hong Kong Waterworks Standard Requirements
is a set of normal requirements which are applicable to the installation of
inside service and fire service in addition to the requirements that are set
out in Schedule 2 of the Waterworks Regulations (Chapter 102) or
modified under Regulation 25(1). Where necessary, additional
requirements may also be imposed on individual application for water
supply depending on the nature and type of the plumbing installations.

SAMPLING Part 6 of ISO 5667 [2] establishes detailed principles to be applied to the
design of sampling programmes, to sampling techniques and to the
handling and preservation of samples of drinking water and water used
for food and beverage processing (drinking water). It is important that the
sampling purpose be defined as accurately as possible and that the
measurements provide the required information in the most efficient and
statistically representative manner.

5 Water Supplies Department. Hong Kong Waterworks Standards for Plumbing Installations in Buildings.
http://www.info.gov.hk/wsd/en/html/pdf/hkwsre.pdf

Page 5-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE

5 WATER USE 5.P PREREQUISITE

WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the consumption of fresh (potable) water through the application
of water saving devices that have proven performance and reliability.

REQUIREMENT Demonstrate that the use of water efficient devices leads to an estimated
aggregate annual saving of 10%.

ASSESSMENT Given the paucity of available data for Hong Kong and variability of
circumstances for different buildings and uses, BEAM seeks to provide
flexibility in the assessment by:
• allowing Clients to submit justification for the award of credits, OR
• using the pro-forma calculation method described below.
A calculation spreadsheet, a template of which is available from the
BEAM Society, is used to determine the reduction of water consumption
in the project space compared with a similarly occupied space whose
water fittings and appliances conform to a baseline performance. Project
teams may use the template as a point of reference when performing
their own calculations.
The calculation takes into account the number of occupants, male to
female ratio, and the number of operational days per annum. This
information must be supplied by the client and may be stated in the
design brief or Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR).
Water use is based either on a ‘per operation’ basis or as the product of
flow rate and operation time. The default assumptions for the calculation
procedure are given in Appendix 8.6. An information paper is also
available that explains the basis and origins of the default assumptions.
The same number and type of water devices must be specified for the
base line space as are installed in the project space. Frequency of use of
water devices must be the same for both the base line and project
spaces. Clients must provide the manufacturers’ specifications for the
performance of installed water devices.
The Client shall submit a report that:
y details all installed devices and their water consumption rate or
discharge volume; and
y details devices installed to reduce the potential wastage of water
due to unnecessary operation of taps, etc;
The submitted report shall contain the following information:
y number of operational days per annum;
y number of occupants; and
y male to Female ratio.
There should then be two sets of tables, one for the project space, and
one for the base line space.
In the table each type of water using device shall be listed and all data
used shall be referenced to the source. The calculation shall include
water taps for bath, basin, pantry/ kitchen, and also shower heads, and
exclude water closet, urinal, water features, appliance and irrigation.
There should be separate entries for water use in male and female
facilities. Tabular data should be similar to the following format:

Page 5-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE

Water consumption of flow devices (faucets, showers, etc):

Device/ Rated Flow Duration of Daily Daily Water Use

equipment rate each Number of
operation Uses

Water consumption of utensil washing operation by hand:

Device/ Water Use Daily Daily Water Use

equipment per number of
operation operations
or cycle

The calculations can be summarised as follows:

Project space Base line space

Estimated total daily

consumption (litres)

Estimated total
annual consumption
(litres)

Estimated annual savings (litres) and percentage:

__________________________________________________________
Where it can be demonstrated that the provision of equipment meets the
intent, the requirement shall be fulfilled. Confirmation of the award of
credits shall take into account the appropriateness of the data used and
the estimated percentage of potable water saved.

BACKGROUND Hong Kong differs from most other places in the world in that the majority
of offices have a saltwater flushing supply rather than using potable
water. Therefore the scope for potable water reductions may be more
limited here than elsewhere. Locally, neither the quantification of water
use nor the potential for savings has been addressed in the research
literature. Nevertheless, evidence from other countries suggests that
reductions in water use may be achieved through the use of water
efficient devices and automatic controls.
For the majority of projects, a limited amount of hand washing and
perhaps some manual dish washing will take place in the pantry. It is not
the intention to include water used for washing food or produce (required
for hygiene), nor water used for coffee making machines, etc.
There is an increasing availability of devices and plumbing fixtures which
have demonstrated an ability to save water over the lifetime of the
system if installed and maintained properly. Flow rates can be controlled
to reduce excessive discharge at taps, faucets and showers without
detriment to the quality of water delivery. Substantial evidence shows
that the use of water-efficient plumbing fixtures conserves water [1]. A
number of studies in the US have measured the impact of installing
water-efficient plumbing fixtures through sophisticated sensors, before-
and- after comparisons of water bills, or other means. Although the
results varied, the studies generally concluded that low-flow fixtures are
effective in saving water.
High efficiency devices include low flow rate faucets or faucets with

1 United States General Accounting Office. Report to Congressional Requesters. Water Infrastructure. Water-Efficient
Plumbing Fixtures Reduce Water Consumption and Wastewater Flows. GA RCED-00-23. August 2000.

Page 5-6
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU P2 MINIMUM WATER SAVING PERFORMANCE

aerated flows. However it must be demonstrated that the actual quantity

of water is reduced per standard operation (e.g. in the case of hand
washing show that a reduced flow rate does not result in an extended
hand washing time resulting in no reduction in water volume used).
The provision of automatic shut-off devices, particular in public use
areas, can save significant amounts of water. Examples of automatic
shut-off devices are spring-loaded (or push-once) taps, electronic
proximity sensors, etc., but excluding timed shut-off devices.

SYNERGIES There have been concerns that certain low flow devices such as aerated
faucets may increase the risk of Legionella transmission [2]. Legionella
concerns are addressed in credit Wu P1 Water Quality Survey.
Water recycling schemes are rare in Hong Kong. If such schemes are
employed, project teams are encouraged to apply for credits under the
Innovations and Additions section.

2 Prior, J. Sustainable retail premises: an environmental guide to design, refurbishment and management of retail premises,
Building Research Establishment, Watford, 1999.

Page 5-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 1 ANNUAL WATER USE

5 WATER USE 5.1 WATER CONSERVATION

WU 1 ANNUAL WATER USE

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the consumption of fresh (potable) water through the application
of water saving devices that has proven performance and reliability.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES WU P2 Minimum Water Saving Performance and compliance with

Waterworks Regulation Chapter 102A [1].

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that the use of water efficient devices leads to
an estimated aggregate annual saving of 20%.
2 credits for demonstrating an estimated annual saving of 25%.
3 credits for demonstrating an estimated annual saving of 30%.

ASSESSMENT Where the Client can demonstrate that the provision of equipment meets
the intent and the target percentage of reduction can be achieved, the
credit(s) shall be awarded according to the percentage of reduction
achieved. The methodology shall be referred to the prerequisite Wu P2.

1 Government of HKSAR Water, Bi-lingual Laws Information System (BLIS), Waterworks Regulations Chapter 102A.
http://www.legislation.gov.hk/blis_export.nsf/findEngSection?OpenAgent&View_name=ProCurAllEngDoc&section_choose
=CAP%20102A%20%20WATERWORKS%20REGULATIONS&chapter_choose=Chapter%20102%20WATERWORKS%2
0ORDINANCE

Page 5-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL

5 WATER USE 5.1 WATER CONSERVATION

WU 2 MONITORING AND CONTROL

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce wastage of fresh water and allow for auditing of water use.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with Waterworks Regulation Chapter 102A Regulation 32.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for installation of devices to monitor water leakage within the
fresh water distribution system.

ASSESSMENT The assessment will seek to establish if means are in place that can
effectively limit the wastage of water by detecting water leaks in buried
pipework Various approaches are available and BEAM is not intended to
be prescriptive as to which should be used.
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing any system for monitoring water leaks within internal plumbing
installations.
Where it can be demonstrated that the provisions of equipment meet the
intent, the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Detection of water leaks in service pipework also presents an opportunity

to save water, and perhaps more importantly, reduce the potential for
structural damage as well as the creation of unhygienic conditions.

WATER SEEPAGE Water seepage has been a cause for concern to a number of
Government departments including the Buildings Department [ 1 ].
Causes of seepage are many and varied but one of the common sources
of seepage relates to water-borne piping embedded in the structural
members of a building.
Water seepage arising from embedded piping causes not only nuisance
but also deterioration to the structural member of a building if unattended
for a prolonged period. Designers are strongly advised to design the
routing of all water-borne piping off structural elements to facilitate the
indispensable need for repair and replacement of such piping during the
design life of the building, which would normally outlast the design life of
the piping. The huge benefit to the consumers and the public that this will
bring about in terms of easy maintenance of the building for its entire
design life will certainly outweigh the efforts at the design stage of a
building project.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-105 Water Seepage.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP105.pdf

Page 5-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 3 WATER EFFICIENT IRRIGATION

5 WATER USE 5.1 WATER CONSERVATION

WU 3 WATER EFFICIENT IRRIGATION

EXCLUSIONS Where soft landscaping and planting coverage is less than 50% of the
area of the building footprint.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the reliance on potable water for irrigation.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for the use of an irrigation system which does not require the use
of municipal fresh water after a period of establishment is complete.
Alternately,
1 credit for demonstrating highly efficient irrigation technology and/or the
use of harvested rainwater and/or recycled grey water to reduce fresh
water consumption for irrigation by 50% or more in comparison with
conventional irrigation of water intensive planting.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
describing the soft landscaping design, species of plants, etc, and
confirm that, after a period of establishment of the plants and vegetation
is complete, irrigation will not require the use of municipal potable (fresh)
water supply.
Alternatively, the Client shall demonstrate highly efficient irrigation
technology and/or the use of harvested rainwater and/or recycled grey
water to reduce fresh (mains) water consumption for irrigation by 50% or
more in comparison with conventional irrigation of water intensive
planting.
The water use reduction may be demonstrated by use of metered data
compared to any suitable benchmark, or may be demonstrated by
calculations provided by a suitably qualified person.

BACKGROUND Where a building development contains significant landscaping, as

defined by the coverage of soft landscaping, greenery and planters there
is likely to be a significant consumption of potable water. Irrigation by
lower quality (harvested or recycled) water can be equally effective.
Native plants can survive without additional watering, and require less
fertiliser and pesticides, thereby reducing impacts on local waters.
There is the potential to use well water, but due consideration must be
made in respect of the requirements of the Water Authority. Normally,
wells may not be sunk on government land [ 1 ]. Permission under
Building (Construction) Regulation 85 to sink a well in private land will be
given only where the:
• well yield is adequate; and
• water abstraction will not adversely affect nearby services
buildings, structures or land.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineer. PNAP Np. APP-4 Water Supply and Wells.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP004.pdf

Page 5-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 4 WATER RECYCLING

5 WATER USE 5.1 WATER CONSERVATION

WU 4 WATER RECYCLING

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage harvesting of rainwater and recycling of grey water in order to

reduce consumption of fresh water.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the water quality standards appropriate to the use of the
recycled water.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Harvested rainwater

1 credit for harvesting of rainwater which will lead to a reduction of 5% or
more in the consumption of fresh water.
b) Recycled water
1 credit where recycled grey water will lead to a reduction of 5% or more
in the consumption of fresh water.
c) A combination
1 BONUS credit where harvesting and/or recycling leads to a reduction
of 10% or more in the consumption of fresh water.

ASSESSMENT Harvested and/or recycled water shall satisfy the water quality
requirements for the intended reuse, e.g., cleaning, irrigation, use in heat
rejection systems, toilet flushing, etc.
a) Harvested rainwater
The Client shall provide a report detailing the system or systems installed
for the purpose of harvesting rainwater, the details of the expectations in
respect of savings in the consumption of fresh water, and shall
demonstrate that the rainwater is of a quality appropriate to the end use.
Where it can be demonstrated that the expected savings in fresh water
use will be 5% or more, either based on baseline building estimates (see
Section WU P2) or any other appropriate estimation, the credit shall be
awarded.
b) Recycled water
The Client shall provide a report detailing system or systems installed for
the purpose of recycling grey water, details of the expectations in respect
of savings in the consumption of potable water and shall demonstrate
that the treated grey water is of a quality appropriate to the end use. The
condensed water shall be included in the calculation of recycled grey
water. Where it can be demonstrated that the expected savings in fresh
water use will be 5% or more, either based on baseline building
estimates (see Section WU P2) or any other appropriate estimation, the
credit shall be awarded.
c) A combination
The Client shall provide a report detailing system or systems installed for
the purpose of harvesting rainwater and/ or recycling grey water, details
of the expectations in respect of savings in the consumption of potable
water and shall demonstrate that the rainwater and/ or treated grey water
is of a quality appropriate to the end use. Where it can be demonstrated
that the expected savings in fresh water use will be 10% or more, either
based on baseline building estimates (see Section WU P2) or any other
appropriate estimation, the credit shall be awarded.

Page 5-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 4 WATER RECYCLING

BACKGROUND Recycling of grey water not only helps to reduce the demand for potable
water supply, but also provides a reliable source in case of supply
interruptions. When properly done it is possible to reuse all wastewater
for various purposes. A grey water recycling system is one which collects
grey water (reclaimed condensate, etc) for treatment and distributes the
treated water to the points of use, such as for irrigation, cleaning, or for
toilet flushing where seawater supply is not available. Another potential
use of the recycled water is for evaporative heat rejection system in air
conditioning, which will provide an energy benefit and improves the cost-
effectiveness of water recycling.
Water quality should meet appropriate criteria, such as that outlined by
ACQWS [1], the Building Research and Information Association [2], or
similar authoritative guidance.
Due consideration has to be made for the amounts of water that can be
generated, and how this matches with the amounts that can be put to
use; else there is little incentive to recycle.
The problem for Hong Kong’s high-rise dense built environments is that
the potential for collecting rainwater is limited. Yang et al [3] provide the
main parameters and their relationship to estimate the amount of
rainwater that may be collected on different roof areas and different sizes
of tanks, based on the amount of rainfall as recorded by the Hong Kong
Observatory.
Well-populated buildings not supplied with seawater for flushing would
be a good candidate from water recycling, otherwise reuse is likely to be
limited to cleaning, irrigation, heat rejection, etc., which depends on the
extent of cleaning, irrigation and the types of equipment used for cooling,
respectively.

1 Water Supplies Department. ACQWS Paper No. 14 – Treated Effluent Reuse at Ngong Ping.
2 BSRIA, Greywater and Rainwater Systems: Recommended UK Requirements, The Building Services Research and
Information Association, Final Report 13034/1, March 1997.
3 Yang H X, Chow W H, Burnett J. Water and Energy Conservation of Rainwater Collection Systems on Building Roofs.
Advances in Building Technology, Vol. 2. Elsevier. 2002. pp 1281-1288.

Page 5-12
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 5 WATER EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

5 WATER USE 5.1 WATER CONSERVATION

WU 5 WATER EFFICIENT APPLIANCES

EXCLUSIONS Buildings in which facilities and/or appliances are not installed by the
developer.

OBJECTIVES Encourage the wider use of water efficient facilities and appliances.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for installing water efficient appliances that are at least 20%
more efficient than otherwise.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide details of all the appliances installed in the
building and evidence as to the water use ratings of each type and size
of appliance. Where it can be demonstrated that water use efficiency is
high, typically 20% better than appliances not marketed as water
efficient, the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Water use in washing machines, dishwashers in homes, in hotel

laundries, etc., can be a substantial part of consumption of fresh water.
Likewise there is opportunity for reduce water loss from water features
and recreational facilities. BEAM encourages attention to the selection of
water efficient equipment and design of water using facilities that include
means to save water.

Page 5-13
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO FOUL SEWERS

5 WATER USE 5.2 EFFLUENT

WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO FOUL SEWERS

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the volumes of sewage discharged from buildings thereby

reducing burdens on municipal sewage supply and treatment facilities.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Water Pollution Control Ordinance, and the Building
(Standards of sanitary fitments, plumbing, drainage works and latrines)
Regulations Chapter 123 Regulation 17.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating a reduction in annual sewage volumes by 20%
or more.

ASSESSMENT Where the Client can demonstrate that the target percentage of
reduction in annual sewage volume can be achieved, either based on the
default assumptions for the calculation procedure given in Appendix 8.6
or any other appropriate estimation, the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Demand for flushing and potable water should be assessed with regard
to Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works
and Latrines) Regulation 10A(4). "Potable water" refers to a supply of
water for the purposes of Regulation 10A(2). The quantity of flushing
water required is given in PNAP 17 [1].
Regulation 19 of the Building (Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing,
Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations (Drainage Regulations)
requires flushing cisterns of water closet fitments to have a discharge
between 9 and 14 litres. Under the current Waterworks Regulations,
flushing cisterns shall be of the valveless syphonic type and the flushing
volume shall be within the range of 7.5 and 15 litres [2].
With the application of modern technology in the design of water closet
flushing system, the effectiveness of flushing can be maintained with a
reduced discharge. Therefore, to conserve our valuable water resources,
both the Building Authority (BA) and Water Authority would have no
objection to relaxing the use of syphonic flushing cisterns with discharge
less than that required by the current regulations provided that the
associated toilet bowls are compatible with the cisterns and the syphonic
action is sufficient for the wastes in the toilet bowls to be cleared
effectively by a single flush. WSD has relaxed the requirements in
respect of the flushing mechanism and minimum flushing volume as
follows:
• the use of valve type flushing devices (mechanical or sensor type
with single flush or dual flush) in addition to valveless syphonic type
flushing apparatuses; and
• the use of flushing devices which are capable to give a single
flushing volume of less than 7.5 litres.
The capacity of the flushing cistern in the case of trough water-closets
and urinals shall be approved by the Water Authority subject to the

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-4 Water Supply and Wells.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP004.pdf
2 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-99Flushing Volume for Flushing Cisterns.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP099.pdf

Page 5-14
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS WATER USE (WU)
VERSION 1.1 WU 6 EFFLUENT DISCHARGE TO FOUL SEWERS

discharge in the case of trough water-closets being not less than 9 litres
of water for every metre of the channel and the discharge in the case of
urinals being not less than 4.5 litres of water for every basin or stall, or in
the case of a trough urinal, every metre thereof.

Accordingly, for the purposes of determining the number of persons for

whom sanitary fitments should be provided in shops and department
stores the determination shall be at the rate of 1 person for every 15
square metres of usable floor area [3].

3 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineer. PNAP No. APP-6 Shops and Department Stores Building Regulation 5.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP006.pdf

Page 5-15
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1

6 INDOOR 6.P PREREQUISITE

ENVIRONMENTAL 6.1 SECURITY
QUALITY 6.2 HYGIENE
6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
6.4 VENTILATION
6.5 THERMAL COMFORT
6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY
6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE
6.8 BUILDING AMENITIES

INTRODUCTION This section of BEAM considers some of the broader issues of

sustainable buildings as well as the most significant indoor performance
issues. The broader issues include provisions for maintaining hygiene
and the amenities provided in the building, which have impact on the
quality of working and living environments. Indoor environmental quality
(IEQ) includes indoor air quality and ventilation provisions that safeguard
health. Considerations of these issues, as well as thermal comfort,
lighting, acoustics and noise impact on well-being, comfort and
productivity.
Given that on average a person in Hong Kong spends around 85% of
their time indoors [1], indoor environmental conditions have a significant
impact on the quality of life. Buildings should provide safe, healthy,
convenient and efficient indoor spaces. Poor indoor environments in
commercial and institutional buildings can impact on productivity and
may impose health risks to users. The design, management, operation
and maintenance of buildings should seek to provide for good quality
indoor environments, but with optimum use of energy and other
resources.

ASSESSMENT OF In keeping with the BEAM assessment approach the assessment of

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTS indoor environments is mainly performance based, with the majority of
credits awarded for meeting performance specifications at the
commissioning stage before handover and occupancy. In addition to
performance, credits are also awarded for compliance with certain
building features with known potential to enhance performance.
Assessment is not intended to embrace the negative impacts from the
user of premises, and it is clear that a building that is not yet fully fitted-
out, furnished and occupied cannot be fully tested for compliance to all
possible performance specifications. This BEAM version seeks to ensure
that buildings and systems are tested are far as possible to ensure that
intended performance is likely to be achieved, providing that
tenants/occupants follow the fitting-out specifications and guidance for
use, appropriate to the type of the premises they occupy.

The assessment of indoor air quality (IAQ), ventilation and thermal

comfort takes into account:
• the extent to which the building and installed engineering systems
can provide for comfortable and healthy premises; and
• the potential ‘worst-case’ scenario in respect of exposure to harmful
substances found in indoor air.
To allow for the differences in environmental conditions likely to be found
in different buildings/premises, for the purposes of assessment this

1 Chau C K, Tu E Y, Chan D W T, Burnett J. Estimating the total exposure to air pollutants for population age groups in
Hong Kong. Environment International. Vol. 27. 2002. pp 617–630.

Page 6-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1

BEAM version considers buildings as follows:

• Air-conditioned Buildings;
• Naturally Ventilated Buildings; and
• Mechanically Ventilated Buildings.

AIR-CONDITIONED Thermal comfort conditions and ventilation in air-conditioned

BUILDINGS buildings/premises which are designed on the principle of ‘build tight,
ventilate right’ are intended to be controlled within prescribed design
limits. The thermal comfort criteria used for the design, such as ISO 7730
[2], ASHRAE 55 [3] etc, will be defined by the Client appropriate to the
type and use of the premises included in the development, and is a basic
performance specification.
This BEAM version takes into account the Government’s Indoor Air
Quality Certification Scheme [4], as implementation of the Scheme can
have a significant impact on the performance of air-conditioned buildings
through improved design, construction, and operating practices.

AIR-CONDITIONED/ In buildings/premises with operable windows or other ventilation

NATURALLY openings the extent to which natural ventilation is utilised for cooling will
VENTILATED BUILDINGS be dependent on user preference. Besides the prevailing climatic
conditions this is likely to be influenced by the level of outside air
pollution and noise. Thermal comfort conditions when operating air-
conditioning will also depend on user preference, which can be met
providing units are sized and installed to meet the required cooling load.
Considerations for thermal comfort and IAQ in occupied/habitable rooms
need to take into account conditions when premises are air-conditioned
or otherwise ‘closed’ because of cold or inclement weather, and when
more ‘open’ to take advantage of natural ventilation. Consideration is
given to worst case conditions that might impact on the health of building
users.

6.P PREREQUISITE IEQ P1 MINIMUM VENTILATION PERFORMANCE

BACKGROUND This requirement ensures that ventilation systems of the air-conditioned

premises have been designed according to recognised procedures to
provide a minimum ventilation rate of sufficient quality and quantity.

6.1 SECURITY IEQ 1 SECURITY

BACKGROUND Provisions for security are considered to enhance the building

performance and are considered here as credits.

6.2 HYGIENE IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

IEQ 3 BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION
IEQ 4 WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES

BACKGROUND Post-SARs has seen a lot more attention to building hygiene. Clearly,
certain features of building and building services design, e.g. plumbing
and drainage systems, are likely to have contributed to health problems.
Proper provisions for inspection, cleaning and maintenance allows for
comprehensive management of hygiene in buildings.

2 International Organization for Standardization. International standard 7730, Moderate thermal environments –
Determination of the PMV and PPD indices and specification of the conditions for thermal comfort. Geneva 1995.
3 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE 55-2007: Thermal Environmental
Conditions for Human Occupancy. Atlanta 2007.
4 Indoor Air Quality Management Group. A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Places.
http://www.iaq.gov.hk/cert/doc/CertGuide-eng.pdf

Page 6-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1

6.3 INDOOR AIR IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

QUALITY IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION
IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION
IEQ 8 IAQ IN CAR PARKS

BACKGROUND Indoor air quality (IAQ) is defined by a list of the constituents, in both
solid and gaseous states, in air. Subjectively, IAQ is the human
perceived response to nasal irritants in the air. ASHRAE [ 5 ] defines
‘Acceptable Indoor Air Quality’ as “air in which there are no known
contaminants at harmful concentrations as determined by cognizant
authorities and with which a substantial majority (80% or more) of the
people exposed do not express dissatisfaction.”
A key factor in determining appropriate standards for IAQ is the duration
of exposure. Exposure to indoor pollutants for a matter of minutes (e.g.
car parks), hours (e.g. entertainment establishments), or over a working
day (e.g. offices, classrooms, etc) will be different for most parameters
depending on dose and response. For example, limits of the exposure
considered acceptable for the general public, include the young and
infirm, are different from exposures considered acceptable for the
sedentary workplace, and certainly, the industrial workplace.
Sources of indoor pollutants include outdoor pollutants, building fabric
materials, interior finishes, building systems and equipment, appliances,
consumer products, and the occupants and their activities. The selection
of building materials is important, as pollutants can be emitted for weeks,
months or even years after installation. The design of the building
envelope should consider moisture and vapour penetration, and
infiltration. Air intakes should be sited away from pollutant sources and
avoid short-circuiting with exhausts. Ventilation system design should not
introduce pollutants, and filtering should be effective in removing outdoor
pollutants.

6.4 VENTILATION IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION

IEQ 10 BACKGROUND VENTILATION
IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION
IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

BACKGROUND The outside air ventilation to a centrally air-conditioned building should

be adequate for the intended levels of occupancy. The criteria often used
to indicate satisfactory provision of ventilation in occupied premises is
the level of carbon dioxide (CO2) at design occupancy. In Hong Kong it is
usual that the minimum values for ventilation are rates for various spaces
will be specified in accordance with an appropriate version of ASHRAE
62 [5], or equivalent design standard. However, what is critical to the
adequacy of the ventilation is the amount of supply reaching the
breathing zone of occupants. Inadequate distribution within zones or
within rooms can result in dissatisfaction at a local level, event if the total
ventilation supplied to a space meets specification. It is not possible to
use CO2 as a measure of satisfactory performance in unoccupied
premises, but it is possible to determine if ventilation will be satisfactory
through measurement of ventilation rate and ventilation effectiveness.
There are three basic requirements for ventilation of occupied rooms and
rooms used for habitation [6,7]; background ventilation, local exhaust,

5 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE 62.1-2007: Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality. Atlanta 2007.
6 ASHRAE Standard 62.2. Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low-Rise Residential Buildings. Atlanta 2007.
7 UK Department of the Environment and Welsh Office. The Building Regulations Part F Ventilation.

Page 6-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1

and source control. The concepts can be applied to workplaces,

classrooms and similar workplaces where people spend long periods of
time. Background ventilation is intended to dilute the unavoidable
contaminant emissions from people and materials. Background
ventilation should be provided for control of radon levels in occupied and
habitable rooms, and reduce possibility of mould growth under conditions
of high humidity. Local exhaust is intended to remove contaminants from
those specific rooms, such as kitchens, in which concentrated sources
are expected.

6.5 THERMAL COMFORT IEQ 13 THERMAL COMFORT IN AIR-CONDITIONED PREMISES

IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

BACKGROUND This BEAM version does not specify the standards of performance for
air-conditioned buildings, as the performance criteria will be a variable
amongst building/premises types, and is also a matter of choice for the
Client. For example, preference may be for operating an air-conditioned
space at higher temperatures for the purposes of energy conservation.
This BEAM version seeks to ensure that buildings and systems are
tested are far as practicable to ensure that specified thermal comfort
conditions can be achieved under conditions of normal occupancy and
expected heat gains.

6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING

IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS
IEQ 17 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN AREAS NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED

BACKGROUND Although difficult to achieve in many building developments located in

the dense urban environments of Hong Kong daylight penetration into
work places and habitable rooms should be encouraged. Lack of daylight
and views to the external environment contributes to discomfort and to
dissatisfaction of users. Where daylight is accessible some form of
control at windows may be required to avoid glare from direct sunlight.
A consequence of poor lighting in work places is discomfort and loss of
working efficiency. Although interior lighting in workplaces presents one
of the most challenging design tasks, unfortunately often relatively little
attention is given to design for work spaces where productive and
creative activities take place.
To focus only on luminance level on the horizontal plane is insufficient.
The quality of an interior lighting scheme cannot be specified or
demonstrated through measurement of light sources and outputs alone,
but needs to consider the relationship of the light sources to the nature of
the space being illuminated, and visual tasks of users in the space.

6.7 ACOUSTICS AND IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS

NOISE IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION
IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE
IEQ 21 INDOOR VIBRATION

BACKGROUND Above certain levels indoor noise can cause discomfort, irritation and
interference with workplace activities. In addition, poor acoustics in
certain premises will interfere with speech intelligibility. Background
noise inside buildings comes from a number of sources, including noise
break-in from the surrounding environment and noise produced inside
the building, such as from building services equipment and adjoining
premises. Background noise should be limited to levels suitable for the
use of the premises in a building development, expressed as appropriate

Page 6-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1

criteria.
Many Hong Kong buildings housing noise sensitive premises are built
close to roads and railway lines such that ground transportation noise
impacts on occupants. Noise from fixed sources and aircraft may also
pose a problem for some developments. Good planning and design is
especially important to mitigate external noise. Noise mitigation
measures such as appropriate road surface design, screening by non-
noise sensitive building structures, podium structures or purpose built
barriers, orientation, or disposition and internal layout of buildings should
be explored in an effort to minimise rail and road traffic noise.
The design of a building façade, including windows, balconies, openings
for air-conditioning and ventilation, etc., is important in further reducing
the propagation of noise into noise sensitive premises, particularly where
external noise levels exceed the limits given in the Hong Kong Planning
Standards and Guidelines. Even where external sources of noise and/or
noise mitigation measures are such as to satisfy the guidelines, further
attention to noise attenuation is warranted on the grounds of comfort and
privacy.
The selection and erection of building services systems and equipment
also influences the background noise levels in certain locations, and may
also induce unwanted vibration. The sound insulation properties of floors
and internal walls are crucial in controlling noise propagation inside a
building. It is also necessary to consider how the design of premises
affects speech intelligibility.

6.8 BUILDING AMENITIES IEQ 22 ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITY

IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

BACKGROUND In recent years the HKSAR Government has sought to encourage better
building designs through various ‘green and innovative’ features [8,9]
that can enhance the quality of buildings, and have put in place a
number of incentives to encourage the adoption of such features.
Provisions that improve access for users, make for more enjoyable living
and working spaces, and ensure efficient services to meet the needs of
users, etc., all enhance the quality and efficiency of built environments
and thereby ensure buildings are more sustainable.

8 Buildings Department, Lands Department, Planning Department. Joint Practice Note No. 1. Green and Innovative
Buildings. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/joint/JPN01.pdf
9 Buildings Department, Lands Department, Planning Department. Joint Practice Note No. 2. Second Package of Incentives
to Promote Green and Innovative Buildings. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/joint/JPN02.pdf

Page 6-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ P1 MINIMUM VENTILATION PERFORMANCE

6 IEQ 6.P PREREQUISITE

IEQ P1 MINIMUM VENTILATION PERFORMANCE

EXCLUSIONS Residential and similar buildings without central air conditioning.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that a minimum quality and quantity of outdoor air is supplied to
spaces in the project in order to support the well-being and comfort of
occupants.

REQUIREMENT Demonstrate that the project is in compliance with the minimum

requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2007 [1] in respect of Outdoor Air Quality;
and Minimum Ventilation Rate.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person detailing the outdoor ventilation performance.
The report shall include:
1. Completion of Table H-1 of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 in
respect of regional outdoor air pollutants and local outdoor air
quality survey.
2. Confirmation that the outdoor air quality meets the local primary air
quality standards, otherwise indicate any action taken to
compensate.
3. Completion of Table H-2 of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007
demonstrating compliance with the minimum ventilation rate(s)
provided.

BACKGROUND The purpose of this prerequisite is to provide the minimum outdoor air
ventilation to provide for the control of odours, that is, the supply,
distribution and control of ventilation to maintain carbon dioxide (CO2)
levels within design targets in normally occupied spaces, and the control
of indoor pollutants such as TVOC’s, formaldehyde, etc.
The assessment for building follows requirements of ASHRAE
62.1:2007. The standard includes significant requirements other than
outdoor air rates, such as requirements for equipment to reduce the
potential for microbial growth, air cleaning requirements, and start-up
and commissioning requirements. All of these requirements must be met
to comply with this prerequisite.

1 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007.Ventilation
for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.

Page 6-6
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 1 SECURITY

6 IEQ 6.1 SECURITY

IEQ 1 SECURITY

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Engender a feeling of well-being amongst building users.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Burglar alarm systems shall comply with the Noise Control Ordinance.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for scoring at least 75% of the applicable security measures and
facilities for the building.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
which includes: a completed checklist of the security measures and
facilities provided, justification for each checked item, details of the
physical security systems provided, and a detailed security manual
explaining how the physical provisions (hardware) integrates with the
management system (software) for the building.
Where 75% compliance of applicable items is demonstrated the credit
shall be awarded.
Alternatively, the Client may provide detailed rationale and arguments to
demonstrate that security systems are integrated and an enhanced
standard of security can be provided.

ASSESSMENT GRID

Site perimeter controls: Pt Surveillance: Pt Building Security: Pt Site/Building Pt

Layout
Site is fenced, gate(s) 2 Lighting of site: 2 Entry from adjacent 2 Pathways are short, 1
attended during active Overall illumination of building(s): wide and straight
hours, intercom and or the site is between 50 or Access is prevented by a or
camera surveillance during and 200 lux. separating distance of 6m.
silent hours.
Restricted areas of the site 1 Site is illuminated by 1 Access from adjacent 1 Footpaths are well 1
are fenced with a locked street and building building is inhibited by lit, convex steel
gate. exterior lighting. barriers. mirrors to forestall
concealment.
Vehicle Access Control: 2 Monitoring of site: 2 Security guards can verify by 2 Amenity/play areas 1
Parking is indoor and with Colour monitoring of TV monitor and card reader. overlooked from the
attended control station. or building entrances and or or building.
perimeter.
Parking for visitors and 1 B&W monitoring of 1 All people and traffic from 1 Elevators are 1
building users are building entrances and parking must pass security monitored by
separated with guard perimeter. control or parking control CCTV.
patrol. station.
Security of stored vehicles: 2 Guard patrol: 2 Doors and windows at grade: 2 Staircases are wide, 1
Company vehicles in Frequent patrol of Secured with heavy duty open and well lit.
indoor parking or fenced or building and fence or hardware, security glazing or
compound with TV perimeter. and deadlocks.
monitoring in silent hours.
Company vehicles in 1 Single guard patrol 1 Secured with high grade 1 Meters are located 1
separate well lit area. during silent hours. hardware. in common areas
Optional (by Client) 2 Planting: clear of 2 Alarmed for opening and 2 Optional (by Client) 2
building pathways and breakage to central control
or parking. or and perimeter is monitored or or
with TV.
Optional (by Client) 1 Planting 6m clear of 1 Alarmed locally for opening 1 Optional (by Client) 1
building. and breakage.
Total Applicable Points: Points Achieved: Percentage Achieved:

BACKGROUND Local surveys undertaken in recent years shows that security is a serious
concern for residents of estates. This may be in the context of personal

Page 6-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 1 SECURITY

safety and in the context of loss of belongings. For commercial and

institutional buildings security is also an issue, in public buildings where
strangers congregate, in common areas such as staircases and toilets,
etc.
The design of building, landscape and the implementation of security
facilities can effectively reduce most burglaries and other crimes relating
to different building types by influencing the behaviour of offenders,
guardians and potential victims. The security facilities and measures
required depend on the type of premises and level of security needed. In
general, effective security incorporates three elements: natural and
architectural barriers that discourage access, human security, and
electronic security.
Security can be enhanced through the integrated use of reliable
hardware (surveillance cameras, security barriers, etc) coupled to a
sound management system (watchman tour, etc). Security systems need
also be integrated with fire safety management and communications
systems.
Assessment should take into account the guidelines provided in ASTM
[1,2], BS [3], and similar authoritative guidance, and the extent to which
the security provisions ‘score’ against the assessment grid provided
herein.

1 ASTM International. Designation E 1665-95a. Standard Classification for Serviceability of an Office Facility for Facility
Protection.
2 ASTM International. Designation E 1693 -95a. Standard Classification for Serviceability of an Office Facility for Occupant
Assets.
3 British Standards Institution. BS8220. Standard Guide for Security of Buildings Against Crime.

Page 6-8
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

6 IEQ 6.2 HYGIENE

IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Reduce the potential for contamination of plumbing and drainage

systems, the ability of systems to carry infections, and the likelihood of
odours.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the provisions of the Building (Standards of Sanitary

Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for designs that reduce the potential for transmission of harmful
bacteria viruses, and odours.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit details in the form of drawings and specifications
for the plumbing and drainage systems, and confirmation that installation
of the systems was carried out according to the specifications. A
summary report shall be submitted highlighting where appropriate means
have been included to allow for safe and hygienic operation over the
expected lifespan of the systems and components.
The ‘appropriate means’ shall include, but is not limited to, reference to
the following:
• adequacy of flushing water supply to meet the pattern of demand;
• design of drainage stacks of adequate capacity for peak loading;
• venting of stacks;
• access to pipework and ducts for maintenance purposes;
• installation of buried pipework that pays attention to leaks at joints,
seals, etc. for the expected life of the installation;
• design of floor drains; and
• maintenance of water seals.
Where it can be demonstrated that the design and installation of the
plumbing and drainage systems, and any other provisions that can
impact on performance (e.g. ventilation of bathrooms) have been given
due attention, e.g. comply with the recommended practices promoted by
various authorities, then the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Since the outbreak of the SARs virus there has been a great deal of
attention on the design of buildings to improve building hygiene. There
appears to be sufficient evidence to conclude that building drainage
systems was a path for the transmission of the SARs virus. Subsequent
investigations have identified that certain features of drainage and
sewage system design should be improved. BEAM seeks to ensure
greater attention is paid to the design and installation of plumbing and
drainage systems in buildings in order to reduce the risk of transmission
of bacteria, viruses and odours into occupied areas.
Water seal traps are required to be provided for all sanitary fitments,
including floor drains (if provided), before they are connected to a
common drainage stack [1]. Trap seal retention can be a problem in

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. ADV-24 Floor Drains in Kitchens and Bathrooms.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV024.pdf

Page 6-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

multi-level drainage systems. The main ways that air passes a trap are:
• system pressure variations cause air-entrained bubbles to pass
through the water seal; and/or
• complete or partial trap seal loss.
Unless water is replenished, from time to time, by the building users or
through discharge of waste water cross-contamination is likely. Viruses
can enter in indoor spaces through water traps if water seals are dried
out or contaminated, or there is leakage in pipework.
Under working and test conditions traps should retain a minimum seal of
25mm of water or equivalent. Self priming type drainage traps or
drainage pipe connections which ensure trap priming may be
considered, e.g. connection of washbasin discharge to the pipe between
the floor drain grating and its U-trap. Care should also be taken to
prevent back-flowing at the floor drain.
Any provision requiring modification of the relevant Building (Standards
of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulations may be considered by the Building Authority on the merits of
individual case upon application.

TWO-PIPE SYSTEM According to regulations [2] waste pipes must be connected to a soil
pipe. Use of two pipes for drainage, one for foul water and one for
greywater, may also be a consideration (note that such an arrangement
can allow for greywater recycling). Separation of soil and waste pipes
can reduce the chance of cross contamination between systems, the
connection of wash basin; bath and floor drain to the same waste stack
can still permit cross contamination within the waste system. A more
effective measure is to provide an independent stack for floor drains.
However, the use of a one-pipe system of combined soil and waste stack
has been commonly used in Hong Kong for decades. Many local
designers do not regard the adoption of separate stacks for soil and
waste a practical and cost-effective solution because it does not resolve
the problem of drying out U-traps. The amount of drainage pipework will
be doubled and, besides extra cost, can impose spatial constraints [3].

INSTALLATIONS Leaky joints and broken drainage pipes are the result of the lack of
regular inspection and maintenance. Pipework needs to be as accessible
as possible in order to carry out such work, and building management
should be provided with means for regular inspection, maintenance and
repair of building drainage systems.

MAINTENANCE A common problem is the difficulty in gaining access to systems from

public or common areas. Locating pipework on the exterior of a building
has the advantage that maintenance can be carried out with minimal
disturbance to users; however, locating pipework internally is acceptable
if adequate duct space is provided with proper access from a public area,
such as a common corridor.
As drainage and other service pipes are often placed in lightwells and re-
entrants, when designing these designers should pay special attention to
access for repair and maintenance [4]. The lowest level of re-entrants
and lightwells housing soil and waste pipes or stacks should be
designated as common areas with access, including access through cat-
ladder where appropriate, to facilitate maintenance and clearance of any

2 Regulation 12. Hong Kong Building (Standards of sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines) Regulations.
3 Ma Y Y, Lee HV. Institute of Plumbing Hong Kong. Preventing Infection of Virus from Drainage System. August 2003.
4 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. ADV-14 Facilities for External Inspection and Maintenance of Buildings.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV014.pdf

Page 6-10
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 2 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

refuse.

VENTILATION Where mechanical ventilation in the form of extractor fan is provided,

such as in bathrooms and lavatories, care should be taken to ensure that
water seals are intact and operate according to the design intent [5].
Consideration should be given to the quality and quantity of air intake,
air-flow path and fan capacity.
The Environmental Health Team of the World Health Organisation
(WHO) has advised that the optimum volume for bathroom ventilation is
2 cfm/sq ft (10.2 l/s per sq. metre). WHO is of the view that a larger
volume does not add much on the comfort side and has the hidden risk
of building up negative pressure. Designers are advised to provide an
opening to bathrooms and lavatories for make-up air, such as an
undercut to the door or an opening with a louvre at the door or wall, in
order to minimise the build-up of negative pressure where an extractor
fan is used for ventilation. The airflow path created should avoid
circuiting of the ingress and exhaust air.

5 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. ADV-25 Extractor Fans in Bathrooms and Lavatories in Domestic Buildings.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV025.pdf

Page 6-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 3 BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

6 IEQ 6.2 HYGIENE

IEQ 3 BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

EXCLUSIONS Residential buildings.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that the design, installation and facilities for operation and
maintenance of air conditioning systems, and water systems and
features, are such as to reduce the risk of biological contamination.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for complying with the recommendations given in the Code of
Practice - Prevention of Legionnaires Disease, in respect of air-
conditioning and ventilation systems, and water systems.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing how the design and installation of the air-conditioning and
ventilation systems and equipment meet with the requirements and
recommendation contained in the Code of Practice - Prevention of
Legionnaires Disease [1], or at least equal equivalent code. The report
shall also detail how water supply, particularly hot water supply, and
water use in features such as spas, fountains, etc., are designed and
installed in compliance with the Code or Practice.

BACKGROUND The majority of cases of legionnaires' disease (LD) are caused by the
bacterium Legionella pneumophila, There are many other species of the
organism which have been implicated in human disease is a pneumonia,
but other milder illnesses may be caused by these organisms. All
illnesses due to legionella species are known collectively as
'legionelloses'; Pontiac Fever is one of the milder conditions. Legionella
pneumophila is found in natural water supplies and in soil. It is also found
in many recirculating and water supply systems.
Measurements in a newly completed building are unlikely to reveal
problems with biological contamination caused by either air-conditioning
and ventilation systems, or water systems. Consequently, BEAM seeks
confirmation that the design and installation of systems and equipment
will reduce the possibility of problems arising during use of the building.

1 Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease Committee, Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, Hong Kong Government.
Code of Practice for the Prevention of Legionnaires’ Disease in Hong Kong. 2007.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pps/code.doc

Page 6-12
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 4 WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES

6 IEQ 6.2 HYGIENE

IEQ 4 WASTE DISPOSAL FACILITIES

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that the design, installation and facilities waste disposal and
recycling are such as to reduce the risk of odours entering occupied
areas or public areas.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building (Refuse Storage Chambers and Material
Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for the provision of a hygienic refuse collection system.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit details of the refuse collection system to
demonstrate that refuse is disposed of in an hygienic manner and
prevents any significantly discernable odours from entering occupied
areas or public areas in or immediately adjacent to the building
development.
The system shall comply with those recommendations contained in
PNAP No. APP-35 [ 1 ] in respect of refuse storage and recovery
chambers appropriate to the given circumstances.
The provision of a purpose designed automated/mechanical system for
waste disposal is deemed to meet the requirements.

BACKGROUND Where refuse contains large amounts of food and other organic waste
there are potential odours and health problems if refuse is not well
contained from the points of disposal by users to the place of final
collection. Automatic systems are available to isolate refuse from users.

REFUSE CHAMBERS Where a centralised ventilation system is adopted, a single air purifier
may be installed before final discharge into the atmosphere. Alternatively
where there is no particular odour problem a mechanical fan coupled
with a particulate filter at each RS&MRR/MRC may be considered. The
main exhaust outlet for a centralised ventilation system should be
located at upper roof level away from other buildings; however in the
case where the building is surrounded by taller buildings the discharge
may be located at the main RS&MRC.
The noise level of the system should conform with the Technical
Memorandum published under the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap 400).
Fire dampers should be provided if the system has exhaust grilles and
ducting at each floor.
Air purifying devices such as ‘Chemical Air Scrubber’, ‘Bio-oxygen
Generator’, ‘Photo-oxidation Generator’ or other appropriate devices
should be provided within a RS&MRC.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-35 Refuse Storage and Collection Building (Refuse Storage and Material
Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP035.pdf

Page 6-13
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

6 IEQ 6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

EXCLUSIONS Residential and similar buildings not provided with central air-
conditioning and ventilation systems.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that building ventilation systems are not contaminated as a result
of residuals left over from construction activities.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Construction IAQ management

1 credit for implementing a Construction IAQ Management Plan.
b) Filter replacement and flush-out
1 credit for undertaking a building ‘flush out’ or ‘bake out’; and
replacement of all filters prior to occupancy.

ASSESSMENT a) Construction IAQ management

To demonstrate compliance the Client shall submit a report prepared by
a suitably qualified person documenting effective implementation of a
Construction IAQ Management Plan appropriate to the scale and extent
of the development including, but not limited to, the following:
• a copy of the Plan;
• evidence of measures showing protection of ducts, on-site storage
or protection of installed absorptive materials, etc;
• checklists, worksheets, notifications, deficiencies, resolutions, etc.,
related to construction IAQ issues;
• documentation that demonstrates implementation of construction
IAQ management measures during construction;
• details of filtration media used during construction and installed
immediately prior to occupancy; and
• documentation for duct cleaning and testing.
Where due attention has been paid to construction IAQ management as
detailed in the check-list below, the credit shall be awarded.
b) Filter replacement and flush-out
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the technical information for the filtration media used during
construction and installed immediately prior to occupancy. The report
shall also detail building flush-out procedures including actual dates of
the flush-out.
Where it can be demonstrated that filtration media used had a Minimum
Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 13 as determined by
ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-1999( 1 ) or equivalent performance specification,
and a minimum one-week building flush-out with new filtration media at
50% outside air was carried out after construction ended and prior to
occupancy, the credit shall be awarded.

1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999. Method of
Testing General Ventilation Air-cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta, 1999. www.ashrae.org.

Page 6-14
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

CHECK LIST Contract conditions for the project specifications should require a written
Construction IAQ Management Plan which includes procedures meeting
or exceeding the minimum requirements, as follows:
• measures to protect the ventilation system components and air
pathways against contamination during construction;
• cleaning procedures to be employed prior to the building being
occupied, in the event that ventilation system components and air
pathways are not adequately protected;
• control measures for HVAC system and component protection;
• contaminant source control; and
• interruption of moisture/pollutant pathways;
Events shall be scheduled to protect indoor air quality by:
• permitting adequate airing-out of new materials;
• sequencing the installation of finish materials; and
• proper curing of concrete before covering.

The Plan should specify the location, type, amount, sequence and timing
of the various control measures, including emergency procedures, and
the labour, materials and time required to implement them. The project
construction documents should address the following:
• an overview of tasks to be executed;
• a list of reference documents, including specifications, drawing list,
and submittal drawings;
• a list of participants in the process and their responsibilities;
• a plan for management, communication and documentation;
• an outline of the scope of the IAQ Management Plan, including
submittal review, inspection, and enforcement;
• the expected written work products, including checklists and
worksheets; and
• a schedule of activities.
The project construction documents should require the contractor to:
• designate a representative with daily responsibility for IAQ issues;
• include procedures related to the IAQ Management Plan on the
agenda during regularly scheduled meetings;
• store building materials in a weather tight, clean area protected from
dust, debris and moisture damage;
• keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish and other debris resulting from the work. Identify the
storage, disposal and housekeeping practices to be applied to
building supplies and waste materials to protect HVAC systems
from contamination;
• submit a construction schedule to prevent materials from acting as
sinks for storage and subsequent release of contaminants emitted
from finishes which have the potential for short-term off-gassing. In
the schedule, the contractor should include appropriate allowances
for drying or curing times before installation of materials that have a
fibrous or porous nature that tend to adsorb contaminants;

Page 6-15
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

• provide adequate outside air continuously during installation of

materials and finishes;
• replace all construction-related filtration media used on permanent
HVAC equipment at substantial completion of the work;
• confirm that all air filters, casing, coils, fans and ducts are clean,
before air quality testing; and
• ensure air ducts clean by coordinating duct testing and cleaning
procedures with the commissioning requirements.

BACKGROUND Buildings, especially those with extensive ventilation systems, can suffer
from indoor air pollution problems arising from residuals left in HVAC and
mechanical ventilation systems. Proper management during
construction, followed by cleaning and replacement strategies can
significantly reduce air pollution caused by construction. Designers
should specify containment control strategies including protecting the
HVAC systems, controlling pollutant sources, interrupting pathways for
contamination, enforcing proper housekeeping and coordinating
schedules to minimize disruption. The construction sequencing to install
absorptive materials after the prescribed dry or cure time of wet finishes
should be specified to minimize adverse impacts on indoor air quality.
Materials directly exposed to moisture through precipitation, plumbing
leaks, or condensation is susceptible to microbial contamination.
Absorptive materials to be protected and sequenced during installation
include: insulation, fabrics, ceiling tiles, and gypsum products. During
construction the IAQ management should be monitored and reported.
The flush-out may begin only after all construction work and finishing is
completed; all cleaning finalized and all fixed furniture installed. Final test
and balancing should be completed and HVAC control should be
functional, particularly if the occupants will be moving in during the
second phase of flush-out.
The flush-out procedure may use the building's HVAC system, but
alternatives are acceptable providing they meet the air quantity,
temperature and humidity requirements.
One approach uses temporary supply and exhaust systems placed into
windows or window openings. EPA's indoor air quality for schools web
site [ 2 ] provides information on exhaust and spot ventilation during
construction activities that can be helpful for design teams who are
considering using this approach.
Care must be taken to ensure the airflow is not short circuited, potentially
leaving remote corners within the project spaces with less than adequate
circulation, or other parts of the building with unanticipated increases,
such as a stack effect up elevator shafts.
If the building’s HVAC system is used, any temporary filters and duct
coverings installed shall be removed. The filtration media shall be
replaced with new media unless the system is configured such that filters
filter only the outside air. The new filters installed prior to the start of
flush-out must be MERV 13 or better [1].
Depending upon the season, outside air can be cold or humid.
Appropriate internal temperature and relative humidity shall be
maintained during flush-out procedure.

2 EPA, Controlling Pollutants and Sources; 5. Ventilation Techniques,

http://www.epa.gov/iaq/schooldesign/controlling.html#Air Out and Flush Out.

Page 6-16
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 5 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT

If the HVAC system is part of the project scope it can be design to meet
the minimum ventilation rate. If the project is served by an existing HVAC
system, the outside air delivery capabilities should be part of the building
selection criteria.

Page 6-17
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

6 IEQ 6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Demonstrate that airborne contaminants from external sources will not
give rise to unacceptable levels of indoor air pollution in normally
occupied spaces.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and Ozone (O3)
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with appropriate criteria for CO,
NO2 and O3.
b) Respirable suspended particulate (RSP, PM10)
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for
RSP.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by the suitably qualified
person detailing the criteria adopted for indoor air quality for each type of
normally occupied premises within the building development.
Where the Client does not offer criteria, BEAM aligns with the HKSAR
IAQ Certification Scheme [1]. The criteria for air-conditioned buildings
shall be those defined under Good Class in Table 1 of the scheme
Guide. For other occupied areas and habitable rooms the criteria can be
that defined in the Guide, in ASHRAE 62.1-2007 [ 2 ] or equivalent
standard.
Compliance shall be demonstrated by measurement. The report shall
identify the measurement protocol. i.e., the measuring equipment used,
duration of measurements, number and details of the sampling points,
the measurement results, and overall conclusions from the
measurements survey.
For RSP the instrument type used shall be of gravimetric type, such as
cyclone elutricator or impactor. An instrument based on the optical
scattering method is acceptable with a referenced calibration curve with
respect to a gravimetric instrument. In a zone where it can be
demonstrated that CO, NO2, ozone and RSP are solely from outside,
measurements can be taken at the outdoor air intake locations where
CO, NO2, ozone and RSP are likely to infiltrate.
The objective of sampling is to ensure that the building will not suffer
unduly from outside sources of pollution. The sampling protocol (number
and locations of samples) shall follow as a minimum that given in
Appendix 8.7. Any other protocol demonstrated to be of equal rigour
appropriate to the nature of the premises surveyed would be acceptable.
In the case of occupied/habitable rooms in air-conditioned/naturally
ventilated buildings the measurement of indoor air pollutants shall take
place whilst operating in the naturally ventilated mode. Given that air and
pollutant exchange with the outside depends on prevailing climatic
conditions, particularly wind speed and direction, it is expected that due
account is taken and that measurements will be taken under typical or

1 Indoor Air Quality Management Group. A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Places.
http://www.iaq.gov.hk/cert/doc/CertGuide-eng.pdf
2 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Standard 62.1. Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, Atlanta 2007.

Page 6-18
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 6 OUTDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

average climatic conditions.

Where it can be demonstrated that the identified pollutants are unlikely to
exceed the limits prescribed, and as determined from an appropriate
sample of measurements the relevant credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND This section deals with pollutants found in indoor air which are mainly
attributable to outdoor sources. In the case of occupied/habitable rooms
in air-conditioned/naturally ventilated buildings the concern is indoor air
pollutant from outdoor sources whilst operating in the naturally ventilated
mode. Undertaking appropriate measurements in air-conditioned
buildings will demonstrate that the design and construction of the
building and services serve to reduce indoor air pollution from outdoor
sources.
CO is toxic gas which interferes with the oxygen transport capacity of the
blood, and at levels to which people can be exposed in buildings, leads
to symptoms such as headaches, nausea, chest constriction, etc, as well
as affecting concentration. Exposure to oxides of nitrogen (NOx, NO2)
can result in irritations to the eyes and respiratory system. Sources in
occupied areas include infiltration from vehicle exhausts and enclosed
car parks, and incomplete combustion within premises. Ozone irritates
the eyes and respiratory system. Sources of ozone in occupied areas
include infiltration from outside occupied areas, and from equipment
which utilises ultra-violet light or causes ionisation of air.
Respirable Suspended Particles (PM10) are suspended airborne particles
with a nominal aerodynamic diameter of 10 µm or less. The health
impacts from inhalation of particles depend on size, shape and chemical
reactivity. Outdoor sources are numerous, but vehicular exhaust and
construction activity are significant sources. Particulates from outside
sources are carried into air-conditioned buildings through outside air
intakes and through uncontrolled infiltration. Indoor sources include air
ducts, equipment and user activities. Levels of RSP may be used as an
indicator of the effectiveness of the air filtration system, so sampling
should be carried out at one representative zone in each type of
premises.
Survey data for Hong Kong buildings shows that if design and
construction is adequate it should be possible to meet the Excellent
Class of the Guidance Note for CO, NO2, O3 and RSP in new air-
conditioned buildings.

Page 6-19
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

6 IEQ 6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Demonstrate that airborne contaminants, predominantly from inside

sources, do not give rise to unacceptable levels of indoor air pollution in
normally occupied spaces.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 3

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Volatile organic compounds (VOCs)

1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for
VOCs.
b) Formaldehyde (HCHO)
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for
formaldehyde.
c) Radon (Rn)
1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the appropriate criteria for
radon.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide a report prepared by the suitably qualified
person detailing the criteria adopted for indoor air quality for each type of
normally occupied premises within the building development.
Where the Client does not offer criteria, BEAM aligns with the HKSAR
IAQ Certification Scheme [1]. The criteria for air-conditioned buildings
shall be those defined under Good Class in Table 1 of the scheme
Guide. For other occupied areas and habitable rooms the criteria can be
that defined in the Guide, in ASHRAE 62.1-2007 [ 2 ] or equivalent
standard.
Where compliance is demonstrated by measurement the report shall
identify the measurement protocol. i.e., the measuring equipment used,
duration of measurements, number and details of the sampling points,
the measurement results, and overall conclusions from the
measurements survey.
A sample at the lowest outdoor air intake location can help to identify the
relative contribution of VOCs from indoor and outdoor. However, the
common alpha track detector and gamma ray detector for radon
detection are not regarded as suitable for measurement. Scintillation
cells and electronic monitors are more suitable for both grab sampling
and continuous measurements.
The objective of sampling is to ensure that the building will not suffer
unduly from outside sources of pollution. The sampling protocol (number
and locations of samples) shall follow as a minimum that given in
Appendix 8.7. Any other protocol demonstrated to be of equal rigour
appropriate to the nature of the premises surveyed would be acceptable.
In the case of occupied/habitable rooms in air-conditioned/naturally
ventilated buildings the measurement of indoor air pollutants shall take
place whilst operating in the background ventilation mode, or where

1 Indoor Air Quality Management Group. A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Places.
http://www.iaq.gov.hk/cert/doc/CertGuide-eng.pdf
2 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Standard 62.1. Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, Atlanta 2007.

Page 6-20
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 7 INDOOR SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION

there is no specific provision for background ventilation, with all windows

and doors closed.
Where it can be demonstrated that the identified pollutants are unlikely to
exceed the limits prescribed, and as determined from an appropriate
sample of measurements the relevant credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND This section deals with pollutants found in indoor air which are mainly
attributable to indoor sources. In the case of occupied/habitable rooms in
air-conditioned/naturally ventilated buildings the concern is indoor air
pollutant from indoor sources whilst operating in the background
ventilation mode, i.e. all openings other than those provided for
background ventilation are ‘closed’.
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) includes hundreds of chemical
compounds found in indoor environments from trace levels to levels that
can cause various symptoms such as eye and throat irritations,
respiratory problems, headaches, etc. Reactions can occur as a result of
exposure to a single sensitizing dose or sequence of doses, even at low
levels. VOCs may enter from outdoors, but are more likely to be emitted
from building materials, finishes and furnishings, pesticides and cleaning
products.
Formaldehyde is a type volatile organic compound which is separately
identified due to its abundance in many building materials, adhesives,
fabrics and carpets, etc. Formaldehyde is a suspected human
carcinogen, and in sufficiently high concentrations is known to cause
eye, nose and respiratory irritation and sensitisations. Since
formaldehyde is most likely to come from indoor sources, sampling
should be carried out in at least one representative zone of each type of
occupied area.
Radon is a colourless radioactive gas that exhibits no taste or smell.
There is concern that exposure to elevated levels of radon indoors
increases the risk of lung cancer. Radon is mainly emitted from granite
and marble which are major building materials in Hong Kong. The
concentration of radon may accumulate to an unaccepted level in an
enclosed space without adequate ventilation. Choice of building
materials and surface coverings can have significant impact on emission
rates. Since outdoor radon infiltration is minimal. Radon and its
progenies are mainly generated indoor.

Page 6-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 8 IAQ IN CAR PARKS

6 IEQ 6.3 INDOOR AIR QUALITY

IEQ 8 IAQ IN CAR PARKS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings not provided with enclosed or semi-enclosed car parks.

OBJECTIVE Meet the minimum requirements of performance in respect of air quality.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating compliance with the design requirements
specified in ProPECC PN 2/96.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
demonstrating that the design of the ventilation system meets or exceeds
the guidelines given in ProPECC PN 2/96 [1], including provisions for the
monitoring and automatic control of air pollution. The report shall include
an estimation of peak pollutant loading and the ventilation system
performance to meet the maximum concentration of pollutants as listed
in ProPECC PN 2/96.

BACKGROUND This applies to enclosed and semi-enclosed car parks that rely on
mechanical ventilation or mechanically assisted natural ventilation.

1 Environmental Protection Department. Practice Notes for Professional Persons. ProPECC PN 2/96. Control of Air Pollution
in Car Parks. 1996.

Page 6-22
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION

6 IEQ 6.4 VENTILATION

IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION

EXCLUSIONS Residential and similar buildings without central air conditioning.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that ventilation systems provide for effective delivery to support
the well being and comfort of occupants in normally occupied spaces.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with CAP 123J Building (Ventilating Systems) Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating an outdoor ventilation rate that exceeds
ASHRAE 62.1:2007 [1] requirements by at least 30%.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person detailing that the Client’s specified criteria has
been adopted for each category of space included in the project, through
the submission of calculations and/or measurements in the specified
sample of premises to demonstrate compliance.
Calculations should be based on the following table.
Occupant Density

Rate/Person L/s

Effectiveness (3)
Identification (1)

Space Type (2)

Class of Air (5)

People/sq. m

Efficiency (4)
Rate/m2 L/s

Distribution
Ventilation

Ventilation
Zone Air
Spaces

System
1: List number or name of each ventilation zone, such as office number or name, retail
space name, classroom number, etc
2: List occupancy category of the space from ASHRAE 62.1: 2007 Table 6-1 (Minimum
ventilation rates in breathing zone) such as office space, retail sales, classroom, etc.
3: ASHRAE 62.1: 2007 Table 6-2 (Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness)
4: ASHRAE 62.1: 2007 Table 6-3 (System Ventilation Efficiency) or Appendix A
5: ASHRAE 62.1: 2007 Tables 5-2 (Airstreams) or 6-1; include justification for
classification if not in these tables

The outcome of measurements shall demonstrate that the required

amount of outdoor air corresponding to the corrected design ventilation
rate is actually provided. Air flow measurements may be made using
conventional procedures, such as described in ASHRAE 111 [2], or by
tracer gas techniques in accordance with ASTM E 741 [3] or equivalent.

BACKGROUND The purpose of this credit is to demonstrate the potential for improving
indoor air quality through increased outdoor ventilation.
The current version of ASHRAE 62.1 [1] is considered a “code –
minimum” standard [ 4 ]. There is concern that the ventilation rates
calculated under the standard will have a negative impact on productivity

1 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, Atlanta 2007.
2 American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Standard 111. Practices for
Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Systems, Atlanta 1998
3 American Society for Testing and Materials. ASTM Standard E 741-00, Standard Test Methods for Determining Air
Change in a Single Zone by Means of a Tracer Gas Dilution. Philadelphia, 2000.
4 Taylor, S.T., LEED and Standard 62.1, ASHRAE Journal, Vol. 47, No. 9, September 2005.

Page 6-23
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 9 INCREASED VENTILATION

and occupant well being. As an example, consider a typical Hong Kong

Office of 1,000 m2 and an occupant density of 9 m2 per occupant [5].
Using the ASHRAE 62.1-2007 criteria results in a ventilation rate of 5.2
l/s/person, much less than previously accepted values of 8 or even 10 l/s
per person.
For simple systems where the outdoor air serves only a single space, or
a small number of similar spaces, the outdoor air flow rate can be
measured either:
• using a pitot tube [ 6 ] and manometer to perform a pitot tube
traverse in accordance with ASHRAE 111-98 [2] or
• using an installed Wilson Flow Grid with a manometer.
The majority of systems will be too complex for such measurements and
the supply of outdoor air should be verified using a tracer gas
measurement. ASTM 741-00 [3] describes the required properties of
tracer gases and discusses procedures for tracer decay, tracer step up
and constant concentration measurements.

SYNERGIES Air movement within spaces is dealt with under Thermal Comfort criteria.
Increased ventilation rates will have a negative impact on energy use,
particularly in a hot humid climate such as Hong Kong. Consideration
should be given to using heat recovery techniques to lessen the impact
or utilising CO2 sensors in conjunction with the BMS to affect Demand
Control Ventilation (DCV).

5 BEAM Plus for New Buildings, Section 8.2.4. BEAM Society, 2009.
6 International Organization for Standardization. ISO 3966-1977. Measurement of fluid flow in closed circuits - Velocity area
method using Pitot static tubes.

Page 6-24
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 10 BACKGROUND VENTILATION

6 IEQ 6.4 VENTILATION

IEQ 10 BACKGROUND VENTILATION

EXCLUSIONS Buildings not designed to utilise natural ventilation.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that normally occupied premises designed to utilise natural

ventilation are provided with a minimum of background ventilation to
control indoor air pollutants.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building (Planning) Regulations (B(P)Reg.) 30, 31

and 32.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit where it can be demonstrated that adequate ventilation can be
achieved by natural means.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report by a suitably
qualified person stating that the appropriate analysis or measurements
have been undertaken to verify the adequacy of background ventilation
(minimum air change rate).
The minimum ventilation rate required to maintain known contaminants
below recognised limits can be calculated using recognised procedures,
for example, Appendix D of BS 5925 [1] or similar.
Ventilation performance may be simulated using wind tunnel tests,
computational fluid dynamics (CFD) or other appropriate modelling
techniques [2,3].
The modelling technique shall show a boundary layer as appropriate for
the site, and the model will include any significant buildings and site
obstructions within a distance of approximately 6 building heights. The
pressure data will be used with recognised calculation procedures (e.g.
BS 5925) to estimate flows through the habitable areas. Buoyancy or
turbulence driven flows need not be considered. Ventilation rates can be
predicted using either CFD or approaches that range in complexity from
simple single zone models to elaborate multi-zone models [2]. Principles
of model operation are discussed in the ASHRAE Handbook [4].
Alternatively, a suitable commissioning test may be performed, for
example a tracer gas decay test [5]. The test should be carried out in
representative units as defined above and performed under average wind
conditions with windows closed and purposely designed ventilators open.
Where it can be demonstrate that background ventilation meets minimum
levels as prescribed in standards and guidelines from a recognised
authority wholly by natural means the credit shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Background ventilation is a combination of uncontrolled air infiltration and

ventilation through purposely designed vents. Purpose designed
ventilation is preferable to relying on uncontrolled infiltration. BEAM
seeks to encourage designs that provide for adequate background

1 BS 5925:1991 (Inc. Amendment No 1), Code of Practice for Ventilation principles and designing for natural ventilation.
British Standards Institute, London. December 1995.
2 American Society for Testing Materials. ASTM E 2267-03. Specifying and Evaluating Performances of Single Family
Attached and detached Dwellings – Indoor Air Quality. 2003.
3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook Chapter
26. Atlanta 2001.
4 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook Chapter
26. Atlanta 2001.
5 ASTM E 741-00. Standard Test Method for Determining Air Change in a Single Zone by means of a Tracer Gas Dilution.
American Society for Testing Materials. Pasadena USA. 2000.

Page 6-25
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 10 BACKGROUND VENTILATION

ventilation by natural means.

Background ventilation is intended to dilute the unavoidable contaminant
emissions from people and materials (e.g. radon) and for control of
internal moisture levels due to occupant activities in order to minimise
risk of mould growth. During periods when windows and other openings
are closed it is possible for indoor radon levels to rise above the criteria
recommended by the Environmental Protection Department [ 6 ]. Local
research on residential buildings suggests that 0.5 to 1 Ach would be
sufficient to maintain radon below the target level.
For domestic buildings the Building Authority (BA) is prepared to accept
the following alternative performance standards on the provision of
natural ventilation in habitable rooms [7]:
Room of domestic Air Change per Hour (ACH)
building
Habitable Room 1.5 (natural means)
Kitchen 1.5 (natural means) plus 5 (mechanical
means)

6 Indoor Air Quality Management Group. A Guide on Indoor Air Quality Certification Scheme for Offices and Public Places.
http://www.iaq.gov.hk/cert/doc/CertGuide-eng.pdf
7 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-130 Lighting and Ventilation Requirements – Performance-based Approach.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP130.pdf

Page 6-26
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION

6 IEQ 6.4 VENTILATION

IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION

EXCLUSIONS Item b) is excluded for residential buildings.

OBJECTIVE Prevent exposure of building occupants to concentrated indoor sources

of pollutants.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with CAP 123J Building (Ventilating Systems) Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Source control

1 credit for the provision of an adequate ventilation system for
rooms/areas where significant indoor pollution sources are generated.
b) Local exhaust
1 credit for the provision of a general exhaust system for future tenants.

ASSESSMENT a) Source control

The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person detailing the design criteria that has been
adopted and details of the ventilation system designs providing local
exhaust where concentrated pollutant sources are likely to be present.
The report shall provide details of tests and the results demonstrating
that the design performance is achieved. Where the design ventilation
rate specified is lower than that specified in a recognised international or
national standard the client shall demonstrate through appropriate testing
that there is 99% isolation between areas with concentrated pollutant
sources and occupied areas.
b) General exhaust system
The report shall provide technical details to demonstrate how the
ventilation system design(s) may be temporarily adapted so that air from
any areas undergoing fit out or renovation can be exhausted to the
outside without re-circulation or entrainment to occupied areas. The
ventilation provisions shall be adequate to exhaust to outside air any
material off-gassing, combustion products, excess moisture, etc., and the
exhaust is discharged such that it does not re-enter the premises or
enter adjacent premises under typical wind conditions. Compliance may
be demonstrated by conducting appropriate tests in a sample of units.
Where it can be demonstrated that source control measures can meet
the performance requirements the credit(s) shall be awarded.

BACKGROUND Concentrated pollution sources are best managed at source. The

provision of localised ventilation, segregated from the general ventilation,
is an appropriate strategy. In commercial and similar premises sources
such as photocopying equipment, smoking lounges, etc. should be
provided with dedicated exhaust systems. It is also appropriate to
provide a system that allows for localised exhaust of premises during fit-
out and redecoration, to avoid entrainment to occupied areas. It could be
part of the fixed ventilation system, or a simple approach that allows
temporary exhaust provisions. In other buildings local exhaust is
intended to remove contaminants from specific rooms such as kitchens,
in which concentrated sources are expected.

Page 6-27
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION

DOMESTIC KITCHENS PNAP No. APP-130 [1] specifies performance based criteria for kitchen
ventilation as an alternative means of satisfying Building (Planning)
Regulations (B(P)Reg.) 30, 31 and 32. These criteria are 1.5 Ach under
natural ventilation, plus 5 Ach from mechanical means i.e. these values
are by definition the minimum legal requirement. Whilst these are
performance based alternatives to the prescriptive criteria they are
considered worthy of credit. It should be noted that specifying higher
values may result in negatively pressurizing the building and causing
other IAQ problems with in flow of air from other spaces.
Elsewhere, ASHRAE 62.2 [2] states that kitchen fans are mandatory as
this standard considers that windows do not provide sufficient ventilation,
although this standard specifically applies to low rise residential units (3
storeys or less above grade) and wind conditions may not be as
favourable for ventilation as in the case of high rise buildings. The basic
requirement is that a vented cooker hood can exhaust 100 cfm (approx
50 l/s). An alternative approach is that ventilation (either continuous or
intermittent) of 5 Ach be achieved.

COMMERCIAL KITCHENS In commercial kitchens a mechanical ventilation rate of 20 Ach may be

appropriate [3] for the cooking styles found in Hong Kong.

BATHROOMS AND The Building Authority will give favourable consideration to an application
TOILETS for modification of Building (Planning) Regulation 36 in respect of
bathrooms and lavatories in domestic buildings [4] where the following
criteria are met :
• the room is part of a unit of accommodation for domestic use;
• the room is of a reasonable size; and
• the modification to be granted is unlikely to result in standards of
public health and safety being compromised.
Upon the grant of a modification of the Regulation, the Building Authority
will impose the following conditions:
• mechanical ventilation producing 5 air changes per hour (Ach) is in
operation at any time when the room is in use. The change of air
shall be with the outside of the building and to achieve this, the use
of ventilation ducting is acceptable;
• there is permanent ventilation to the ‘open air’, the ‘external air’ or
with another room which is provided with a window meeting the area
requirement for the combined windows. The permanent ventilation
may be in the form of an air duct, an aperture in a wall or a door
suitably located and permanently open or protected with louvers
having a minimum size of 1/20 of the floor area of the room; and
• the requirements of Building (Planning) Regulation 35A and PNAP
No. APP-27 [5] regarding water heaters are complied with, where
applicable.

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-130. Lighting and Ventilation Requirements - Performance Based Approach.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP130.pdf
2 ASHRAE 62.2-2003. Ventilation and Acceptable Indoor Air Quality in Low Rise Residential Buildings. American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. Atlanta. 2003.
3 Singapore Standard SS CP13. Code of Practice for Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning in Buildings. 1999.
4 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registred Geotechnical
Engineer PNAP No. APP-98. Lighting and Ventilation for Bathrooms and Lavatories in Domestic Buildings.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP098.pdf
5 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-27. Gas Water Heaters - Building (Planning) Regulation 35A.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP027.pdf

Page 6-28
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 11 LOCALISED VENTILATION

Where mechanical ventilation in the form of extractor fan is provided in

bathrooms and lavatories, care should be taken to ensure that plumbing
seals are intact and operate according to the design intent [ 6 ]. In
addition, consideration should be given to the quality and quantity of air
intake, air-flow path and fan capacity. The Environmental Health Team of
the World Health Organization (WHO) has advised that the optimum flow
rate for bathroom ventilation is 2 cfm/sq ft (10.2 l s-1 m-2). WHO is of the
view that a larger flow rate does not add much on the comfort side and
has the hidden risk of building up negative pressure in the room. It is
recommended to provide an opening to bathrooms and lavatories for air
relief, such as an undercut to the door or an opening with louver at the
door or wall, in order to minimise the build-up of negative pressure in
case an extractor fan is provided for ventilation.

UTILITY AND LAUNDRY ASHRAE 62.2 makes no requirement for mechanical ventilation although
ROOMS it stipulates an opening not less than 4% of the room floor area nor less
than 0.15 m2. However it does stipulate that clothes dryers must be
directly exhausted to outside.

REFUSE AREAS Exhaust from refuse storage areas and material recovery centres (RS &
MRC) should follow the principles of PNAP No. APP-35 [7]. In the cases
where a centralised ventilation system is adopted, a single air purifier
may be installed prior to the air being exhausted to the atmosphere. If
there are no odour problems then a mechanical fan and filter can be
used. The main exhaust outlet for a centralised system should be located
at roof level away from other buildings. If the building is surrounded by
taller buildings then the air may be exhausted at the main RS & RMC
location.
The noise level of the system should conform to the Technical
Memorandum published under the Noise Control Ordinance (Cap 400).
Fire dampers should be provided if the system has exhaust grilles and
ducting at each floor.

DOMESTIC GARAGES ASHRAE 62.2 states that for low rise residential buildings where air
handlers or return ducts are in an attached garage the ductwork should
be tested for air tightness. A ductwork air leakage test conforming to test
procedure DW 143 [8] or similar authority should be performed.

CHIMNEYS AND FLUES The sitting and height of chimneys and flues should follow PNAP No.
APP-8 [9]. In particular, chimneys and flues should be situated so that
products of combustion cannot enter windows, ventilation openings,
supply air intakes.

6 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. ADV-25 Extractor Fans in Bathrooms and Lavatories in Domestic Buildings.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV025.pdf
7 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-35. Refuse Storage and Collection Building (Refuse Storage and Material
Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP035.pdf
8 DW 143. A practical guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing. Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association. 1994.
9 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-8. Chimneys and Flues.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP008.pdf

Page 6-29
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

6 IEQ 6.4 VENTILATION

IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

EXCLUSIONS Spaces covered under the section on Localised Ventilation.

OBJECTIVE Ensure adequate ventilation in common areas and circulation routes

within premises and to avoid cross-contamination between areas.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES Compliance with applicable regulations covering ventilation provisions in

buildings.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Ventilation by any means

1 credit for demonstrating that all enclosed common areas in a building
are provided with adequate ventilation.
b) Use of natural ventilation
1 BONUS credit where the provision for ventilation is by natural means.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person detailing the design criteria that has been
adopted for each type of common area included in the development, and
the results of calculations, simulations and/or measurements in the
specified sample of spaces to demonstrate compliance with the
assessment criteria. Common areas include corridors, lift lobbies,
entrance lobbies, etc. Staircase shall be excluded from the assessment.
a) Ventilation by any means
Design ventilation rates shall be defined by the Client, but should comply
with recommendations from recognised authorities, e.g. BS 5925 [ 1 ],
ASHRAE 62 [ 2 ] or equivalent. Compliance shall be demonstrated by
measurements on a representative sample of each type of space,
including worst cases, under average wind conditions.
b) Use of natural ventilation
Where natural ventilation is employed it shall demonstrated that the
ventilation rate specified is achieved under average wind conditions in at
least 80% of the common areas, aggregated by floor area. Compliance
may be demonstrated by suitable commissioning measurements such as
a tracer gas test [3] on a representative sample of spaces, including
worst cases, or by appropriate modelling techniques, such as wind
tunnel test, CFD or other computer models [4, 5].
Compliance is conditional that outside air brought in to common areas
should be free from known or potential localised sources of pollution (e.g.
motor vehicle exhaust, workshops, etc), and exhausted air contain does
not contaminate public areas or occupied areas.

BACKGROUND The Buildings Department seeks to improve building design in the

context of environmental hygiene. Designers are recommended to

1 BS 5929: 1991 (Amendment No. 1) Code of practice for Ventilation Principles and designing for Natural Ventilation. British
Standards Institute, London, 1995.
2 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE 62-2007. Ventilation for Acceptable
Indoor Air Quality. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. Atlanta, 2007.
3 ASTM International. E 741-00. Standard Test Method for Determining Air Change in a Single Zone by means of a tracer
Gas Dilution. 2000
4 ASTM International. ASTM E 2267-03. Specifying and Evaluating Performances of Single Family Attached and detached
Dwellings – Indoor Air Quality. 2003.
5 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook Chapter
26. Atlanta 2001.

Page 6-30
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

consider the provision of ventilation to common areas, such as corridors,

lift lobbies, entrance lobbies, etc. [6]. Where design constraints render
the provision of natural ventilation as not feasible, mechanical ventilation
should be provided to improve the indoor environment. Good practices
when designing mechanical ventilation in public areas require:
• the ventilation system to be capable of providing sufficient fresh air
taking into account the anticipated population;
• intake and exhaust points be properly designed to prevent
contamination of fresh air supply and avoid short-circuiting; and
• the ventilation system and its associated ductwork, where provided,
should be conveniently accessible for maintenance.
Ventilation for bathrooms, kitchens, refuse rooms, etc., as covered
elsewhere in BEAM, may be sources of pollution affecting common
areas.

Cross ventilation of common and circulation areas not provided with

mechanical cooling or ventilation is important to control temperatures
and to dilute pollutants and odours. Recommended practice is to place
ventilation openings so that cross ventilation can occur. However, wind
driven cross ventilation can only happen when there is a reliable higher
pressure on one side of openings than on the other. For an isolated
building this may be easily achieved by simple consideration of prevailing
winds and the building form. For buildings within dense groupings,
however, local wind direction may be less apparent, turbulence high, and
cross-ventilation decreased. A more sophisticated analysis of the
behaviour of the wind is necessary to ensure beneficial cross flows.

MEASUREMENT A suitable commissioning test may be performed. The test should be

APPROACH carried out in representative sample, including worst case spaces as
defined above and performed under average wind conditions. In the case
of naturally ventilated spaces, measurements should be made under
conditions when windows are closed and purpose designed ventilators
are open.

MODELLING APPROACH Boundary layer wind tunnel modelling may be used for wind pressure
analysis. Wind pressure coefficients at inlet/outlet areas for common
areas shall be measured for at least one representative floor, including
worst case, for each type of occupied premise in the assessed building.
These may be site specific depending on the building’s height in relation
to nearby buildings and local terrain. The measurements will be taken for
at least the prevailing wind conditions which are likely to be site specific
and therefore should be determined case by case.
The modelling technique shall show a boundary layer as appropriate for
the site, and the model will include any significant buildings and site
obstructions within a distance of approximately 6 building heights. The
pressure data will be used with standard calculation procedures to
estimate flows through the common areas, arising from an average wind
condition. Buoyancy or turbulence driven flows need not be considered.
ASTM 2267 [4] states that building ventilation rates can be predicted
using approaches that range in complexity from simple single zone
models to elaborate multi-zone models. The underlying principles of
model operation are discussed in the ASHRAE Handbook [5]. The
modelling should take into account average wind speed conditions. In
the case of naturally ventilated premises, the simulation should be

6 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. ADV-26 Ventilation of Common Corridors and Lift Lobbies in Buildings.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/ADV/ADV026.pdf

Page 6-31
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 12 VENTILATION IN COMMON AREAS

performed for windows are closed and purpose designed ventilators are
open.

Page 6-32
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 13 THERMAL COMFORT IN AIR-CONDITIONED PREMISES

6 IEQ 6.5 THERMAL COMFORT

IEQ 13 THERMAL COMFORT IN AIR-CONDITIONED PREMISES

EXCLUSIONS Buildings where air-conditioning is provided by window units or split

units.

OBJECTIVE Ensure that the air-conditioning system can provide the stated design
conditions in occupied spaces under changing load conditions.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Temperature

1 credit for sustaining the air temperature at the design value within ±1°C
when the air side system is operating at steady state under normal
occupied periods.
b) Room air distribution
1 credit where room air diffusers satisfy the Air Diffusion Performance
Index.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person detailing the design criteria with respect to
thermal comfort conditions for all types of premises included in the
building, and the results of the measurements in the specified sample of
premises.
a) Temperature
The measurement locations shall include at least one representative
sample of each type of premises (occupied spaces) as defined by the
type of HVAC system used, design occupancy density, nature of usage,
zoning, etc. The main physical parameters of the indoor climate (air
temperature and relative humidity) are undertaken under normal
occupied periods. The results shall demonstrate compliance with the
prescribed design criteria within the prescribed limits, for a minimum of
90% of the prescribed locations. The measurement shall be made
reference to the current EPD’s IAQ certification scheme. The sensors
used in the measurement survey shall have an accuracy that complies
with ASHRAE 55-1992 [1], ISO 7726 [2] or equivalent.
b) Room air distribution
The measurement locations shall be as for a). It is acceptable to
demonstrate the credit compliance by either calculation or by in-situ
measurements.

BACKGROUND The HVAC system should be possible to maintain room conditions

(within acceptable tolerances) under normal occupied periods.
Measurements under such circumstances can demonstrate compliance
with the operating requirements.

1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE 55-1992: Thermal Environmental
Conditions for Human Occupancy. Atlanta 1992.
2 International Standard Organization. International standard 7726, Ergonomics of the thermal environment — Instruments
for measuring physical quantities. 1998.

Page 6-33
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

6 IEQ 6.5 THERMAL COMFORT

IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

EXCLUSIONS Buildings that are not designed to utilise natural ventilation.

OBJECTIVE Promote the application of measures that reduce elevated temperatures

caused by external heat gains, and ensure installed air-conditioning units
can provide adequate control of indoor temperature.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Performance with natural ventilation

1 credit for demonstrating indoor operative temperatures in
occupied/habitable rooms meet the 80% acceptability limits.
Alternatively,
1 credit for demonstrating the predicted Mean Vote (PMV) in
occupied/habitable rooms is between –1 and +1.
b) Performance with air-conditioning
1 credit for sustaining the air temperature at the design value within
±1.5°C when the air-conditioning unit is operating at steady state under
normal occupied periods.

ASSESSMENT a) Performance with natural ventilation

The assessment will seek to establish the extent to which the design of the
building envelope can mitigate the effects of external heat gains. Based on
the output from a suitable thermal simulation model of the building the
predicted indoor operative temperature shall be compared with the criteria
given in ASHRAE 55 [ 1 ] under the ‘Optional Method for Determining
Acceptable Thermal Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces’.
Assessment may be confined to the ‘worst case’ scenarios, i.e., for those
normally occupied areas of the building most susceptible to external heat
gains and/or do not benefit from the prevailing climatic conditions.
The spaces in question must be equipped with operable windows that can
be readily opened and adjusted by the occupants. Mechanical cooling for
the space shall not be provided, although mechanical ventilation with
unconditioned air may be utilised.
The thermal analysis shall be undertaken using dynamic thermal
modelling software. The thermal performance within the occupied or
habitable space of each type of premises most affected by solar gains
shall be determined. The modelling shall be undertaken full annual
simulation using standard Hong Kong weather data. The modelling will
include the effect of installed solar control features, e.g. glazing, internal or
external shading components, fabric and infiltration specifications, and site
obstructions. The modelling need not include any internal gains, i.e.,
simulations for unoccupied premises are required.
Alternatively, compliance may be demonstrated under appropriate
summer and winter conditions through the measurement of temperature in
suitable locations in a sample of premises most exposed to external heat
gains.
The Client shall provide evidence in the form of a report prepared by a

1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers. ASHRAE 55-2004: Thermal Environmental
Conditions for Human Occupancy. Atlanta 2004.

Page 6-34
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

suitably qualified person detailing any means used to control the external
(solar) heat gains, the specification and details of the thermal simulation
software used in the analysis, and the results of the simulations.
Where compliance is demonstrated by measurements the details of
measuring equipment, sampling locations, sampling time, time of
measurements, external temperature and prevailing weather conditions
shall be provided.
Where it can be demonstrated that the predicted indoor temperature lies
within the 80% acceptability limits given in ASHRAE 55-2004 a credit shall
be awarded.
Alternately, where it can be demonstrated that the Predicted Mean Vote
(PMV) in occupied/ habitable rooms is between –1 and +1, a credit shall
be awarded.
b) Performance with air-conditioning
The measurement locations shall include at least one representative
sample of each type of premises (occupied spaces) as defined by the type
of HVAC system used, design occupancy density, nature of usage,
zoning, etc. The measurements shall be undertaken under normal
occupied period. The sensors used in the measurement survey shall have
an accuracy that complies with ISO 7726 [2] or equivalent. To earn credit
the results shall demonstrate compliance with the prescribed design
criteria within the prescribed limits, for a minimum of 90% of the prescribed
locations.

BACKGROUND Thermal comfort standards such as ISO 7730 [ 3 ] and ASHRAE 55

establish relatively tight limits on recommended indoor thermal
environments, and do not distinguish between what would be considered
thermally acceptable in buildings conditioned with natural ventilation.
Derived from laboratory experiments using a thermal-balance model of the
human body these standards have attempted to provide an objective
criterion for thermal comfort, specifying combinations of personal and
environmental factors that will produce interior thermal environments
acceptable to at least 80% of a building's occupants. The heat-balance
models, on which the standards are based, were developed in tightly
controlled conditions. The people involved were considered passive
subjects of climate change in artificial settings, and little consideration was
given to the broad ways they might naturally adapt to a more wide ranging
thermal environments in realistic settings.
Field studies and research has demonstrated that occupants of buildings
with centralised HVAC systems become finely tuned to the very narrow
range of indoor temperatures provided, developing high expectations for
homogeneity and cool temperatures, and soon became critical if thermal
conditions do not match these expectations [4,5]. In contrast, occupants
of naturally ventilated buildings are more tolerant of a wider range of
temperatures. This range extends beyond the comfort zones established
for air-conditioned buildings, and may more closely reflect the local
patterns of outdoor climate.
Analysis of the available data has established that behavioural
adaptations, such as changes in clothing insulation or indoor air speeds,
could account for only half the observed variance in thermal preferences
of people when in naturally ventilated buildings. Given that physiological

2 International Standard Organization. ISO 7726, Ergonomics of the thermal environment — Instruments for measuring
physical quantities. 1998.
3 International Standard Organization. ISO 7730. Moderate thermal environments – Determination of the PMV and PPD
indices and specification of the conditions for thermal comfort.
4 de Dear R, Brager G S, Reardon J, Nicol F et al. Developing an adaptive model of thermal comfort and preference/
Discussion. ASHRAE Transactions. Vol. 104. 1998. pp 145-167.
5 Brager G S, de Dear R. A Standard for Natural Ventilation. ASHRAE Journal. October 2000. pp 21-28.

Page 6-35
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

adaptation is unlikely to play much of a role; it is suggested that the rest of

the variance is attributable to psychological factors [4]. Relaxation of
thermal expectations may be due to a combination of higher levels of
perceived control and a greater diversity of thermal experiences in a
naturally ventilated building.

For the purposes of ASHRAE 55-2004, occupant-controlled naturally

conditioned spaces are those spaces where the thermal conditions of the
space are regulated primarily by the occupants through opening and
closing of windows. The ‘Optional Method for Determining Acceptable
Thermal Conditions in Naturally Conditioned Spaces’ is intended for such
spaces. In order for this optional method to apply, the space in question
must be equipped with operable windows that open to the outdoors and
that can be readily opened and adjusted by the occupants of the space.
Mechanical cooling for the space should not be available, although
mechanical ventilation with unconditioned air may be utilised. The method
applies only to spaces where the occupants are engaged in near
sedentary physical activities, with metabolic rates ranging from 1.0 met to
1.3 met, and may freely adapt their clothing to the indoor and/or outdoor
thermal conditions.
Allowable indoor operative temperatures for spaces that meet these
criteria may be determined from Figure 5.3 in ASHRAE 55-2004. The 80%
acceptability limits are for typical applications and shall be used when
other information is not available.
The allowable operative temperature limits in Figure 5.3 may not be
extrapolated to outdoor temperatures above and below the end points of
the curves in this figure. If the mean monthly outdoor temperature is less
than 10°C or greater than 33.5°C, this option may not be used, and no
specific guidance for naturally conditioned spaces is included in this
standard. Consequently, for the BEAM assessment, months for which the
mean monthly outdoor temperatures are outside these limits can be
discounted.

It is most likely that some of the premises within a building development

will be subject to higher than average external heat gains, with consequent
higher internal temperatures during summer months. Those premises at
more exposed facades will suffer from adverse winter conditions. It is
appropriate to examine the detailed thermal performance of the most
susceptible premises, and based on detailed analysis employ mitigation
measures, such as changes in fabric design and other solar control
strategies.
When air-conditioning is likely to be installed the type, rating and
installation of units should be such as to provide for control over thermal
comfort conditions over the range of thermal loads that are likely to arise.
The Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) refers to a thermal scale that runs from
Cold (-3) to Hot (+3), originally developed by Fanger and later adopted as
an ISO standard. The original data was collected by subjecting a large
number of people (reputedly many thousands of Isreali soldiers) to
different conditions within a climate chamber and having them select a
position on the scale the best described their comfort sensation. A
mathematical model of the relationship between all the environmental and
physiological factors considered was then derived from the data.
From the PMV, the Predicted Percentage of Dissatisfied people (PPD) can
be determined. As PMV moves away from neutral (PMV=0) in either
direction, PPD increases. The maximum number of people dissatisfied
with their comfort conditions is 100% and, as you can never please all of
the people all of the time, the minimum number even in what would be
considered perfectly comfortable conditions is 5%.

Page 6-36
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 14 THERMAL COMFORT IN NATURALLY VENTILATED PREMISES

SIMULATION SOFTWARE For the purposes of simulating thermal conditions (and in estimating
energy use) previous BEAM assessments have employed the simulation
software HTB2 [6]. Any software meeting the requirements of ASHRAE
standard 140 [7] would be acceptable.

6 Alexander D K. HTB2 User Manual Version 2.0. Welsh School of Architecture, Cardiff University.
7 American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers.
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 140-2001. Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Building Energy Analysis Computer
Programs

Page 6-37
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING

6 IEQ 6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY

IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Encourage a holistic examination of site layout, building design, and

fenestration design, such as to maximise access to daylight for the
purposes of improved health and comfort.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit where at least 80% of floor area in all normally occupied spaces
is adequately lit with an average daylight factor of 2% or more.
1 credit where provision of suitable daylight glare control and maintaining
the average daylight factor of 2%.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall submit evidence in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person demonstrating compliance with the assessment
criteria. Daylight availability, based on ‘worst case’ scenarios, i.e., the
most obstructed windows, shall be demonstrated by either one of the
following methods.
a) Measurement of DF
Measurement of average daylight factor (DF) shall be by the methods
recommended by CIBSE [1], or equal equivalent.
Given that the specified sky condition can be difficult to obtain in practice
the following modelling methods are acceptable alternatives.
b) Estimation of DF
The average daylight factor (DF) shall be estimated according to the
preferred method [2], that given in the CIBSE design guide [3], or similar
equivalent method. Alternatively, daylighting design software such as
Radiance [4] can be used to calculate the average DF provided it can be
demonstrated that the method of computation employed by the software
used is not inconsistent with the preferred calculation method.
The report submitted shall identify the key parameters used in the
computations/modelling, especially with regard to glazing transmittance,
and the reflectance’s of external and internal surfaces; and the suitable
daylight glare control. The values of the parameters shall reflect the
nature and type of surfaces on the external vertical obstructions and
horizontal surfaces, and likely internal finishes.
The room dimensions shall be taken to be a typical perimeter room for
the building, be it a habitable room, office, classroom, etc.
Where at least 80% of floor area in all normally occupied spaces is
adequately lit with an average daylight factor of 2% or more the credit
shall be awarded. The second credit shall be awarded for provision of
suitable daylight glare control and maintaining the average daylight factor
of 2%.

1 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Applications Manual – Window design.
2 Cheung H D, Chung T M. Calculation fo Mean Daylight Factor in a Building Interior Within a Dense Urban Environment.
Department of Building Services Engineering, Hong Kong Polytechnic University.
3 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Lighting Guide LG10. daylighting and window design. CIBSE.
4 Ward Larson, G. and Shakespeare, R. Rendering with RADIANCE. Morgan Kaufmann. San Francisco.

Page 6-38
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 15 NATURAL LIGHTING

BACKGROUND Access to daylight is an important aspect of building design from the

perspectives of comfort and health. Critical to providing sufficient daylight
is the provision of a view of the sky. The amount of daylight available for
specific rooms is related to:
• window and room geometry and room surface finishes;
• sky obstruction due to the form of the building and its overshadowing
from neighbouring buildings; and
• glazing transmittance.
In Hong Kong’s congested built form rooms on lower floors of buildings
may be considerably overshadowed by the built form. This can result in
significantly reductions in natural light, and will incur increased electricity
consumption for artificial lighting, and degradation of internal comfort and
health conditions. It is possible to take into account the overshadowing
by adjacent buildings using appropriate design tools.

Page 6-39
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS

6 IEQ 6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY

IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS

EXCLUSIONS Residential buildings, hotels and apartment buildings.

OBJECTIVE Ensure the adequacy and maintenance of visual comfort conditions

achieved by the electric lighting provisions in occupied spaces.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit where the prescribed lighting performance in each type of
premises in respect of illuminance and lighting quality is achieved.
It is required to fulfill the following:
(i) prescribed lighting performance in respect of maintained
illuminance and illuminance variation is achieved; and
(ii) the limiting unified glare rating is achieved and light sources have
an appropriate colour rendering index.
1 BONUS credit for providing automatic control of artificial lighting such
as daylight sensors at perimeter zone and/or occupancy sensor.

ASSESSMENT The design criteria for interior lighting shall be at the discretion of the
Client but shall embrace both ‘quantity’ and ‘quality’ of the lighting
system performance including: maintained horizontal, and where
appropriate vertical, illuminance, illuminance variation, limiting glare
index, colour rendering, and modulation of light output appropriate to the
type and use of the premises/indoor spaces.
The criteria adopted shall be based on authoritative guidance, such as
that provided in CIE [1,2], CIBSE [3] and/or IESNA [4] publications, or
equivalent. As the focus is on lighting for comfort and productivity,
lighting for performing arts, display decoration, ambience. etc., shall
normally be excluded from consideration.
Compliance with the assessment criteria shall be demonstrated either by
measurements using a standardised measurement protocol appropriate
to the parameter being assessed, and/or by modelling (calculation),
providing the calculation method or software used is based on a
standardised method, and uses data/assumptions appropriate to the
circumstances. Notwithstanding, demonstration of compliance with a)
requires that the maintained illuminance take into account the influence
on light output by adjacent air-conditioning or ventilation fixtures, and the
lighting maintenance plan (the period for luminaire cleaning and group
re-lamping) appropriate to the circumstances [5].
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the ‘as installed’ lighting systems or, for premises/spaces yet to
be fitted-out, the technical details of the proposed lighting systems for
each type of normally occupied space within the development. The
report shall detail the design criteria and the results of measurements or
other means demonstrating compliance. For premises to be fitted out by
tenants compliance shall be confirmed if the technical details and
contractual arrangements with tenants in respect of lighting installations

1 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Lighting of Indoor Work Places. CIE Standard S 008/E.
2 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Discomfort Glare in Interior Lighting. CIE 117-1995.
3 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Code for interior lighting. London. CIBSE.
th
4 Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Lighting Handbook, Reference & Applications. 9 edition., New York.
5 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems. CIE Technical Report -
Publication No. 97. Vienna.

Page 6-40
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS

is deemed to meet the assessment criteria.

The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the automatic control of artificial lighting such as daylight
sensors at perimeter zone and/or occupancy sensor.

MEASURED For lighting installations that are already installed, horizontal and vertical
PERFORMANCE illuminance and luminance can be measured using a lux meter and a
luminance meter. The colour quality of lamps can be assessed from the
lamp specifications. Colour appearance (correlated colour temperature)
can be checked from the lamp labels or by measurement using a colour
meter. Flicker can be assessed by whether the specified ballasts are
magnetic or electronic, and can be tested using a simple ‘flicker meter’.
Air diffusers located near to fluorescent luminaires with open lamp
compartments may result in cool air blowing over the lamps directly
causing decrease light output and lamp efficacy. The design details
should demonstrate that the cool air from diffusers will not adversely
impact on lamp performance.

COMPUTATION The ‘lumen method’ can be used to calculate the maintained illuminance
over the working plane according to the calculation procedure described
in Section 4.5.3 of the CIBSE Code or in Appendix 3 of the CIBSE
Lighting Guide [6]. The calculated maintained illuminance will then be
checked for compliance with the recommendations given in Section 2.6.4
of the Code, or the recommendations given in Chapter 5 of the Guide.
The illuminance variation consists of ‘uniformity’ which is concerned with
illuminance conditions on the task and immediate surroundings, and
‘diversity’ which expresses changes in illuminance across a larger space.
The uniformity and diversity can be calculated according to that
described in Section 4.5.4 of the Code. The calculated uniformity
(minimum to average illuminance) over any task area and immediate
surround should not be less than 0.8. The diversity of illuminance
expressed as the ratio of the maximum illuminance to the minimum
illuminance at any point in the ‘core area’ of the interior should not
exceed 5:1. The core area is that area of the working plane having a
boundary 0.5 m from the walls.
The glare index can be calculated according to either of the two methods
described by CIE [2], or the CIBSE Technical Memoranda [7]. These
methods are also summarised in Section 4.5.6 of the CIBSE Code [3].
The calculated glare index shall be checked for compliance with the
recommendations given in Section 2.6.4 of the Code or Chapter 5 of the
Lighting Guide.
For assessment using the IESNA Lighting Criteria, the calculation
methods described in Chapter 9 of the IESNA Lighting Handbook can be
used for the calculation of the following parameters:
• horizontal and vertical illuminance;
• glare: VCP or UGR; and
• luminance.
Alternatively, a validated computer program such as RADIANCE,
LIGHTSCAPE etc can be used for the calculation. The calculated results
will then be checked for compliance with the recommended criteria in the
IESNA Lighting Design Guide.

BACKGROUND Energy efficiency aspects of electric lighting are dealt with in the

6 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Lighting Guide LG7: Lighting for offices. London, CIBSE, 1993.
7 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Technical Memoranda TM10. Calculation of glare indices.
London, CIBSE, 1985.

Page 6-41
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 16 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREAS

assessment of energy use. This section deals with the lighting quality
and maintenance aspects of lighting. Lighting quality is a complicated
subject and is an integration of task performance, visual comfort, social
communication, mood, health, safety and well-being and aesthetic
judgment. It is also related to economics and the environment in respect
of the installation, maintenance and operation of the lighting system.
Proper lighting maintenance (clean lamps and luminaires, lamps
replaced periodically to avoid the depreciation) is important to maintain
good lighting quality throughout the whole life of the lighting installation.
Besides the energy conservation, power quality and control benefits
offered by dimmable high-frequency electronic ballasts, the high
frequency modulation avoids the problem of ‘flicker’ that can occur when
using mains frequency ballasts.

Page 6-42
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 17 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN AREAS NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED

6 IEQ 6.6 LIGHTING QUALITY

IEQ 17 INTERIOR LIGHTING IN AREAS NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure the adequacy of artificial lighting provisions in common areas and
service areas such as plant rooms.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building Regulations for those common areas
covered by regulations, e.g. Building (Planning) Regulation (B(P)R) 40 in
respect of lighting of staircases.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit where the prescribed lighting performance in each type of
common or service space in respect of light output and lighting quality is
achieved.

ASSESSMENT Here the focus is on lighting for safety, security and work activities
required for operation and maintenance. The design criteria is at the
discretion of the Client but shall embrace both ‘quantity’ and ‘quality’ of
the lighting system performance including: maintained horizontal, and
where appropriate vertical, illuminance, illuminance variation, limiting
glare index, colour rendering, and modulation of light output appropriate
to the type and use of the premises/indoor spaces. The criteria adopted
shall be based on authoritative guidance, such as that provided in CIE
[1,2], CIBSE [3] and/or IESNA [4] publications, or equal.
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the ‘as installed’ lighting systems or, for spaces yet to be fitted-
out, the technical details of the proposed lighting systems for each type
common or service space within the development. The report shall detail
the design criteria and the results of measurements or other means
demonstrating compliance.
Compliance with the assessment criteria shall be demonstrated either by
measurements using a standardised measurement protocol appropriate
to the parameter being assessed, and/or by modelling (calculation),
providing the calculation method or software used is based on a
standardised method, and uses data/assumptions appropriate to the
circumstances. Notwithstanding, demonstration of compliance with a)
requires that the maintained illuminance take into account the influence
on light output appropriate to the circumstances, such as the
recommendations given by CIE [5].

BACKGROUND Energy efficiency aspects of electric lighting are dealt with in the
assessment of energy use. This section deals with the lighting quality
and maintenance aspects of lighting systems provided in both common
areas and service areas of a building.
Reference should be made to Section IEQ16 for further information on
measurements and modelling on interior lighting systems.

1 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Lighting of Indoor Work Places. CIE Standard S 008/E.
2 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Discomfort Glare in Interior Lighting. CIE 117-1995.
3 The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers. Code for interior lighting. London. CIBSE.
4 Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Lighting Handbook, Reference & Applications. New York.
5 Commission Internationale de l'Eclairage (CIE). Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems. CIE Technical Report -
Publication No. 97. Vienna.

Page 6-43
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS

6 IEQ 6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE

IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS

EXCLUSIONS Buildings/premises where speech intelligibility is not important, and

rooms of a special acoustical nature.

OBJECTIVE Improve the acoustical properties of rooms in which speech intelligibility

is important.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating that internal noise levels are within the
prescribed criteria and the mid-frequency reverberation time in applicable
rooms meets the prescribed criteria for give types of premises.

ASSESSMENT There is no single all-encompassing set of criteria that will define good
acoustical properties for all types of rooms and uses. The Client shall
define the criteria appropriate to the type and use of the premises/rooms
in the building. The criteria for intruding noise level will be expressed in
terms of NC level. However, for the purposes of assessment account
should be taken of the criteria given below. Where alternative criteria are
used the Client shall provide evidence as to the suitability of the
alternative, e.g. by making reference to authoritative guidance. Likewise,
where criteria appropriate to the type and use of premises/spaces are
not stated herein, the Client shall provide evidence as to the suitability of
the criteria adopted. Mid-frequencies refer to 500Hz, 1kHz and 2kHz.
The internal noise sources include air conditioning units, breakout noise
from air ducts, air grills or etc.
Compliance shall be demonstrated by detailed calculations, or
measurement, or both, depending on the Client’s preference. The
reverberation time shall be assessed using Sabine’s formula [ 1 ] or
similar alternative taking into account the room details and appropriate
assumptions about the materials in the space. Measurements during
commissioning shall use the method given in ISO 3382 [ 2 ] or equal
equivalent.
The Client shall submit details in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person providing a schedule of the premises and
spaces in the building, relevant design details as they impact on
acoustical properties, the rooms/premises subject to field tests or for
which detailed calculations have been made, the acoustical criteria used,
underlying assumptions, and the results of tests or calculations
demonstrating compliance with the criteria.
Where it can be demonstrated that the acoustical quality in a sample of
each type of room in which speech intelligibility is important, as
measured or calculated, meets appropriate performance criteria the
credit shall be awarded.

PERFORMANCE CRITERIA a) Office type premises

The reverberation time of A-weighted sound pressure level, in modular
(private) offices and conference rooms, shall be 0.6 s or below. The
noise assessment criterion shall be NC40.
b) Classrooms and similar premises

1 I.Sharland. Woods practical guide to noise control. Colchester, England.

2 International Standard Organization. ISO 3382. Acoustics - Measurement of the reverberation time of rooms with reference
to other acoustical parameters.

Page 6-44
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 18 ROOM ACOUSTICS

The reverberation time of A-weighted sound pressure level in teaching

rooms, other than specialist teaching rooms such as laboratories and
workshops, shall be 0.6 s or below. The noise assessment criterion shall
be NC 35.
c) Residential premises, hotel and apartments
The reverberation time of A-weighted sound pressure level, in bedrooms
and living rooms, shall be between 0.4 and 0.6 s. The noise assessment
criterion shall be NC 30.
d) Indoor games halls & indoor swimming pools etc
The reverberation time of A-weighted sound pressure level, in indoor
game halls, indoor swimming pools or other recreational premises, shall
be 2.0 s or below. The noise assessment criterion shall be NC 45.
Criteria from standards and guides from authoritative sources should be
referenced. For example, Table 8 of BS 8233 [3] provides a guide to
reverberation time in unoccupied rooms for speech and music.

BACKGROUND A first step in architectural acoustic design is to identify appropriate

values of reverberation time for the intended use of a room and then to
specify materials to be used in the construction which will achieve the
desired value of the reverberation time for a given space and use.
The focus for BEAM is on the acoustical qualities in workplaces such as
offices and classrooms, libraries, and places of residence, etc. Whilst the
matter of room acoustics is complex, and defining performance by a
single indicator is problematic, an important acoustical measurement is
the reverberation time. It is used to determine how quickly sound decays
in a room, and offers a relatively simple assessment of acoustical design.
BEAM is not intended to substitute the design standards. It sets criteria
for good acoustical quality while the design guidelines and standards
established in other countries can also be considered.
Whilst reverberation time continues to be regarded as a significant
parameter, there is reasonable agreement than other types of
measurements are needed for a more complete evaluation of acoustical
quality of rooms. With respect to the standards and guides
recommendations, ANSI [4] suggests the maximum reverberation time of
A-weighted sound pressure level in classrooms and similar learning
spaces. However, the offices type premises, residential premises, hotel
and apartment there seems to be little available in the way of standards
or guides. ASTM [5] gives alternative parameter, speech privacy in open
offices, for an average speech spectrum using the Articulation Index
Method.

3 British Standards Institution BS8233:1999 – Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings – Code of Practice.
4 American National Standard ANSI S12.60-2002.
5 ASTM International. Designation E1130-02. Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of Speech Privacy in Open
Offices Using Articulation Index.

Page 6-45
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION

6 IEQ 6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE

IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION

EXCLUSIONS Buildings/premises which are inherently noisy and unaffected by noise

from adjacent premises/spaces.

OBJECTIVE Improve the noise isolation of normally occupied premises/rooms to

reduce impact of unwanted noise.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1 + 1 BONUS

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating airborne noise isolation between rooms,
spaces and premises meets the prescribed criteria.
For residential development only,
1 BONUS credit for demonstrating impact noise isolation between floors
meets the prescribed criteria.

ASSESSMENT As there are a number of ways to quantify or classify noise isolation

(insulation) in buildings, the exact performance criteria used to define
both airborne noise isolation and impact noise isolation shall be stated by
the Client. However, for the purposes of assessment account should be
taken of the criteria given below. Where alternative criteria is used the
Client shall provide evidence as to the suitability of the alternative, e.g.
by making reference to authoritative guidance. Likewise, where criteria
appropriate to the type and use of premises/spaces is not stated herein,
the Client shall provide evidence as to the suitability of the criteria
adopted.
Compliance shall be demonstrated by measurement or by detailed
calculations, or both, depending on the Client’s preference.
Measurements shall follow the protocols given in the referenced
standards. Calculations should be done with reference to appropriate
standards.
The Client shall submit details in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person providing a schedule of the premises and
spaces in the building, the noise isolation criteria adopted, relevant
structural details as they impact on noise isolation, the rooms/premises
subject to field tests or for which detailed calculations have been made,
underlying assumptions, and the results of tests or calculations
demonstrating compliance with the criteria (expressed in parameters that
are consistent with the test and/or calculation methods).
Where it can be demonstrated that airborne noise isolation, as measured
or calculated for the most susceptible spaces/rooms/premises, meets
appropriate performance criteria the credit shall be awarded.
For residential development only, where it can be demonstrated that
impact noise isolation (insulation) meets appropriate performance criteria
in the most susceptible spaces/ rooms/premises, the BONUS credit shall
be awarded.

MEASUREMENTS Procedures for measuring the sound isolation between rooms shall
follow that given in either ISO [1], ASTM [2] or equal equivalent. The
measurements shall be undertaken in at least one sample of each type

1 International Standard Organization. ISO 140-4: 1998. Acoustics - Measurement of sound Insulation in buildings and of
building elements. Part 4: Field measurements of airborne sound insulation between rooms.
2 ASTM International. Designation E 336 – 97. Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in
Buildings.

Page 6-46
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION

of normally occupied space, but shall include the worst case

circumstances likely to occur (e.g., conference rooms adjacent to
corridors, hotel rooms adjacent to lift lobbies, etc). No special preparation
of the tested spaces or rooms is permitted, i.e., tests are carried out in
as-built premises/rooms. The measurements shall be interpreted to a
single number indicator using either ISO [ 3 ], ASTM [ 4 ], or equal
equivalent.
Similar considerations shall apply to the measurement of impact noise
isolation, following the methods given in either ISO [5 ], ASTM [6 ] or
equal equivalent. No floor coverings, such as carpets, shall be used
during the measurements. The measurements shall also be interpreted
as a single number using either ISO [7], ASTM [8] or equivalent.

PERFORMANCE a) Office premises

CRITERIA
• Between two offices Dw = 38 dB minimum.
• Where privacy is important: Dw = 48 dB.
• Noise Isolation Class (NIC) of at least 40 for cellular offices.
b) Classrooms
Sound Transmission Class of walls between classrooms to be equal to
or greater than STC37 for classrooms on the same floor and equal or
greater than STC50, Impact Insulation Class IIC46 between floors.
c) Residential premises and hotel rooms
• Partitions separating a WC from a noise sensitive room: DnT,w of at
least 38 dB.
• In hotels, partitions and floors between rooms and between rooms
and corridors: DnT,w of at least 50 dB.
d) Residential premises
• Bedroom to living room: STC46 (same residential unit)
• Bedroom to bedroom: STC52, IIC52 (between residential units);
STC44 (same unit)
• Living room to living room: STC52, IIC52 (between residential units).

BACKGROUND Noise from outside sources, and consequently the noise isolation
provided by the building envelope, is covered under the assessment of
background noise. Noise from building equipment is also covered under
the assessment of background noise, and to some extent under the
assessment of vibration. There remains the problem of noise transmitted
between spaces, through walls and through floors, which are not
addressed under the local Building Regulations, but have been a matter
for legislation elsewhere.
The extent to which walls and floor can attenuate unwanted noise from
neighbours and neighbouring spaces is an important aspect of
controlling noise levels in interiors. Ventilation openings, doors, etc., are
likely to be the weakest part of the envelope enclosing a space as far as
airborne noise transmission is concerned. Guidance on the design of

3 International Standard Organization. ISO 717-1. 1996. Acoustics – Rating of sound Insulation in buildings and of building
elements. Part 1 – Airborne sound insulation.
4 ASTM International. Designation: E413 – 04. Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
5 International Standard Organization. ISO 140-7. Acoustics - Measurement of sound Insulation in buildings and of building
elements. Part 7: Field measurements of impact sound insulation of floors.
6 ASTM International. Designation: E 1007 – 97. Standard test method for field measurement of tapping machine impact
sound transmission through floor-ceiling assemblies and associated support structures.
7 International Standard Organization. ISO 717-2. Acoustics – Rating of sound Insulation in buildings and of building
elements. Part 2 – Impact sound insulation.
8 ASTM International. Designation: E 989 -89. Standard Classification for determination of impact Insulation Class (IIC).

Page 6-47
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 19 NOISE ISOLATION

walls and floors, and guidelines for assessing performance is available in

the literature (e.g. [9]).

9 British Standards Institution BS8233 – Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings – Code of Practice.

Page 6-48
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE

6 IEQ 6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE

IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE

EXCLUSIONS Buildings/premises in which speech intelligibility is not important.

OBJECTIVE Control as far as practicable the background noise in premises at levels

appropriate to the intended use of the premises.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating background noise levels are within the
prescribed criteria.

ASSESSMENT BEAM regards background noise in premises/rooms as a matter having

an important bearing on quality and productivity. Given that different
criteria maybe used the Client shall define the criteria appropriate to the
type and use of the premises/rooms in the building. However, for the
purposes of assessment account should be taken of the criteria given
below. Where alternative criteria are used, the Client shall provide
evidence as to the suitability of the alternative, e.g. by making reference
to authoritative guidance. Likewise, where criteria appropriate to the type
and use of premises/spaces are not stated herein, the Client shall
provide evidence as to the suitability of the criteria adopted.
Compliance shall be demonstrated by detailed calculations or
measurements, or both, depending on the Client’s preference. Sufficient
numbers of calculations and/or measurements shall be made to ensure
that the requirements are met in all specified premises, but in particular
for premises near street level and major outdoor sources. Some
relaxation of the noise criterion for residential units may be considered.
The intruding noise sources shall include external noise sources such as
traffic noise, railway noise, etc.
Site measurements on the completed building should be on at least one
sample of each type of premises/room, taking account the worst case
conditions of exposure to noise sources external to the space, and
undertaken during periods appropriate to the usage pattern for the
space. Measuring equipment shall conform to the accuracy requirements
given in IEC 60804 [1] to type 2 or better, or equal equivalent standard.
For centrally air-conditioned buildings, the assessment shall take into
account noise from building services equipment while for de-centralised
air-conditioned buildings, the assessment shall only consider the external
noise sources.
The Client shall submit details in the form of a report prepared by a
suitably qualified person providing a schedule of the premises and
spaces in the building, relevant design details as they impact on noise
isolation, the rooms/premises subject to field tests or for which detailed
calculations have been made, the background noise criteria used,
underlying assumptions, and the results of tests or calculations
demonstrating compliance with the criteria (expressed in parameters that
are consistent with the test and/or calculation methods).
Where it can be demonstrated that background noise isolation, as
measured or calculated for the most susceptible spaces/rooms/premises,
meets appropriate performance criteria the credit shall be awarded.

1 International Electroctechnical Commission. IEC 60804: 2000. Integrating-averaging sound level meters.

Page 6-49
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE

ASSESSMENT CRITERIA a) Offices

• Modular (private) offices and small conference rooms: 40 dB LAeq,T=8
hr or 45 dB LAeq,T=5 mins.
• Large landscaped offices: 45 dB LAeq,T=8hr or 50 dB LAeq,T=5min.
b) Classrooms
Background noise shall be below 45 dB LAmax in schools in urban areas,
otherwise at or below 40 dB LAmax, effective between the hours of 08:00
to 16:00.
c) Residential premises and hotel rooms
• In bedrooms under window closed conditions at or below 30 dB
LAeq,T=8 hr, or 35 dB LAeq,T=5 mins, and < 45 dB between 23:00 to
07:00.
• In habitable rooms (other than kitchens) under closed window
conditions < 55 dB LAeq,T=16 hrs between 07:00 to 23:00.
d) Indoor games halls & indoor swimming pools etc
Background noise level shall be less than 50 dB LAeq,T=5 mins.
Tables 5 and 6 of BS 8233 [ 2 ] give criterion for various activities in
buildings.

BACKGROUND Background noise sources include that from external sources as well as
from the building services equipment. Table 4.1 in Chapter 9 of the Hong
Kong Standards and Planning Guidelines provides a summary of
maximum permissible noise levels at the external facade applicable to
building uses which rely on operable windows for ventilation. Guidance
on separation distances between road traffic and rail traffic and
residential buildings is given in the Guidelines.
Calculations can be made in terms of LAeq,T according to BS 8233, where
T = 16 h (daytime) and 8 h (night time), appropriate to the criteria
chosen. Calculations using the statistical energy analysis [3] are also
acceptable. In centrally air-conditioned premises while NC, NR, PNC,
NCB and RC are acceptable criteria for noise from air-conditioning
equipment, the presence of outside noise sources renders LAeq,T a better
performance indicator for the aural environment [4]
Noise levels at the façade of a building can be established by
measurement or prediction by simulation methods approved by the
Environmental Protection Department. Predictions should take into
consideration future as well as existing land uses. Estimation of road
traffic noise can be made using the UK Department of Transport’s
prediction method [5]. For railway noise, calculations shall be made in
terms of LAeq,T using the UK Department of Transport’s prediction method
[6]. For noise from industry which are more or less of steady level, LAeq,T
is estimated according to British Standard BS 4142 [7]. T in the case can
be 1 hr or 30 minutes.
The Environmental Protection Department also describes practical
measures that can be taken at the design stages to achieve an

2 British Standard Institution. BS 8233 Code of Practice for sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings.
3 European Committee for Standardization. CEN EN 12354 Building Acoustics – Estimation of acoustic performance of
buildings from the performance of elements. Bruxelles.
4 Chan D W T, Tang S K, Burnett J. Noise Criteria for Hong Kong Building Environmental Assessment Method for New
Offices and Existing Offices (HK-BEAM). HKIE Transactions. HKIE Transactions, Vol. 5, No. 2, 1998, pp. 1-5.
5 UK Department of Transport. The Calculation of Road Traffic Noise. HM Stationary Office.
6 UK Department of Transport. The Calculation of Railway Noise. HM Stationary Office.
7 British Standards Institution. Method for rating industrial noise affecting mixed residential and industrial areas. British
Standard BS 4142:1990. London, BSI, 1990.

Page 6-50
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 20 BACKGROUND NOISE

acceptable noise environment in new noise sensitive developments [8],

and for planning residential developments against road traffic noise [9].
The Environmental Protection Department also provides guidelines on
practical noise control measures for ventilation systems [ 10 ], and for
pumping systems [11].

8 Environmental Protection Department. Practice Note for Professional Persons. ProPECC PN 4/93. Planning and
Designing Noise Sensitive Developments.
9 Environmental Protection Department. Practice Note for Professional Persons. ProPECC PN 1/97. Streamlined Approach
for the Planning of Residential Developments Against Road Traffic Noise.
10 Environmental Protection Department. Good Practices on Ventilation System Noise Control.
11 Environmental Protection Department. Good Practices on Pumping System Noise Control.

Page 6-51
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 21 INDOOR VIBRATION

6 IEQ 6.7 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE

IEQ 21 INDOOR VIBRATION

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Avoidance of excessive vibration from building services equipment and

external sources.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES None.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for demonstrating vibration levels shall not exceed the prescribed
criteria.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence of the investigation in the form of a
report prepared by a suitably qualified person demonstrating compliance
with the criteria given in ISO 2631-2 [1].

BACKGROUND Excessive vibration is buildings can also be a source of annoyance to

users. It is possible to mitigate against vibration caused external sources,
such as traffic, and internal sources, such as building services
equipment, through good design.

1 International Standard Organization. ISO2631-2. Evaluation of human exposure to whole-body vibration – Part 2 :
Continuous and shock-induced vibration in buildings (1 to 80Hz)

Page 6-52
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 22 ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITY

6 IEQ 6.8 BUILDING AMENITIES

IEQ 22 ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITY

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Ensure full access to pertinent building facilities for persons with
disability.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 1

PREREQUISITES Full compliance with Building (Planning) Regulation (CAP 123F)

Regulation 72 ‘Buildings to be planned for use by persons with a
disability’ and Schedule 3 ‘Persons With A Disability’, and the obligatory
design requirements set out in the Code of Practice for Barrier Free
Access [1].

CREDIT REQUIREMENT 1 credit for providing enhanced provisions for access for disabled
persons.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide evidence that details the designs to demonstrate
full compliance with the prerequisites, and demonstrate how they provide
for enhanced levels of access for disabled persons.
Credit shall be awarded where, apart from the regulatory requirements
the enhanced provisions as identified in the latest edition of CoP for
Barrier Free Access, or similar provisions, are provided where applicable
to the type(s) of premises in the building.

BACKGROUND In order to enhance social integration disabled persons should have the
same rights as any other individuals. Under Disability Discrimination
Ordinance, discrimination against persons with a disability by failing to
provide means of access to any premises that the public is entitled to
enter or use, or by refusing to provide appropriate facilities is prohibited,
unless the premises are designed to be inaccessible to persons with a
disability. The legal requirements for the provision of facilities for the
disabled are prescribed in the Building (Planning Regulations (CAP
123F) Regulation 72 ‘Buildings to be planned for use by persons with a
disability’ and Schedule 3 ‘Persons With A Disability’.
Full access for disabled persons means more than just being able to
enter and leave a building, or use the toilets. It enables persons with a
disability to make full use of the basic facilities in a building without
assistance and undue difficulties. The Code of Practice for Barrier Free
Access [1] sets out design requirements to cater for the special needs of
persons with locomotory disabilities, visual impairment and hearing
impairment.
Facilities that cater for the special needs of the physically impaired
should be provided, which include but not limited to shaded areas for
walking and sitting; accessibility to public toilets; adequate lighting;
emergency phones; visual-free walking areas; ramps with handrails; and
car or bus dropping-off points near to venues.
As the advice provided cannot be exhaustive, developers and designers
should exercise forethought and creativity to cater for the well-being of
disabled persons when designing buildings, allowing greater
independence of disabled persons, the elderly, and other less physically
able persons using the facilities.

1 Code of Practice for Barrier Free Access. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/code/e_bfa.htm

Page 6-53
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

6 IEQ 6.8 BUILDING AMENITIES

IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

EXCLUSIONS None.

OBJECTIVE Improve the standard and quality of buildings.

CREDITS ATTAINABLE 2

PREREQUISITES Compliance with the Building Regulations.

CREDIT REQUIREMENT a) Amenities for the benefit of building users.

1 credit for providing amenity features that enhance the quality and
functionality of a building to the benefit of building users.
b) Amenities for improved operation and maintenance.
1 credit for providing amenity features that allow for improved operation
and maintenance of the building and its engineering services.

ASSESSMENT a) Amenities for the benefit of building users.

The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the amenity features provided within the building for the
purposes of improving the living and/or working experience of building
users. The report shall identify the exempted percentage GFA obtained
under regulations, and the additional percentage of GFA provided for the
amenities for which no exemption has been allowed.
Where it can be demonstrated that passive and active recreational
facilities, balconies, mail rooms, lift lobbies, common areas, etc., are
provided, to at least to the extent described in the referenced documents
(see below), and where the Client has included a number of such
facilities beyond those giving exemptions in the gross floor area
calculations, then the credit shall be awarded.
b) Amenities for improved operation and maintenance.
The Client shall submit a report prepared by a suitably qualified person
detailing the amenity features provided within the building for the
purposes of improving the flexibility in use and operation and
maintenance of the building. The report shall identify the exempted
percentage GFA obtained under regulations, and the additional
percentage of GFA provided for the amenities for which no exemption
has been allowed.
Where it can be demonstrated that provisions that serve to enhance
operation and maintenance exist, to at least to the extent described in
the referenced documents (see below), and where the Client has
included a number of such facilities beyond those giving exemptions in
the gross floor area calculations, then the credit shall be awarded.
Given that the nature and extent of amenities will vary with the type and
scale of the development the Client should provide the rationale if any of
the listed amenities is not included.

BACKGROUND Amenity features are loosely defined as those elements of design that,
whilst not statutory requirements are desirable to improve the standard
and quality of a building [1].
To encourage these features, the Building Authority is prepared to
consider modification and exemption, under the Buildings Ordinance and

1 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers, PNAP No. APP-42.
Amenity Features. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP042.pdf

Page 6-54
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

Regulations, for the provision of new amenities in both new

developments and existing buildings. To justify favourable consideration
for modification or exemption, such proposals should meet one or a
combination of the following objectives :
• encouraging efficient and effective building management;
• enhancing the quality of life for residents and users;
• obviating the desire or temptation for unauthorised building works;;
and
• improving environmental compatibility with the neighbourhood.

The amenity features identified includes:

• provisions for air-conditioning installations;
• security gates;
• counters, kiosks, offices, stores, guard rooms, lavatories for building
management staff;
• logistics service room;
• mail room;
• horizontal screens;
• recreational facilities; and
• satellite dishes.

GREEN AND INNOVATIVE To protect and improve the built and natural environment, the Buildings
BUILDINGS Department (BD), the Lands Department (LandsD) and the Planning
Department (PlanD) promote the construction of green and innovative
buildings. The objective is to encourage the design and construction of
buildings that encompass the following features:
(a) Adopting a holistic life cycle approach to planning, design,
construction and maintenance;
(b) Maximizing the use of natural renewable resources and
recycled/green building material;
(c) Minimizing the consumption of energy, in particular those
nonrenewable types; and
(d) Reducing construction and demolition waste.
Joint Practice Note No. 1 [ 2 ] sets out the incentives provided to
encourage the incorporation of certain features in building development,
including:
• balconies;
• wider common corridors and lift lobbies;
• communal sky gardens; and
• communal podium gardens.
Criteria and conditions for exempting the above green features are listed
in the JPN. To contain the effect on the building bulk resulting from the
provision of these incentives, the cumulative GFA exemption for all the
green features, excluding sky and podium gardens, should not exceed
8% of the total permitted GFA for the development.

2 Buildings Department, Land Department, Planning Department. Joint Practice Note No. 1. Green and Innovative Buildings.
http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/joint/JPN01.pdf

Page 6-55
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

Joint Practice Note No. 2 [3] includes:

• mail delivery rooms with mailboxes; and
• communal sky gardens for non-residential buildings.

OPEN SPACE AND PNAP No. APP-132 [4] describes the factors that the Building Authority
RECREATIONAL AREAS may take into account in considering applications for flexibility in
determining site coverage and open space to facilitate innovative design.
PNAP No. APP-108 [5] sets out the general guidelines on proposals to
dedicate land or area within a building for use as public passage and the
concessions which the Building Authority (BA) may grant upon
acceptance of such dedication.
The provision of podium roof gardens and play areas is encouraged.
Where these are under and within the perimeter of a domestic building a
modification would be granted provided the area is of open design and
not encumbered with structural elements. Certain other recreational
facilities such as squash courts, indoor swimming pools, etc., for active
or passive recreational activities can be considered for exclusion from
GFA calculations [1]. Lands Department provides details of the
recreational facilities commonly allowed in residential developments [6].
Applications for exclusion of floor areas for recreational use from GFA
calculations must be accompanied by information substantiating the
need for the areas with justification on overall size of the facilities, the
headroom requirements, etc., [7]. In normal circumstances the Building
Authority would not expect the GFA of such facilities to exceed 5% of the
domestic floor area. Open-sided covered landscaped area/children play
areas provided under the footprint of the domestic tower would not be
subject to the 5% limitation.

ENTRANCES Prestige entrances such as large voids in front of cinema and theatre
balconies, in banking halls and shopping arcades, entrance lobbies, etc.,
may be exempted from GFA calculations [8].

BUILDING SERVICES Non-accountable GFA applies to basic building services facilities such as
FACILITIES water tanks, meter rooms, pump rooms, cable riser duct rooms, etc., are
exempt providing the size and location are appropriate to the layout and
size of the main building. Particular designs of building services facilities
such as chimney shafts, fire refuge areas, swimming pool filtration plant
rooms, pipe-ducts, etc., can also be exempt [8]. The area of refuse
container chambers, hopper rooms, chutes, and storage chambers
planed to suit factors listed in PNAP No. APP-35 [ 9 ] may also be
discounted.

3 Buildings Department, Land Department, Planning Department. Joint Practice Note No. 2. Second Package of Incentives
to Promote Green and Innovative Buildings. http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/joint/JPN02.pdf
4 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-132 Site Coverage and Open Space Provision.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP132.pdf
5 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-108 Dedication of Land/Area for Use as Public Passage.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP108.pdf
6 Lands Administration Office, Lands Department. Practice Note 4/2000. Recreational Facilities in Domestic Development.
7 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-104 Exclusion of Floor Areas for Recreational Use.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP104.pdf
8 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-2 Calculation of Gross Floor Area and Non-accountable Gross Floor Area
Building (Planning) Regulations 23(3) (a) and (b). http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP002.pdf
9 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-35 Refuse Storage and Collection - Building (Refuse Storage and Material
Recovery Chambers and Refuse Chutes) Regulations. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP035.pdf

Page 6-56
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (IEQ)
VERSION 1.1 IEQ 23 AMENITY FEATURES

For residential buildings, projections such as wall boxes or platforms,

window cills, flower boxes, etc., of prescribed dimensions may be
excluded from site coverage considerations [ 10 ]. Notwithstanding,
canopies, balconies, air-conditioner platforms, etc., need to be properly
designed and constructed [11].

For commercial and industrial buildings, a centralised air-conditioning

system should be provided or suitable internal areas set aside for this
purpose at the design stage, with allowance made for adequate ducting
and trunking, recesses, etc. In accordance with Regulation 23(3)(b), any
floor space genuinely intended for air-conditioning may be excluded from
gross floor area (GFA) calculations. Air-conditioning plant rooms not
exceeding 1% of the total floor area of a building, or air handling units not
exceeding 4% of the GFA of each floor, are considered reasonable [1].

The lift service in a building has been the subject of complaints from time
to time. The Building Authority (BA) accepts that occupants of the
building may have legitimate cause for concern in some cases. PNAP
No. APP-89 [ 12 ] introduces guidelines on the provision of lifts in
buildings for domestic and office use with a view to enhancing standards
of lift services, thereby improving the quality of life for the occupants of
domestic and office buildings.

PNAP No. APP-84 [13] specifies the BA's requirements other provisions
for communications systems. It would also be appropriate to make
provisions for accommodating satellite dishes [1].

10 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-19 Projections in relation to site coverage and plot ratio Building (Planning)
Regulations 20 & 21. http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP019.pdf
11 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-68 Safe Design and Construction of Cantilevered Projecting Structures.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP068.pdf
12 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-89. Provision of better lift service.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP089.pdf
13 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers, PNAP No. APP-84. Access Facilities for Telecommunications and Broadcasting Services.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/APP/APP084.pdf

Page 6-57
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INNOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS (IA)
VERSION 1.1

7 INNOVATIONS AND IA 1 INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES

ADDITIONS IA 2 PERFORMANCE ENHANCEMENTS
IA 3 BEAM PROFESSIONAL
INTRODUCTION This section allows for a Client to submit for consideration for the award
of bonus credits any innovative techniques or performance
enhancements which the Client deems to provide environmental benefits
additional to those already covered in BEAM Plus for New Buildings.

CREDITS Maximum 5 BONUS credits + 1 credit for BEAM Professional

IA 1 INNOVATIVE This section applies to advanced practices and new technologies that
have not hitherto found application in Hong Kong or even elsewhere. Any
TECHNIQUES credits gained under this heading shall be regarded as ‘bonus’ credits,
counting towards the total credits obtained, but not towards the total
credits obtainable.
Credits may be awarded to an assessed building for innovative and/or
unconventional designs, construction techniques or provisions for
operation that will improve the environmental performance of a building
development during any part of its life cycle.

OBJECTIVE Encourage adoption of practices, new technologies and techniques that

have yet to find application in Hong Kong.

ASSESSMENT The onus will be on the Client to present evidence of the application of
new practices, technologies and techniques and the associated benefits.
The benefits may be considered in relation to sustainable living, energy
use, materials use, improved comfort, reduced pollution, etc. The
Assessor will refer the proposal to the BEAM Technical Review Panel
who will consider each aspect on its merits and award credits
accordingly.
The Client shall make a submission for granting additional credits that
identifies the intent of the proposed innovative technique, the proposed
criteria for assessing compliance, and the assessment criteria. The
weighting (number of credits) proposed would be considered in the light
of existing weightings under the various environmental impacts
categorised in BEAM, i.e. a technique which can demonstrate a resource
saving or reduced environmental loading would be compared to existing
criteria deemed to achieve similar levels of benefit.

IA 2 PERFORMANCE An alterative approach to achieving bonus credits under BEAM is to

demonstrate significant performance enhancements, i.e. strategies and
ENHANCEMENTS techniques that greatly exceed the requirements of existing BEAM
credits. For example, features that result in significantly higher levels of
service, energy, water or materials savings. Any credits gained under
this heading shall be regarded as ‘bonus’ credits, counting towards the
total credits obtained, but not towards the total credits obtainable.

OBJECTIVE Encourage adoption of practices, technologies and techniques that

provide for performance enhancements over and above stated
performance criteria in BEAM Plus for New Buildings.

ASSESSMENT The onus will be on the Client to present evidence of the performance
gains as compared to existing criteria. The Assessor will refer the
proposal to the BEAM Technical Review Panel who will consider each
aspect on its merits and award credits accordingly.
The Client shall make a submission for granting additional credits which
identifies the level of enhancement in performance in any environmental
aspect. The weighting (number of credits) proposed would be considered

Page 7-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS INNOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS (IA)
VERSION 1.1

in the light of existing weightings provided under the various

environmental impacts categorised in BEAM, i.e. a demonstrated
resource saving would be compared to existing criteria on a pro-rata
basis to determine the bonus credits to be awarded.

IA 3 BEAM At least 1 key member of the Project Team shall be certified as a BEAM
Professional.
PROFESSIONAL
OBJECTIVE To facilitate the application for the BEAM certification process and to
ensure the design of the project following the requirement of the BEAM
standards.

ASSESSMENT The Client shall provide the evidence of engagement of the BEAM
professional as the key Project Team member.

Page 7-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
Version 1.1

8 APPENDICES 8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL
8.3 EQUIVALENT CARBON DIOXIDE EMISSIONS
8.4 INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONERS
8.5 PROVISIONS FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT
8.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND BASELINES FOR WATER CONSUMPTION
8.7 SAMPLING PROTOCOL FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENTS

Page 8-1
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY 8.1.1 ASSESSMENT FRAMEWORK

USE 8.1.2 PERFORMANCE-BASED APPROACH
8.1.3 KEY FEATURES
8.1.4 PREREQUISITES
8.1.5 ASHRAE Approach

8.1.1 ASSESSMENT The assessment framework described herein applies to all types of new
FRAMEWORK building developments:
• those that are air-conditioned throughout the year, including
standalone buildings accommodating a single type or a mix of
premises;
• buildings/premises in the same development served by a central air-
conditioning plant; and
• buildings/premises that also utilise natural ventilation.

8.1.2 PERFORMANCE-BASED Buildings accommodating predominantly air-conditioned premises, such

APPROACH as malls, offices, hotels and high-rise apartments, are the dominant
electricity consumers in Hong Kong. In order to allow designers flexibility
in achieving the energy performance target for a building development,
the assessment of Annual Energy use is based primarily on the ‘Energy
Budget’ approach, supplemented by a range of basic requirements.
Performance-based Building Energy Code of EMSD provides
performance compliance that the proposed design shall be shown to
have annual energy consumption no greater than that of a reference
case that satisfies the prescriptive requirements.

Page 8-2
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

ASSESSMENT OF ANNUAL ENERGY USE AND PEAK ELECTRICITY

DEMAND

ASSESSED BUILDING
(SIMULATION) (SIMULATION)
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS, MIX OF AREAS SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS
AND TYPES OF PREMISES SAME AS
ASSESSED BUILDING
ORIENTATION
DEFAULTS CHARACTERISTICS: ENVELOPE
BARELY MEET MINIMUM PERFORMANCE MIX OF AREAS
CRITERIA IN CODES/STANDARDS OR TYPES OF SYSTEMS
‘BASIC’ --
PREDICTED ENERGY USE AND PEAK SPECIFIC DESIGN
ELECTRICITY DEMAND DESIGN ENHANCEMENTS NOT
∑ (A/C ENERGY + LIGHTING + EQUIPMENT
INCLUDED IN BASELINE BUILDING
ENERGY)
SIMULATION
+
APPLICABLE DEFAULTS
ENERGY BUDGET FOR ASSESSED
BUILDING

PREDICTED ANNUAL ENERGY USE

ZERO-CREDIT BENCHMARKS FOR AND PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND
ANNUAL ENERGY USE
AND
PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND

PERCENTAGE REDUCTION IN ANNUAL ENERGY USE

AND PEAK ELECTRICITY DEMAND (WHERE APPLICABLE)

ANNUAL ENERGY USE CREDITS

PEAK DEMAND CREDITS
AWARDED FOR THE ASSESSED BUILDING

Figure 8.1 Building energy performance assessment

8.1.4 KEY FEATURES The key features of the Performance-based Approach are as follows.
• the ‘Energy Budget’ for an ASSESSED BUILDING is the predicted
Annual Energy Use for a BASELINE BUILDING (zero-credit
benchmark);
• the BASELINE BUILDING model has the same shape and
dimensions, comprises the same mix of areas and types of premises
as the ASSESSED BUILDING (except for window-to-wall ratio
adjustment to meet the relevant regulatory requirement);
• the BASELINE BUILDING model will incorporate a range of standard
(default) characteristics such that the model represents a building
whose energy performance barely meets the relevant regulatory
requirements or meets only ‘basic’ design quality ;
• as far as possible the predicted Annual Energy Use of the
ASSESSED BUILDING will be based on its specific design
characteristics (except for some parameters for which default values
are specified - see Section 8.2); and
• the number of credits awarded is determined by the percentage
reduction in the predicted Annual Energy Use of the ASSESSED
BUILDING relative to the BASELINE BUILDING.
The assessment of Peak Electricity Demand Reduction is conducted in a

Page 8-3
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

similar manner, as follows:

• the zero-credit benchmark for Peak Electricity Demand will be that of
the BASELINE BUILDING model; and
• the number of credits awarded is determined by the percentage
reduction in the predicted Peak Electricity Demand of the
ASSESSED BUILDING relative to the BASELINE BUILDING.

8.1.5 PREREQUISITES A prerequisite for obtaining credits for Annual Energy Use under the
Performance-based Approach is compliance with specific items in the
HKSAR Government’s energy efficiency codes, as follows:
• items listed in Table 8.1 in Section 8 (from the Code of Practice for
Energy Efficiency of Lighting Installations [1]);
• items listed in Table 8.2 in Section 8 (from the Code of Practice for
Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations [2].
Where applicable, those requirements labelled as ‘basic’ in Table 8.1 for
lighting installations and in Table 8.2 for air-conditioning installations
shall be strictly complied with as a pre-requisite for credits under the
Performance-based Approach. Substitutes or trade-offs in performance
for such requirements are not accepted.
Items covered in the referenced codes not defined here as basic
requirements are regarded as the minimum (benchmark) performance
for the relevant systems or components, but trade-off in performance of
such systems or components with other systems or components is
allowed within the overall energy performance assessment.
Other building specific requirements are given in relevant sections that
define the assessment method for the particular building type.

TABLE 8.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

(1)
Section Requirements in the Code Practice for Energy Nature of the requirement in
(2)
Efficiency of Lighting Installations BEAM
New Buildings Existing Buildings
(3) (3)
4.1 Minimum allowable luminous efficacy of lamps Basic Basic
(3) (3)
4.2 Maximum allowable lamp control gear loss Basic Basic
(4,5)
4.3 Maximum allowable lighting power density Component- Base-line setting
(4)
performance
(6)
4.4 Interior lighting control points to meet minimum requirements Basic Basic
and to be accessible to the occupants
(1) Section numbers as in the Code.
(2) Refer to the Code for the Scope of application of the requirements, details of the criteria and exceptions.
(3) For BEAM, the requirements in Sections 4.1 and 4.2 in the Code shall be applicable to all types of buildings.
(4) Refer to Table 8.4 for maximum allowable lighting power densities for premises types not covered by the Code.
(5) Used as the lighting power density in premises for the prediction of the annual energy use of the Baseline Building
model for determining the zero-credit level.
(6) For multi-tenanted buildings, this shall be confirmed by submitting a “Tenant’s fitting out specification” that governs
lighting installations and controls inside tenants’ areas.

1
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lighting Installations.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/lightingcop_2007.pdf
2
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations.
http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/accop_2007.pdf

Page 8-4
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.1 ANNUAL ENERGY USE

TABLE 8.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING INSTALLATIONS

Section Requirements in the Code of Practice for Energy Nature of the requirement in BEAM
(1)
Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations (2)
New Buildings Existing Buildings
(4)
4.1 Load calculation & plant sizing methods Basic Base-line setting
(4)
4.2 & 4.3 Indoor and outdoor design conditions Basic Base-line setting
5.1 Air distribution system: requirement for separate distribution Basic Basic
systems for zones with special temperature requirements
and air leakage limit on ductwork
(4)
5.2.2 Constant air volume (CAV) fan system power ≤ 1.6 W per l/s Component- Base-line setting
performance
(4)
5.2.3.1 Variable air volume (VAV) fan system power ≤ 2.1 W per l/s Component- Base-line setting
performance
(4)
5.2.3.2 VAV fan power no more than 55% of design wattage at 50% Basic Base-line setting
design flow rate
(4)
6.1 Variable flow water pumping system to be capable of Basic Base-line setting
reducing system flow to ≤ 50% of design flow
(4)
6.2 Water pipe frictional loss ≤ 400 Pa/m Component- Base-line setting
performance
7.1.1 Provision of at least one automatic temperature control Basic Basic
device per system
7.1.2 Thermostatic controls for comfort should allow setting set Basic Basic
point up to 29ºC or above
7.1.3 Thermostatic controls for comfort should allow setting set Basic Basic
point down to 16ºC or below
7.1.4 Thermostatic controls for comfort should allow setting a Basic Basic
dead-band of at least 2ºC between cooling and heating
operation
7.2 Active humidity control, where used for comfort control, Basic Basic
should be capable of preventing humidifying to above 30%
and dehumidifying to below 60% in relative humidity
7.3.1 Each air-conditioned zone should be controlled by individual Basic Basic
thermostatic corresponding to temperature within the zone
7.3.2 The controls should not permit heating and cooling to take Basic Basic
place in sequence or simultaneously
(3) (5)
7.4.1 AC systems should be equipped with automatic setback Optional feature N/A
control or could be shut down during non-use periods
(3) (5)
7.4.2 Each hotel guestroom should be provided with a single Optional feature N/A
master switch that will turn-off conditioned air supply or reset
thermostat setting with or without reduction in fan speed
8 Minimum insulation thickness for chilled water and refrigerant Basic Basic
pipes, ductworks and air handling unit casings
(4)
9 Minimum AC equipment efficiency Component- Base-line setting
performance
(1) Section numbers as in the Code
(2) Refer to the Code for the Scope of application of the requirements, details of the criteria and exceptions
(3) The prediction of the annual energy use for the Assessed Building will take the effect of the feature into account
(4) Applicable to the prediction of the annual energy use of the Baseline Building model for determining the zero-credit
level
(5) Effects to be reflected in the metered energy consumption in the Assessed Building

8.1.3 ASHRAE APPROACH ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2007 Energy Standard for Buildings Except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings is to provide minimum requirements for
the energy-efficient design of buildings except low-rise residential
buildings. Appendix G of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 provides the alternative
approach, which is intended for use in rating the energy efficiency of
building designs that exceed the requirement of Section 11 of the
ASHRAE standard 90.1-2007. It may be useful for evaluating the
performance of all proposed designs, including alterations and additions
to existing buildings, except designs with no mechanical systems. The
detailed requirement, assumption and modeling methodology for
calculating the proposed and baseline building performance shall be
made reference to the ASHRAE Standard.

Page 8-5
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

8.2 BASELINE BUILDING 8.2.1 ENVELOPE DESIGN FEATURES

MODEL 8.2.2 COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS/HOTEL BUILDINGS
8.2.3 OTHER BUILDING TYPES
8.2.4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
8.2.5 INDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS, OCCUPANCY DENSITIES AND
VENTILATION AND INFILTRATION RATES
8.2.6 INTERNAL LOADS
8.2.7 AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM DESIGN AND EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE
8.2.1 ENVELOPE DESIGN The characteristics to be incorporated into the Baseline Building model
FEATURES include:
• envelope design features;
• indoor design conditions, ventilation rates, occupation densities and
usage patterns;
• internal load intensities and usage patterns, and
• performance of air-conditioning systems and equipment.

The Baseline Building model shall satisfy the minimum requirement of

relevant regulations, code of practice, or those that are regarded in local
practice as the basic requirements.
The Baseline Building model will not be incorporated with skylights even
if there are skylights in the Assessed Building.

8.2.2 COMMERCIAL The regulatory control over the overall thermal transfer value (OTTV) of
BUILDINGS/HOTEL new commercial and hotel buildings is taken as the benchmark envelope
BUILDINGS design for these two types of building. The envelope of the Baseline
Building model will be assigned with characteristics that barely comply
with the OTTV requirement as stipulated in Buildings Department’s
Practice Note APP-67 [ 1 ]. Calculation of OTTV shall be based on the
method and data given in the Code of Practice for Overall Thermal
Transfer Value in Buildings [ 2 ]. Since, according to this OTTV calculation
method, the heat gain from fenestration dominates the OTTV of a
building, adjustment of the envelope characteristics from the ‘as
designed’ condition to the baseline condition shall be made by varying
the fenestration area at the external walls or roofs.
The modification of the envelope design of the Assessed Building into
that of the Baseline Building model shall preferably be made through
adjusting the window-to-wall area ratio (WWR, the ratio of the total
window area in the building façade to the total façade area). The WWR
shall be adjusted such that the OTTV of the envelope of the Baseline
Building model will just meet the relevant regulatory requirement (30
W/m² for a building tower and 70 W/m² for a podium).

8.2.3 OTHER BUILDING TYPES The default WWR area ratio of the Baseline Building model shall be 0.65.
For other types of new buildings, the Baseline Building model will be
assumed to have envelope components (windows, walls, roofs, etc.) of
construction characteristics as summarised in Table 8.3.

1 Buildings Department. PNAP APP-67. Energy Efficiency of Buildings Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation. June 2000.
http://www.bd.gov.hk/english/documents/pnap/signed/APP067se.pdf
2 Buildings Department. Code of Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995.
http://www.info.gov.hk/bd/english/documents/index_pnap.html

Page 8-6
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

TABLE 8.3 DEFAULT CHARACTERISTICS FOR THE BUILDING ENVELOPE (1)

External Thickness Material k ρ Cp α
walls (m) (W/mK) (kg/m³) (J/kgK) (-)
Layer 1 0.005 Mosaic Tiles 1.5 2500 840 0.58
Layer 2 0.01 Cement/Sand Plastering 0.72 1860 840
Layer 3 0.1 Heavy Concrete 2.16 2400 840
Layer 4 0.01 Gypsum Plastering 0.38 1120 840 0.65
Roofs
Layer 1 0.025 Concrete Tiles 1.1 2100 920 0.65
Layer 2 0.02 Asphalt 1.15 2350 1200
Layer 3 0.05 Cement/Sand Screed 0.72 1860 840
Layer 4 0.05 Expanded Polystyrene 0.034 25 1380
Layer 5 0.15 Heavy Concrete 2.16 2400 840
Layer 6 0.01 Gypsum Plaster 0.38 1120 840 0.65
Windows
Layer 1 0.006 Tinted Glass 1.05 2500 840 0.65
Window to wall area ratio 0.65
Symbols:
k Thermal conductivity
ρ Density
Cp Specific heat
α Solar absorptivity of exposed surface
SC Shading coefficient of glazing
(1) This applies to all types of buildings except commercial and hotel buildings. The envelope of the Baseline Building
model for such buildings will be set to achieve an OTTV that barely meets the threshold value stipulated in the
OTTV Code.

8.2.4 RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS In devising the Baseline Building model for a new residential building,
the major façade of each flat in the building will be identified, which will
be the group of external walls that are exposed to the same direction in
which the aggregate window area is the largest amongst all groups of
external walls (grouping determined with reference to the orientation of
walls). Only external walls that enclose air-conditioned rooms in the
flats shall be considered. In predicting the annual energy use and
maximum electricity demand for the Baseline Building model, each flat
in the building model will be rotated such that its major façade will be
facing west, the worst orientation in respect of solar heat gain in the
flats. However, the layout design of flats in the building, including their
respective orientations, will be modelled ‘as designed’ in the prediction
of the annual energy use of the Assessed Building.

8.2.5 INDOOR DESIGN The default indoor design conditions to be used for various types of
CONDITIONS, OCCUPANCY premises in the Baseline Building model shall be as given in Table 8.4.
DENSITIES AND These design indoor conditions correspond to the threshold design
VENTILATION AND conditions as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of
INFILTRATION RATES Air Conditioning Installations or, for those types of premises for which
such threshold values are unavailable in the Code, to typical conditions
found from surveys in existing buildings.
The default occupancy density and pattern, and ventilation and
infiltration rates for various types of premises shall be made reference
to Performance-based Building Energy Code (PBEC) [ 3 ]. The relevant
default values are as summarised in Tables 8.4 and 8.5 for both the
Baseline Building model and the Assessed Building.
Prediction of the energy use in the Assessed Building shall be based on
the corresponding equipment densities, occupation densities and
ventilation rates adopted for the air-conditioning system design, but the

3 Electrical and Mechanical Services Department. Performance-based Building Energy Code.

http://www.emsd.gov.hk/emsd/e_download/pee/pb-bec_2007.pdf

Page 8-7
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

default indoor conditions and occupancy pattern still apply (Although

the use of design ventilation rates that are lower than the default values
will lead to a better outcome in the energy performance assessment, it
is not advisable as it will lead to a worse outcome in the indoor air
quality assessment).

TABLE 8.4 BASELINE BUILDING DEFAULT INDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS FOR VARIOUS PREMISES
Type of Premises Indoor design Occupancy Minimum Lighting Equipment
condition density Outdoor power power
Air intensity intensity
(Temp. ºC/RH %) (m²/person) (l/s-person) (W/m²) (W/m²)
Offices (General) 23 / 50% 8 8 17 25
Retail shop 22 / 50% 2.5 8 20 30
Restaurants 22 / 50% 5 10 21 20W/person (1)
Cinemas
Concert halls
Hotel guestrooms 22 / 50% 2 (per Rm) 30 (l/s-Rm) 17 900 (W/Rm)
Residential flats
Bedrooms 22 / 50% Note (2) Note (3) Note (2)
Living/dinning rooms 22 / 50% Note (2) Note (3) Note (2)
Schools
Classrooms/ Laboratory 23 / 50% 2 8 17 10
(or no. of seat)
Libraries 23 / 50% 5 8 17 10
Pubic libraries
(1) 10 W per person for sensible heat and 10 W per person for latent heat.
(2) Quantified on per room basis; see Tables 8.5.1 and 8.5.2.
(3) The assumption is made that there will not be a dedicated ventilation supply for living and dining rooms and
bedrooms in residential buildings. Also see footnotes in Tables 8.5.1 and 8.5.2.

8.2.6 INTERNAL LOADS The lighting power intensities to be used for various types of premises
in the Baseline Building model shall be the threshold compliance values
as stipulated in the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lighting
Installations applicable to the types of premises. For those types of
premises that the lighting energy code does not cover, default values
established from building surveys are used. The relevant default values
for lighting power intensity for use with the Baseline Building model are
as summarised in Table 8.4.
Likewise, default values of equipment power density as summarised in
Table 8.4 will be applied to the Baseline Building model.
For both the Assessed Building and its Baseline Building model of new
commercial buildings and hotels, the default utilisation pattern of
lighting and equipment shall be made reference to the PBEC. For both
the Assessed Building and its Baseline Building model of those types of
premises not covered in the energy codes, the default utilisation
patterns of internal loads, as summarised in Table 8.5, shall be used in
the Energy Use and Maximum Electricity Demand predictions.

Page 8-8
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

TABLE 8.5 DEFAULT DAILY PATTERNS OF OCCUPANCY, FRESH AIR SUPPLY, AND LOADS
TABLE 8.5.1 LIVING AND DINING ROOMS IN RESIDENTIAL FLATS (ALL DAYS)(1)
Hour Occupancy AC Fresh Air Infiltration Lighting Equipment
(2)
From To (No./Rm) Operation Supply rate (ach) (W/Rm)
0 5 0.00 Off 0.00 27
5 6 0.00 Off 0.00 27
6 7 0.00 Off 0.30 52
7 8 0.50 Off 0.50 77
8 9 1.00 Off 0.00 77
9 10 1.00 Off 0.00 77
10 11 1.00 Off 0.00 77
11 12 1.00 Off 0.00 77
12 13 0.90 Off 0.00 77
13 14 1.00 On 0.50 89
14 15 1.00 On Note (3) Note (4) 0.00 61
15 16 1.00 On 0.00 61
16 17 1.00 On 0.00 61
17 18 1.00 On 0.00 61
18 19 1.00 On 0.50 61
19 20 1.50 On 1.00 142
20 21 2.00 On 1.00 142
21 22 2.00 On 1.00 142
22 23 2.00 Off 1.00 142
23 24 0 Off 0.5 142
(1) Lighting load pattern is in fractions of the peak values. Occupancy and equipment load patterns are defined directly
in number of persons per room and Watt per room.
(2) The air-conditioner operation pattern applies to all days in April to October inclusive. The assumption is made that
Air-conditioners will not be used in other months in the year.
(3) Fresh air supply assumed to be absent.
(4) Infiltration rate assumed to be 0.5 air change per hour (ach) during air-conditioned periods and unoccupied periods.
Infiltration rate assumed to be 3 ach during non-air-conditioned periods while indoor temperature stays at or below
22 ºC and to be 12 ach when this temperature is exceeded.

(1)
TABLE 8.5.2 BEDROOMS IN RESIDENTIAL FLATS (ALL DAYS)

Hour Occupancy AC Fresh Air Infiltration Lighting Equipment

To (2)
From (No./Rm) Operation Supply rate (ach) (W/Rm)
0 1 2.00 On 0.30 36
1 5 2.00 On 0.00 0
5 6 2.00 On 0.00 0
6 7 2.00 On 0.50 0
7 8 0.50 Off 0.20 0
8 9 0.00 Off 0.30 0
9 10 0.00 Off 0.00 0
10 11 0.00 Off 0.00 0
11 12 0.00 Off 0.00 0
12 13 0.00 Off 0.00 0
13 14 0.50 On Note (3) Note (4) 1.00 0
14 15 0.50 On 1.00 15
15 16 0.50 On 1.00 15
16 17 0.50 On 1.00 15
17 18 0.50 On 0.00 15
18 19 0.50 On 1.00 15
19 20 0.50 On 1.00 36
20 21 1.00 On 1.00 36
21 22 1.00 On 1.00 36
22 23 1.00 On 1.00 45
23 24 2.00 On 0.6 45
(1) Lighting load pattern is in fractions of the peak values. Occupancy and equipment load patterns are defined directly
in number of persons per room and Watt per room.
(2) The air-conditioner operation pattern applies to all days in April to October inclusive. The assumption is made that
Air-conditioners will not be used in other months in the year.

Page 8-9
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

(3) Fresh air supply assumed to be absent.

(4) Infiltration rate assumed to be 0.5 air change per hour (ach) during air-conditioned periods and unoccupied periods.
Infiltration rate assumed to be 3 ach during non-air-conditioned periods while indoor temperature stays at or below
22 ºC and to be 12 ach when this temperature is exceeded.

8.5.3 CLASSROOMS IN SCHOOLS (1)

A) SUMMER SCHEDULE, MONDAY TO FRIDAY

Hour Occupancy Fresh Air Infiltration rate Lighting Equipment

From To Supply (ach)
0 8 0.00 0.00 0.00
7 8 0.00 0.00 0.00
8 9 0.90 0.95 0.95
9 10 0.90 0.95 0.95
10 11 0.90 0.95 0.95
11 12 0.90 Note (2) Note (3) 0.95 0.95
12 13 0.90 0.95 0.95
13 14 0.45 0.50 0.50
14 15 0.00 0.00 0.00
15 16 0.00 0.00 0.00
16 24 0.00 0.00 0.00

B) NORMAL SCHEDULE, MONDAY TO FRIDAY

Hour Occupancy Fresh Air Infiltration rate Lighting Equipment

From To Supply (ach)
0 8 0.00 0.00 0.00
7 8 0.00 0.00 0.00
8 9 0.90 0.95 0.95
9 10 0.90 0.95 0.95
10 11 0.90 0.95 0.95
11 12 0.45 Note (2) Note (3) 0.75 0.75
12 13 0.45 0.75 0.75
13 14 0.90 0.95 0.95
14 15 0.90 0.95 0.95
15 16 0.90 0.95 0.95
16 17 0.45 0.50 0.50
17 24 0.00 0.00 0.00
(1) Occupancy, lighting load and equipment load patterns are in fractions of the peak values. Classrooms will be
occupied only for five days per week, following the Summer Schedule in the first two weeks in September and in May
and June, and following the Normal Schedule for other school days.
(2) Fresh air supply assumed to be maintained by infiltration for replenishing exhaust by fan(s)
during air-conditioned periods
(3) Infiltration rate assumed to be 5 air change per hour (ach) during occupied periods and 1 ach during unoccupied
periods.

8.2.7 AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM The minimum permissible energy performance of air-conditioning

DESIGN AND EQUIPMENT system designs and equipment, as stipulated in the Code of Practice
PERFORMANCE for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations, will be assumed
to be the performance of the air-conditioning installations in the
Baseline Building model. Design values will be adopted in predicting
the annual energy use in the Assessed Building.
Where unitary, window- or split-type air-conditioners of capacities falling
outside the control of the air-conditioning energy code, performance
data as summarised in Table 8.6 will be assumed for both the Baseline
Building model and the Assessed Building. If the developer can provide
evidence that air-conditioners of better performance will be adopted in
the Assessed Building, the annual energy use prediction for the
Assessed Building will be based on such performance.
Where a central air-conditioning plant is used to serve multiple types of
premises in the same building, prediction of the annual energy use and

Page 8-10
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.2 BASELINE BUILDING MODEL

the maximum electricity demand of the central air-conditioning plant will

be based on the simultaneous total cooling load on the plant from all
the served premises, taking into account also the periods of air-
conditioning provisions for different types of premises, and the
sequencing control strategy that will be applied to control the operation
of the chillers and pumps in the plant.

TABLE 8.6 MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE RATED COP OF AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT (1)

Rated Input Power Window type Split Type and Floor Standing
0.56 - 2.24 (kW)
2.3 2.4
0.75 - 3.0 (hp)
> 2.24 (kW)
n/a 2.5
> 3.0 (hp)
(1)
The rated COP shall be based on 35ºC outdoor dry-bulb temperature; 27ºC indoor dry-bulb temperature and 19ºC
indoor wet-bulb temperature; and power supply at 220V, 50Hz.

Page 8-11
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.3 EQUIVALENT CARBON DIOXIDE EMISSIONS

8.3 EQUIVALENT There are at present two power companies generating and selling
CARBON DIOXIDE electricity to consumers in Hong Kong. One of the power companies
uses primarily coal for generating electricity but the other uses natural
EMISSIONS gas as well. The carbon dioxide emission per unit electricity consumed,
therefore, depends on from which power company the electricity was
generated. For the purpose of converting electricity consumption into the
equivalent carbon dioxide emission for BEAM assessment, an average
value, weighted by the market shares of the two power companies, is
used irrespective of from which power company an Assessed Building
will be fed with electricity supply. Besides electricity, buildings in Hong
Kong may also use gas for water heating, cooking and other purposes.
Majority of the buildings use town gas but buildings in certain areas may
use natural gas instead.
Where a mix of fuel is used in an existing building, such as a hotel, the
energy performance assessment will be based on the incurred carbon
dioxide emission rather than the amount of energy used. The following
lists the conversion factors to be used for this purpose:

ELECTRICITY 0.7 kg CO2 per kWh electricity consumed [1]

TOWN GAS 0.592 kg CO2 per unit of town gas consumed [1]
(1 unit of town gas = 48 mega-joules consumed)

NATURAL GAS 2.31 kg CO2 per kg of natural gas consumed

1 Environmental Protection Department. Guidelines to Account for and Report on Greenhouse Gas Emissions and
Removals for Buildings (Commercial, Residential or Institutional Purposes) in Hong Kong, 2008
http://www.epd.gov.hk/epd/english/climate_change/files/CAGuidelines_Eng.pdf

Page 8-12
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.4 INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONERS

8.4 INSTALLATION OF The temperature and flow rate of ambient air available to air-conditioners
AIR-CONDITIONERS for rejection of condenser heat affects the energy performance of the air-
conditioners. The ambient air flow rate and temperature is dependent on
the positions of the air-conditioners relative to the building envelope
elements and other air-conditioners. For instance, if the condenser side
of an air-conditioner is too close to an opposing wall, condenser air
discharge will be affected, which may lead to insufficient condenser
airflow, or the discharged hot air being re-circulated back into the
condenser. Also, an air-conditioner should not be too close to a solid wall
or to another air-conditioner at either side, as such conditions would limit
the amount of air that can be drawn through the condenser coil. In the
situation of a high rise residential building, the ambient air temperature
around the air-conditioners at the top floors could be higher than the
outdoor air temperature due to heat rejection from other air-conditioners
below. This problem will be particularly acute if the air-conditioners are
situated inside a recessed space with limited open area at the side.
At the indoor side, the location of air-conditioners will affect the thermal
environmental conditions in the indoor space, and may give rise to
condensation on wall or floor surfaces in adjacent spaces. For
maintaining uniform space air conditions inside an air-conditioned space,
air-conditioners should be installed at high level. This would also avoid
discomfort caused by the cold air stream discharged by the air-
conditioner blowing against the occupants. Furthermore, the air-
conditioner should not be too close to the ceiling slab or to a partition
wall to avoid contact of the slab or wall with the cold air. Otherwise, the
temperature at the other side of the slab or wall may become lower than
the dew point of the air in the adjacent spaces and may thus give rise to
condensation.
For the purpose of avoiding deterioration of air-conditioner performance
and maintenance of satisfactory indoor thermal environmental
conditions, the installation locations of air-conditioners are assessed in
BEAM. Credits will be awarded for buildings designed to provide air-
conditioner installation locations that comply with the minimum
dimensions specified in Tables 8.7 and 8.8. Minimum dimensions
specified in this table are as shown in Figures 8.2 and 8.3.

TABLE 8.7 MINIMUM DISTANCES FROM AIR-CONDITIONERS

Dimension A B C E F G J K M
Minimum value (m) 1.5 0.75 1.5 0.75 2.0 See Table 8.8 0.3 1.7 0.6

TABLE 8.8 MINIMUM WIDTH (G) OF RECESSED SPACE FOR HEAT REJECTION
Depth of recessed No. of Storey Minimum width (G) (m)
space (D) (m) (S) 2 A/C units per storey 4 A/C units per storey
D<6m S≤5 2.0 3.5
5 < S ≤ 10 2.5 Undesirable
10 < S ≤ 25 3.0 Undesirable
S > 25 3.5 Undesirable
10m > D ≥ 6m S≤5 2.0 2.5
5 < S ≤ 10 2.0 3.0
10 < S ≤ 20 2.0 3.5
20 < S ≤ 60 2.5 Undesirable
D ≥ 10m S ≤ 20 2.0 2.5
20 < S ≤ 35 2.0 3.0
35< S ≤ 60 2.0 3.5

Page 8-13
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.4 INSTALLATION OF AIR-CONDITIONERS

G
A
C
E
F

B
H
G
View
A-A
D

Window air- View A-A

conditioner
Figure 8.2 Layout plan and elevation of building

M
K

Figure 8.3 Elevation and section of a room in a residential building

A Distance between window air-conditioner and nearest obstructing wall at the

LEGEND FOR FIGURES
condenser side
8.2 AND 8.3:
B Distance between window air-conditioner and nearest obstructing wall at
either side
C Distance between two adjacent window air-conditioners side-by-side
D Depth of a recessed space into which air-conditioners reject heat
E Distance between two window air-conditioners perpendicular to each other
F Distance between two opposite walls with one window air-conditioner
installed per storey at one wall
G Distance between two opposite walls with two to 4 window air-conditioners
installed at either or both walls
H Height of building
J Distance of top side of air-conditioner from ceiling slab
K Distance of bottom side of air-conditioner from finished floor level
M Distance of side of air-conditioner from nearest wall surface

Page 8-14
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

8.5 PROVISIONS FOR 8.5.1 COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATIONS

ENERGY 8.5.2 COMMISSIONING PLAN
MANAGEMENT 8.5.3 COMMISSIONING
8.5.4 COMMISSIONING REPORT
8.5.5 INDEPENDENT COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
8.5.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8.5.7 ENERGY MANAGEMENT MANUAL
8.5.8 OPERATOR TRAINING AND FACILITIES

8.5.1 COMMISSIONING Functional performance testing procedures shall be defined and must be
SPECIFICATIONS used to functionally test systems, equipment, components, and modes of
operation. Test procedures must be documented to describe the
individual test procedure, the expected system response, and
acceptance criteria for each procedure. Testing documentation must
identify the actual system response and must provide any pertinent
observations.
Commissioning specifications shall be included in the construction
documents and embrace:

• scope and details of the commissioning process;

• qualifications and skills required by the commissioning agent;
• detailed description of the responsibilities of all parties included in
the commissioning process;
• systems, equipment and components to be commissioned;
• requirements for functional checklists and start-up;
• the functional performance testing process;
• specific functional performance test requirements, including
testing conditions and acceptance criteria for each piece of
equipment being commissioned;
• provisions for resolving deficiencies;
• requirements for reporting and documentation for commissioning;
• requirements for training; and
• requirements for an operations and maintenance manual, and for
systems and an energy management manual.

8.5.2 COMMISSIONING PLAN To execute commissioning in a comprehensive and orderly manner a

commissioning plan, covering a given system, equipment or component
shall be prepared. The plan shall include:

• start-up and inspection checklists and procedures;

• functional performance testing procedures and checklists;
• testing, adjusting, and balancing;
• development of a comprehensive operations and maintenance
manual and energy management manual; and
• completion of the commissioning report.
For each system commissioned the plan shall provide:
• an overview of the tasks to be executed during commissioning;
• a list of all features to be commissioned;

Page 8-15
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

• a list of reference documents related to commissioning, including

specification references, drawing list, and submittal drawings;
• a list of primary participants in the commissioning process and
their responsibilities;
• a plan for management, communication and documentation;
• description of checklists and tests to be performed, with reference
to specification;
• pre-start and start-up checklists;
• list of the functional performance tests to be performed; and
• description of the training to be provided to the operations and
maintenance personnel.

8.5.3 COMMISSIONING Start-up and inspection checklist should comprise the checks and tests
to determine that all components, equipment, subsystems, systems, and
interfaces between systems operate in accordance with specifications
and construction documents, including all modes and sequences of
control operation, interlocks and conditional control responses, and
specified responses to abnormal or emergency conditions.
The results of the start-up and check-out should be documented and
must be performed according to the manufacturer’s written instructions
for the systems and equipment being commissioned, and the as-fitted
construction documents.
Certificates of readiness should be prepared by the commissioning agent
verifying that start-up and inspections have been successfully completed
and that all equipment, systems, and controls are complete and ready for
functional performance testing.
After initial inspection and checking has been verified each sequence in
the sequence of operations shall be tested, including the following:

• start-up;
• shutdown;
• unoccupied and manual modes;
• modulation up and down the unit’s range of capacity, if applicable;
• staging, if applicable;
• power failure/power down;
• alarms;
• backup upon failure; and
• interlocks with other equipment.
The commissioning authority shall verify that:
• initial inspections, start-up and checking were successfully
completed;
• every point of the control system has been checked and that a
minimum sample of each type of control point is commanding,
reporting and controlling as specified in the as-fitted construction
documents;
• if any control point in the sample is not functioning as specified,
then an additional sample shall be checked, until all control points
in the sample are found to be performing as specified;
• a minimum sample of each type of sensor has been calibrated so
that the value reported in the control system represents the actual

Page 8-16
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

local value;
• if any sensor in the sample is out of calibration, then an additional
sample shall be re-calibrated, until all sensors in a the sample are
found to be in calibration;
• a minimum sample of each type actuators have been adjusted
and observed to fully close and open dampers and valves, and
that the reported values in the control system are correct;
• if any actuator, valve, or damper in the sample does not operate
as required, then an additional sample of each type of actuator,
valve, or damper shall be checked until all actuators, valves, or
dampers in the sample are found to be to be operating as
required;
• testing, adjusting and balancing by re-measuring a minimum
sample of values reported for each type of component, equipment,
subsystem, or system in the testing, adjusting and balancing
reports;
• if any re-measured value in the sample deviates from
requirements by more than 10 percent, then an additional samples
shall be re-measured for each type part for which there is a
deviation;
• any chimneys, chimney connectors and stacks are free of cracks,
blockages and leaks;
• ensure that proper combustion air is provided to equipment; and
• ensure that all appliances are installed in accordance with
applicable fire safety and local building codes.

The functional performance of each type of system, equipment, and

component shall be tested based on a minimum sample for each type. If
any part is found not to operate as required then additional samples shall
be tested to ensure satisfactory performance has been achieved.
As far as practicable equipment shall be tested to demonstrate
performance at near-design conditions (details of seasonally deferred
testing can be submitted as an alternative).
The efficiency of central plant shall be recorded for reference by
operations staff.
Functional performance testing can carried out using manual methods,
control system trend logs, stand-alone data loggers, etc, as considered
appropriate.

8.5.4 COMMISSIONING The report shall contain:

REPORT
• an executive summary;
• list of participants and their respective roles;
• a brief building description;
• an overview of the scope of commissioning and testing;
• a general description of testing and verification methods;
• a list of each feature or system commissioned; and
• for each piece of commissioned equipment, the determination of
the commissioning authority regarding the adequacy of the
equipment, documentation and training.

The commissioning report shall address the following areas:

• adequacy of equipment with respect to construction documents

Page 8-17
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

and design intent;

• equipment installation;
• functional performance and efficiency;
• equipment documentation;
• operations and maintenance review and recommendations; and
• operator training.

The functional performance and efficiency section for each piece of

equipment shall identify the verification method used observations and
conclusions from the testing.
The report must also include a list of outstanding commissioning issues
and any testing that is scheduled for a later date.
All outstanding deficiencies identified during or as a result of
commissioning activities shall have been corrected or must be separately
listed and highlighted in the commissioning report.
Each non-compliance issue must be referenced to where the deficiency
is documented.
Verification and documentation of installation of systems, equipment and
components shall ensure:

• that they are installed according to construction documents and

manufacturer’s instructions;
• or any differences between the final installation and the original
construction documents are documented;
• that other building systems or components are not compromising
the efficiency of the systems or features being commissioned;
• the start-up and inspection checklists were completed and
performed as required;
• that functional performance tests are completed as required.
• that HVAC piping testing and duct testing is completed and
documentation is included in operations and maintenance
manuals;
• sufficient functional testing of any control systems;
• that testing record include any deficiencies and corrections;
• final testing outcomes are included in the commissioning report
and in operations and maintenance manuals;
• documentation of any seasonally deferred testing and corrections
of any deficiencies;
• the operations and maintenance manual and energy management
manual are complete for all components, equipment, subsystems,
and systems that have been commissioned; and
• adequacy of training provided for the Owner's management,
operations and maintenance personnel.

If components, equipment, subsystems, or controls, or sequences of

operations as-built are differing from the original construction documents,
the report shall detail these differences.
If seasonally deferred testing is completed to be under the original
contract, the commissioning authority shall issue an addendum to the
report, arranged in the same manner as in the initial report.

Page 8-18
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

8.5.5 INDEPENDENT The Commissioning Agent shall be an entity that is independent of the
COMMISSIONING design term appointed by the Client to carry out the role of
AUTHORITY commissioning agent.

8.5.6 OPERATIONS AND The parties responsible for the design each system to be commissioned
MAINTENANCE shall provide in writing:
MANUAL
• the design intent;
• the basis of design; and
• full sequences of operation for all equipment and systems, all of
which must meet the legal requirements and industry wide
standards.

The description of the design intent should include as a minimum:

• space temperature and humidity criteria (refer also to the section
on IEQ);
• levels operator and/or occupant control over HVAC systems;
• ventilation requirements and related indoor air quality criteria (refer
also to the section on IAQ);
• performance criteria related to energy efficiency;
• environmental responsiveness of the facility; and
• commissioning criteria.

The basis of design shall include at a minimum:

• details of occupancy;
• space activity and any process requirements;
• applicable regulations, codes, and standards;
• design assumptions;
• performance standards and benchmarks; and
• control system appropriate for the skill of the operations and
maintenance staff.
The operations and maintenance manual must include for each piece of
equipment and each system:
• the name and contact information of the manufacturer or vendor
and installing contractor;
• submittal data; and
• operations and maintenance instructions with the models and
features for the subject site clearly marked.

The manual shall include only data for equipment that is actually
installed, and include the following:
• instructions for installation, maintenance, replacement, start-up;
• special maintenance requirements and sources for replacement
parts/equipment;
• parts list and details of and special tooling requirements;
• performance data; and
• warranty information.
The manual shall include an as-built documentation package for controls
covering the following:

Page 8-19
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

• control drawings and schematics;

• normal operation;
• shutdown;
• unoccupied operation;
• seasonal changeover;
• manual operation;
• controls set-up and programming;
• troubleshooting;
• alarms; and
• final sequences of operation.

8.5.7 ENERGY MANAGEMENT The details shall include:

MANUAL
• descriptions of the final design intent and basis of design,
including brief descriptions of each system;
• final sequences of operations for all equipment;
• procedures for seasonal start-up and shutdown, manual and
restart operation;
• as-built control drawings;
• for all energy-saving features and strategies, rationale description,
operating instructions, and caveats about their function and
maintenance relative to energy use;
• recommendations and brief method for appropriate accounting of
energy use of the whole building;
• specifications for re-calibration frequency of sensors and actuators
by type and use;
• recommendations for continuous commissioning or recommended
frequency for re-commissioning by equipment type, with reference
to tests conducted during initial commissioning;
• recommendations regarding seasonal operational issues affecting
energy use;
• list of all user-adjustable set points and reset schedules, with a
discussion of the purpose of each and the range of reasonable
adjustments with energy implications;
• schedules of frequency for reviewing the various set points and
reset schedules to ensure they still are near optimum;
• list of time-of-day schedules and a frequency to review them for
relevance and efficiency;
• guidelines for establishing and tracking benchmarks for building
energy use and primary plant equipment efficiencies;
• guidelines for ensuring that future renovations and equipment
upgrades will not result in decreased energy efficiency and will
maintain the design intent;
• list of diagnostic tools, with a description of their use, that will
assist facility staff for the building in operating equipment more
efficiently;
• a copy of the commissioning report; and
• index of all commissioning documents with notation as to their
location.

Page 8-20
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.5 PROVISION FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT

8.5.8 OPERATOR TRAINING The training program shall cover the following:
AND FACILITIES
• general purpose of each building system including basic theory of
operation, capabilities and limitations, and modes of control and
sequences of operation;
• review of control drawings and schematics;
• procedures for start-up, shutdown, seasonal changeover, normal
operation, unoccupied operation, and manual operation;
• controls set-up and programming;
• troubleshooting;
• alarms;
• interactions with other systems;
• operational monitoring and record keeping requirements, and the
use of data for analyzing system performance;
• adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation;
• any relevant health and safety issues;
• inspection, service, and maintenance requirements for each
system, including any need for specialised services;
• sources for replacement parts/equipment; and
• any tenant interaction issues.

The demonstration portion of the training program shall include at least

the following:
• operation typical examples of each system;
• start-up and shutdown procedures;
• operation under all specified modes of control and sequences of
operation;
• procedures under emergency or abnormal conditions; and
• procedures for effective operational monitoring.

The Client shall submit details in the form of drawings and a report
demonstrating:
• that proper maintenance facilities are provided for operations and
maintenance work in the form of workshop(s), office
accommodation and control room;
• adequate provision of chemical storage and mixing areas for
housekeeping products (central storage facilities and janitors
closets, where appropriate) to allow for adequate and secure
product storage with water in the space for mixing concentrated
chemicals; and
• adequate provision of drains plumbed for the appropriate disposal
of liquid waste products, equipped with separate outside venting,
and operated under negative pressure.

Page 8-21
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND BASELINES FOR WATER CONSUMPTION

8.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND The following details the default assumptions for the calculation of the
BASELINES FOR reduction in water use of the project building when compared with an
equivalent base line space.
WATER
CONSUMPTION
NUMBER OF WORKING The number of operational days per annum (Nop) should be obtained
OR OPERATIONAL DAYS from the design brief or Owner’s Project Requirement (OPR) document.
The number of non-operational days is equal to 365-Nop.
The same values of operational and non-operational days will be used
for both the project space and the base line space.

OCCUPANCY The number of occupants shall be taken from the design brief, or owner’s
CONSIDERATIONS project requirements (OPR). If this data is not obtainable then, in the
absence of any other data, the occupant space allowance should be
taken as 9 m2/person. [1]
The male:female ratio should be determined from the design brief or
OPR If the data is not available then the default assumptions are as
follows:
z In offices, the male to female occupancy ratio is 1:1 [2]
z In public places, the male to female occupancy ratio is 1:1.25 [2]
The same occupancy load shall apply to the project space and the
baseline space.

WC WATER USE The base line building will have a single flush WC (i.e. no low flush
option) with a flushing volume of 7.5 litres per flush. [3] The water closet,
cistern and flushing fitting shall be of compatible types.
For non-residential,
Males use the WC once per day. If a dual flush system is installed in the
project space, it is assumed that the WC will be flushed using the high
flush volume.
Females use the WC five (5) times per day. If a dual flush system is
installed in the project space, it is assumed that the average flush
volume is equal to the average of one (1) full flush and four (4) low
volume flushes.
For residential,
Residents use the WC five (5) times per day. If a dual flush system is
installed in the project space, same assumption for use of WC by
females can be applied.

WATER USE IN URINALS For the purposes of calculation, the baseline building would have urinals
fitted with 4.5 litres flush and manual controls. The urinal would be
flushed after every use. Male employees each use the urinal on average
four (4) times per day.

1 Hong Kong Buildings Department (1996), Code of Practice for the Provision of Means of Escape in Case of Fire, Building
Authority, Hong Kong.
2 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers and Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. ADV-28 Provision of Sanitary Fitments in Offices, Shopping Arcades and Department
Store, Places of Public Entertainment and Cinemas, May 2005.
3 Buildings Department. Practice Note for Authorized Persons, Registered Structural Engineers amd Registered
Geotechnical Engineers. PNAP No. APP-99 Flushing Volume for Flushing Cisterns.

Page 8-22
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.6 ASSUMPTIONS AND BASELINES FOR WATER CONSUMPTION

The water use in the project building would be based on the same
number of male employees each using the urinals four(4) times per day.
The calculation should consider the actual flushing strategy employed.
An estimate of the potential water savings is not able to be determined
as it would be influenced by the number of male employees and the time
interval of flushing.

HAND WASHING IN REST z Number of hand wash operations per occupant per day = 5
ROOMS z Hand washing time = 10 seconds
For the base line building, the tap flow rate is 8.3 litres/min (4 bar). [4]
Note that to obtain significant savings the project space would need to
install automatic controls such as proximity sensors to reduce the tap
operation time to less than the default assumption of 10 seconds per
hand washing operation.

WATER USE IN For non-residential,

PANTRIES/ KITCHEN z Number of pantry tap operations per occupant per day = 1
z Baseline faucet flow rate = 8.3 litres/min (4 bar) [4]
z Duration of use = 15 seconds
z Utensil washing operation carried out by hand = 6 litres of water per
operation
For residential,
z Number of use per resident per day = 4
z Baseline faucet flow rate = 8.3 litres/min (4 bar) [4]
z Duration of use = 60 seconds

SHOWERS z Number of use of shower per occupant per day = 0.1 (for non-
residential)
z Number of use of shower per resident per day = 1 (for residential)
z The baseline shower flow rate = 9.5 litres/min (4 bar) [4]
z Shower duration = 5 minutes (300 seconds)

OTHER APPLIANCES/ Justification for capacities of appliance/equipment used in the

EQUIPMENT benchmark building shall be provided by making reference to
regulations, standards, guides and other publication published by various
authorities.

4 USGBC, LEED 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovations Project

Page 8-23
 BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.7 SAMPLING PROTOCOL FOR IAQ ASSESSMENTS

8.7 SAMPLING As an alternative to the sampling protocol described in the Guidance

PROTOCOL FOR IAQ Notes, the sampling method can be simplified based on the following
rationale. This protocol seeks to reduce the number of sampling points
ASSESSMENTS and sampling parameters without significantly reducing the
representation of IAQ.

PRINCIPLE 1: Before sampling is undertaken, the population of IAQ zone has to be

DETERMINING THE defined. A sampling zone is defined as a region of indoor space, whether
POPULATION OF it is confined by partitions providing a physical barrier to another zones,
MEASUREMENT POINTS or a part of an open indoor space within which every physical location
(preferably the workstations) has the same quality of ventilating air, the
same distribution of the ventilating air and the same emission
characteristics of all significant pollutants. Within a zone, the pollutant
concentrations of a set of pollutants are expected to be unchanged within
any location in the zone, within the accuracy of the measuring
instruments used.
Air sampling zones can be defined by a suitably experienced person
during an initial walkthrough survey of all spaces. The total number of
zones forms the population of the representative air quality zones.

PRINCIPLE 2: If the zones within a building are viewed as the total population, once this
DETERMINING THE is defined, the number of sampling points can be computed using classic
NUMBER OF SAMPLING statistical sampling theory. Determination of the number of sampling
POINTS points is done using two procedures. The first procedure involves in
grouping of similar zones into ‘categories’. When zones have the same
three factors as defined in Principle 1, they will be grouped together to
form ‘category’. In a given category, zones are expected to have similar
pollutant profiles. For example, zones within a building where the
activities are the same, such as typical offices with sedentary workers
and non-smoking, served with typical air conditioning systems, and with
the same pollutant inventories within the zones, can be grouped together
to form a category.
The second procedure follows the definition of all the categories. The
classic statistical sampling comes into effect the number of sampling
points can be reduced to provide a more economical and viable
monitoring schedule. Typically, the number of sampling points (N) in a
category can be computed by equation (1).

t 2S 2
N=
d2 (1)

where t = number of standard deviations that account for the

confidence level
S = standard deviation for the variable to be estimated
d = the margin of error (e.g. 10% of the mean value).

PRINCIPLE 3: Either if the pollutant comes from outdoor sources and its concentration
at the intake point is below the prescribed criteria at all times, or if the
REDUCING THE NUMBER
pollutant is known to have a constant emission rate and its profile relative
OF SAMPLING
to the ventilation rate is known and is under control at all times, this
PARAMETERS IN EACH
pollutant can be discounted in IAQ sampling program.
SAMPLING POINT

PRINCIPLE 4: The reduction of sampling time is based on the assumption that when a
building enters into its routine operation that including the activities of the
REDUCING THE
occupancy and the operation of ventilation system, the function of the
SAMPLING TIME FOR
zone or the pollutant inventory are ever changing, it is reasonable to
EACH PARAMETER IN
assume that the pollution profiles of the target pollutants would remain
EACH SAMPLING POINT
similar with small changes of magnitude. When the pollutant profile is

Page 8-24
BEAM PLUS FOR NEW BUILDINGS APPENDICES
VERSION 1.1 8.7 SAMPLING PROTOCOL FOR IAQ ASSESSMENTS

known, a snapshot of measurement at any time can be used to

determine the equivalent 8-hour exposure, and to check if any abnormal
built up of the pollutant has occurred. This is particularly useful when
availability of instrumentation is a problem.

PRINCIPLE 5: If the simpler measuring instrument using in the sampling is different

from the requirement mentioned in the Guidance Notes for any reason,
CHOICE OF ALTERNATIVE
the calibration of this measuring instrument against the standard should
INSTRUMENTATION
be undertaken in order to prove that the measuring instrument is suitable
for the sampling. Therefore, the cost of sampling can be reduced if the
Client’s representative already has an instrument that is not specified in
the Guidance Note.

Page 8-25